arcgis - esri supportdownloads.esri.com/.../pad_/arcpad_userguide_1105r.pdf · 2007-12-05 · 3...

ArcGIS®

9Using ArcPad®

Copyright © 2000–2005 ESRI, Inc., and its licensor(s).

All Rights Reserved.

Printed in the United States of America.

The information contained in this document is the exclusive property of ESRI and its licensor(s). This work is protected under United States copyright law and the copyright laws of the given

countries of origin and applicable international laws, treaties, and/or conventions. No part of this work may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical,

including photocopying or recording, or by any information storage or retrieval system, except as expressly permitted in writing by ESRI. All requests should be sent to Attention: Contracts

Manager, ESRI, 380 New York Street, Redlands, CA 92373-8100, USA.

LICENSOR CREDITS

Portions of this work contain the intellectual property of MapTel and are used herein under license. Copyright © 1995–2005 MapTel. All rights reserved.

Portions of this work contain the intellectual property of LizardTech, Inc., and are used herein under license. Copyright © 1995–2004 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved.

MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending.

Portions of this work contain the intellectual property of Unisearch Limited and are used herein under license. Copyright © 2001 Unisearch Limited. All rights reserved.

DATA CREDITS

Elmore sample data: Coliban Region Water Authority, Bendigo, Victoria, Australia. The Coliban Region Water Authority (“The Authority”) believes that the information supplied is correct,

however it does not warrant the accuracy of that information. The Authority disclaims responsibility for any omissions, inaccuracies, discrepancies, errors of scale or any inconsistencies, which

may exist between the actual and the digital data supplied. The Authority further disclaims responsibility for any loss or damage including consequential loss or damage, suffered by any person

relying upon such information, whether that loss or damage is caused by negligence, or from any other cause whatsoever, on the part of the Authority, its employees agents and contractors.

Redlands trees sample data: Source: West Coast Arborists, Inc.

Redlands streets sample data: Tele Atlas. Copyright © 2005 Tele Atlas. All rights reserved.

Nyon data for screenshots: Tele Atlas N.V. Copyright © 2005 Tele Atlas N.V. All rights reserved.

QuickBird image of Redlands: DigitalGlobe, Inc. Copyright © 2005 DigitalGlobe, Inc. All rights reserved.

U. S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED/LIMITED RIGHTS

Any software, documentation, and/or data delivered hereunder are subject to the terms of the License Agreement. In no event shall the U.S. Government acquire greater than RESTRICTED/

LIMITED RIGHTS. At a minimum, use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR §52.227-14 Alternates I, II, and III (JUN 1987); FAR

§52.227-19 (JUN 1987) and/or FAR §12.211/12.212 (Commercial Technical Data/Computer Software); and DFARS §252.227-7015 (NOV 1995) (Technical Data) and/or DFARS §227.7202

(Computer Software), as applicable. Contractor/Manufacturer is ESRI, 380 New York Street, Redlands, CA 92373-8100, USA.

DISCLAIMER

THE DATA INCLUDED IN THIS WORK IS FROM AN INDEPENDENT COMPANY AND, AS SUCH, ESRI MAKES NO GUARANTEES AS TO THE QUALITY, COMPLETENESS, AND/

OR ACCURACY OF THE DATA. EVERY EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO ENSURE THE ACCURACY OF THE DATA INCLUDED IN THIS WORK, BUT THE INFORMATION IS

DYNAMIC IN NATURE AND IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ESRI AND THE DATA VENDOR(S) ARE NOT INVITING RELIANCE ON THE DATA, AND ONE SHOULD

ALWAYS VERIFY ACTUAL DATA AND INFORMATION. ESRI DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ESRI AND THE DATA VENDOR(S) SHALL ASSUME

NO LIABILITY FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF. ARCPAD SOFTWARE IS NOT

LICENSED FOR NAVIGATIONAL USE.

ESRI, the ESRI globe logo, ArcPad, ArcIMS, the ArcIMS logo, Geography Network, ArcGIS, the ArcGIS logo, ArcView, ArcEditor, ArcInfo, ArcMap, Avenue, www.esri.com, and

www.geographynetwork.com are trademarks, registered trademarks, or service marks of ESRI in the United States, the European Community, or certain other jurisdictions.

Other companies and products mentioned herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective trademark owners.

Attribution.pmd 11/15/2005, 3:56 PM1

iii

Contents Getting started

1 Welcome to ArcPad 3What can you do with ArcPad? 4Customizing ArcPad 8Tips on learning ArcPad 9

2 Introduction to Windows Mobile 11Overview of Windows CE and Windows Mobile 12Supported mobile devices 15Selecting a mobile device 16Transferring data to a Windows Mobile device 20Windows Mobile resources 22

3 Quick-start tutorial 25Exercise 1: Exploring your data 26Exercise 2: Working with geographic features 32Exercise 3: Capturing GPS data 39Exercise 4: Editing features 41

4 ArcPad basics 47Maps and layers 48Identifying features 48Starting ArcPad 50Using the Startup dialog box 51Running ArcPad within a skin 52Creating a skin definition file 54The ArcPad map window 55Opening a map 56Spatial and attribute indexes 59ArcPad toolbars 59

TOC.pmd 11/15/2005, 3:55 PM3

iv USING ARCPAD

Map properties 62Map projections 64Layer properties 65Moving around the map 67Rotating the map orientation 69Setting spatial bookmarks 70Locking the ArcPad application 73Setting ArcPad options 74Getting help 75Saving a map and exiting ArcPad 76Working with ArcPad files 78

Displaying data

5 Creating maps 81Creating a new map 82Adding layers 85Adding shapefiles 86Adding images 87Adding graphics layers 88Adding an ArcIMS Internet Server 89Adding ArcIMS layers 90About coordinate systems 91Specifying a coordinate system 92

6 Managing layers 95Turning a layer’s visibility on or off 96Changing a layer’s drawing order 97Removing a layer from the map 98Selecting a layer for the Identify tool 99

TOC.pmd 11/15/2005, 3:55 PM4

CONTENTS v

Selecting a layer for editing 100Layer properties 101Changing layer properties 102Creating a transparent layer 104The Map Grid layer 105

7 Symbolizing your data 109How symbology works in ArcPad 110Supported symbols 113Display quality 114Displaying symbology 115Defining simple symbology in ArcPad 117Defining complex symbology in ArcPad 120Working with scale-dependent symbology 122Labeling features with text 123

Querying data

8 Querying your data 129Identifying features 130Hyperlinks 132Finding features 134Using other tools on your query 139Finding a location 140Spatial and attribute indexes 141Using the Advanced Select tool 142Using other tools with the Advanced Select tool 146Measuring distance, area, and bearings on a map 147

TOC.pmd 11/15/2005, 3:55 PM5

vi USING ARCPAD

Using Data Capture Devices

9 Connecting your GPS receiver 157Introduction to GPS 158Supported GPS protocols 160Connecting your GPS receiver 162Setting communication parameters 165Activating your GPS 167The GPS/Rangefinder Debug tool 169Troubleshooting your GPS connection 173NMEA 0183 sentences recognized by ArcPad 175TSIP packets recognized by ArcPad 177

10 Using the GPS Position Window 179The GPS Position Window 180Opening and closing the GPS Position Window 186Selecting the position coordinate system 187Selecting the position measure of quality 188Toggling between the Skyplot, Signal Chart, and Compass 189

11 Navigating with your GPS 191Selecting a navigation destination using the Go To tool 192Selecting a navigation destination using the Find tool 194Selecting a navigation destination using the Advanced Select tool 197Selecting a navigation destination using the Go To Selected Feature tool 200Setting the distance alert 204Displaying the distance and bearing to the destination 206Displaying the bearing on the compass 207Using the Automatic Map Rotation tool 208The GPS Tracklog 209Starting and stopping the GPS Tracklog 214

TOC.pmd 11/15/2005, 3:55 PM6

CONTENTS vii

12 Using your rangefinder 217Introduction to rangefinders 218Supported rangefinder protocols 221Connecting your rangefindern 222Setting communication parameters 224Activating your rangefinder 225The GPS/Rangefinder Debug tool 226

13 Using your digital camera 229Supported digital cameras 230Setting camera options 231Taking a photo 233Creating a photo layer 236

Editing data

14 Editing basics 241Editing using a GPS 244Running ArcPad within a skin 245The Edit toolbar 247The Command toolbar 248Creating new shapefiles for editing 249Creating a QuickForm 253Displaying the Edit toolbar 258Selecting a layer for editing 259Selecting features for editing 260Setting snapping properties 264Moving features 266Undoing and canceling edits 271Deleting features 272

TOC.pmd 11/15/2005, 3:55 PM7

viii USING ARCPAD

15 Creating new features 273Creating point features 274Creating line features 278Creating polygon features 284Working with a graphics layer 290Creating repeated features 294Creating segmented polyline features 295Working with Offsets 297Working with Traverses 301Performing simple offsets 303Using a 1 point offset 306Using a 2 point offset 308Creating a linear traverse 310Creating a radial traverse 314

16 Creating new features with a GPS and rangefinder 317GPS Quality, Capture, and Alerts options 318Creating point features with a GPS 322Creating line features with a GPS 324Creating polygon features with a GPS 326Creating a point feature using a 1 point offset and a rangefinder 328

17 Editing existing features 331Extending a line 332Inserting and deleting vertices 334Moving a vertex 337Moving a vertex using offsets 340Changing the size of a feature 344Editing attributes 346

TOC.pmd 11/15/2005, 3:55 PM8

CONTENTS ix

Preparing data

18 ArcPad Tools for ArcGIS 351The ArcPad Tools for ArcGIS 352Preparing your data for ArcPad 354Getting data for ArcPad 7 355Exporting symbology for shapefiles 358Exporting and importing graphics layers 359Exporting ArcGIS styles 362

Appendix: Customizing ArcPad 365

Glossary 375

Index 395

TOC.pmd 11/15/2005, 3:55 PM9

TOC.pmd 11/15/2005, 3:55 PM10

Section 1

Getting started

IN THIS CHAPTER

3

Welcome to ArcPad 1• What can you do with ArcPad?

• Customizing ArcPad

• Tips on learning ArcPad

ESRI® ArcPad® software is a mobile mapping and geographic informationsystem (GIS) technology. Mobile computing is bringing fundamental changesto the way geography is utilized with the ability to bring your work with youand to interact directly with the world around you. Mobile GIS comprises theintegration of four technologies: GIS, lightweight hardware, the globalpositioning system (GPS), and wireless communication.

ArcPad provides database access, mapping, GIS, and GPS integration tousers out in the field via handheld and mobile devices. Data collection withArcPad is efficient and significantly improved with immediate data validationand availability.

4 USING ARCPAD

What can you do with ArcPad?

Capturing data in the field

ArcPad provides a comprehensive set of tools users need forcollecting and capturing data in the field including redlining usinga graphics layer, and extensive support for capture devices suchas GPS receivers, rangefinders, and cameras.

Using your existing data

ArcPad leverages existing mapping and GIS software systemsand databases. ArcPad supports vector map and raster imagedisplay including numerous industry-standard formats. Inaddition, ArcPad supports most of the symbology used in ArcGISDesktop, enabling you to display layers in your mobile GISapplications using the standards of your organization.

ArcPad supports vector and raster data in amultilayered environment.

ArcPad enables you to identify target areas forinspections using a graphics layer. The cameraicon represents the location of a feature with ageoreferenced photo.

ArcPad enables you to capture photos in the fieldusing a connected digital camera. The photos arethen immediately associated with features in alayer.

WELCOME TO ARCPAD 5

Moving around your map

ArcPad has a number of map navigation tools, including variablezoom and pan, fixed zoom, zoom to a specified layer or spatialbookmark, and center on the current GPS position.

Querying your data

ArcPad enables you to identify features by tapping on them;display additional information about features through ahyperlink; navigate to a specific geographic coordinate; andlocate a feature within the extent of your map, label it, and zoomto it.

Create a spatial bookmark to easily identify yourstudy area.

Use the Identify tool to display information abouta feature.

Locate a feature, label it, and zoom to it.

6 USING ARCPAD

Measuring distances on your map

ArcPad lets you measure distance, area, and bearings on yourmap with three measuring tools: Measure, Freehand Measure,and Radial Measure.

Navigating with your GPS

Connect a GPS to your mobile device and let ArcPad guide you.ArcPad provides navigational information from the current GPSposition to the destination and a GPS tracklog that illustrates thepath you have traveled.

Measure thedistance alongfeatures in yourmap.

Use the GPS tracklog to logthe path you have traveled.

Use the compass to viewthe direction from thecurrent GPS position to theselected destination in red.

WELCOME TO ARCPAD 7

Editing your data

In addition to displaying and querying spatial data, ArcPadallows you to create and edit spatial data using input from eitherthe mouse pointer, pen, GPS, or rangefinder. ArcPad also supportsoffsets, traverses, repeated attributes, and segmented lines toensure more accurate and efficient data capture.

Including ArcPad in your GIS solution

ArcPad is the field component to your ArcGIS solution. Use theArcPad Tools custom toolbar for ArcGIS. These tools allow youto extract, convert, and project your data using the ArcGISDesktop products (ArcView, ArcEditor, or ArcInfo).

Edit your existing line features by addingand moving vertices (left) or by usingoffsets and rangefinders (right).

Use data maintained in ArcGISDesktop in the field with ArcPad.

8 USING ARCPAD

Customizing ArcPad

ArcPad Application Builder is the development framework forbuilding custom ArcPad applications for Mobile GIS projects.Creating a customized field solution for data collection and datamaintenance is essential to ensure the integrity and value of yourGIS data. The ability to accurately capture attribute and spatialdata directly in the field improves efficiency and reduces timespent correcting or reentering the data into the main databaseback in the office.

With ArcPad Application Builder, you can:

• Design custom forms to streamline data collection

• Ensure data integrity by validating data directly in the field

• Tailor applications to user skill levels and specific fields tasks

• Write scripts that interact with ArcPad’s internal objects

• Develop scripts to support data collection devices

All customization for ArcPad is performed on the desktop anddeployed on the mobile device. ArcPad Application Builderincludes a copy of ArcPad, ArcPad Studio, detailed onlinedocumentation, sample code, and first-year maintenance.

For more information about customizing ArcPad and ArcPadApplication Builder, refer to the Appendix at the end of this book.You can also visit the ESRI Web site at www.esri.com/applicationbuilder.

Create effective fieldsolutions that includecustom tools andforms with datavalidation usingArcPad ApplicationBuilder.

WELCOME TO ARCPAD 9

Tips on learning ArcPad

If you’re new to field GIS and mapping, you don’t have to learneverything about ArcPad to get immediate results. Begin learningArcPad by reading Chapter 3, ‘Quick-start tutorial’. This chaptershows you how easy it is to work with ArcPad to accomplishyour field mapping goals. ArcPad comes with the data used in thetutorial, so you can follow along step by step on your mobiledevice or desktop computer. You can also read the tutorialwithout using your computer.

Finding answers to questions

Like most people, your goal is to complete your tasks whileinvesting a minimum amount of time and effort on learning how touse software. You want intuitive, easy-to-use software that givesyou immediate results, without having to read pages ofdocumentation. However, when you do have a question, youwant the answer quickly so that you can complete your task.That’s what this book is all about—getting you the answers youneed when you need them.

This book describes how to add your geographic data into yourArcPad map, explore the data, and organize and manage the data.Although you can read this book from start to finish, you’ll likelyuse it more as a reference. When you want to know how to do aparticular task such as collecting GPS position coordinates, justlook it up in the table of contents or index. What you’ll find is aconcise, step-by-step description of how to complete the task.Some chapters also include detailed information that you can readif you want to learn more about the concepts behind the tasks.You may also refer to the glossary in this book if you come acrossany unfamiliar terms or need to refresh your memory.

In addition to this book, the ‘ArcPad Reference Guide’ provides adescription of all the ArcPad tools and all the fields in the ArcPadOptions, GPS Preferences, Rangefinder Preferences, Table ofContents, and Feature Properties dialog boxes.

Getting help in the field

ArcPad includes a ‘Quick Reference’ guide for the tools andbuttons on the ArcPad interface which can be easily used in thefield.

Getting started with ArcPad Templates

A collection of ArcPad Templates is available as a starting pointfor creating your own ArcPad projects. The templates highlightspecific applications of ArcPad technology to solve industryspecific problems. These templates vary from tools to applets toforms, all of which illustrate the practical benefits of Arcpad . Visitthe ESRI Web site at www.esri.com/publicarcpad to learn moreand download an ArcPad Template.

Learning about ArcPad Application Builder

For more information about customizing ArcPad and ArcPadApplication Builder, refer to the Appendix at the end of this book.You can also visit the ESRI Web site at www.esri.com/applicationbuilder.

Using the ArcPad sample data

ArcPad includes three sets of sample data to get you started:Redlands, Elmore, and World. These data sets are used in thetasks throughout the book so that you can easily follow along.To load the sample data onto your Windows Mobile device, fromthe Start menu, click on Programs>ArcGIS>ArcPad 7>InstallArcPad 7.0 <name> Sample Data on Windows Mobile.

Redlands, California, USA

The Redlands sample data includes the following layers: an aerialphotograph from DigitalGlobe (jp2), shapefiles for parks,

10 USING ARCPAD

railroads, school boundary areas, streets, and trees, a graphicslayer (FieldNotes), a photo layer, and georeferenced photos. Thetrees data was provided by West Coast Arborists, Inc. Thestreets data was provided by TeleAtlas. The QuickBird image ofRedlands was provided by DigitalGlobe, Inc.

Elmore, Victoria, Australia

The Elmore sample data includes the following layers: an aerialphotograph (.jp2), shapefiles for customers, rail, road, sewermanholes, pump stations, out flow, pipes, rising mains,connection points, morphology, parcels, land use, and zoning.For detailed information about the Elmore data, see Chapter 3,‘Quick start tutorial’. The Coliban Region Water Authority,Bendigo, Victoria, Austalia provided some of the Elmore sampledata.

World

The World sample data includes the following layers: world cities,rivers, lakes, world time zones, counties, and ocean. The Worlddata set is very large so you would most likely only use portionsof this data on your Windows Mobile device. Learn how toexport data for ArcPad using ArcGIS Desktop in Chapter 18,‘ArcPad Tools for ArcGIS’.

Nyon, Vaud, Switzerland (Not included as sample)

Although not included with ArcPad, street data for Nyon fromTele Atlas (Copyright © 2005 Tele Atlas NV) was used toillustrate many of the tasks for Section 4, ‘Using Data CaptureDevices’.

Contacting ESRI

If you need to contact ESRI for technical support, see the productregistration and support card you received with ArcPad or visithttp://support.esri.com/arcpad. You can also visit ESRI on theWeb at www.esri.com/arcgis for more information on ArcPad andArcGIS Desktop.

ESRI education solutions

ESRI provides educational opportunities related to geographicinformation science, GIS applications, and technology. You canchoose among instructor-led courses, Web-based courses, andself-study workbooks to find education solutions that fit yourlearning style and pocketbook. For more information, go towww.esri.com/education.

IN THIS CHAPTER

11

Introduction to Windows Mobile 2• Overview of Windows CE and

Windows Mobile

• Supported mobile devices

• Selecting a mobile device

• Transferring data to a WindowsMobile device

• Windows Mobile and Windows CEresources

The Windows® Mobile and Windows CE operating systems have similaruser interfaces and file systems to the desktop versions of Windows, butthere are also many differences. This chapter discusses some of thesedifferences, especially those that are encountered when using ArcPad. Thechapter ends with a section on resources that are useful whether you arenew to Windows Mobile and Windows CE, or an experienced user.

12 USING ARCPAD

Overview of Windows CE and Windows Mobile

Windows CE

Windows CE (also referred to as Windows CE .NET) is a 32-bit,multitasking, and multithreaded operating system that is designedto run on embedded and mobile devices. There are a wide rangeof embedded and mobile devices using Windows CE, such ashandheld computers, Personal Digital Assistants (PDAs), gaspumps, point-of-sale terminals, game computers, and evenautomated cow-feeding machines.

Windows CE is not an operating system that can simply beinstalled on a device or computer. It requires a developmenttoolset, which a manufacturer uses to configure the operatingsystem for a specific hardware platform, including the userinterface, processor chip, drivers, and application programminginterface (API). The resultant operating system is burned into thedevice’s read-only memory (ROM). The operating system canonly be changed or upgraded by physically changing the ROMchip, or by a ROM software upgrade if the device uses a flash orrewritable ROM chip.

Windows CE implements a subset of the Win32 API, which wascompletely rewritten for embedded devices. Consequently,Windows CE has a lot of similarities to desktop versions ofWindows. From a user’s perspective, the main similarities are theuser interface and the file system.

The Windows CE user interface, or shell, is a separate componentof the operating system which the developer of a Windows CEdevice can optionally choose to use. Windows Mobile is animplementation of the Windows CE development platform whichMicrosoft has developed for mobile devices. The WindowsMobile user interface is quite different to the Windows CE userinterface, even though the underlying operating system isbasically the same.

Windows CE, Pocket PC, and Windows Mobile

In the past few years Microsoft has used a number of terms forthe version of Windows used for mobile devices.

In 2000, Microsoft introduced the Pocket PC, which usedWindows CE 3.0 as the underlying operating system togetherwith a new graphical user interface, and additional applicationssuch as Pocket Word. Although technically these new deviceswere running Windows CE, they were branded and referred to asPocket PCs. Consequently, many users were unaware that PocketPC devices used Windows CE as the underlying operatingsystem.

In 2003, Microsoft released a new version of Pocket PC, withWindows CE 4.2 as the underlying operating system. However, inorder to create a stronger branding, Microsoft started referring tothese new Pocket PC devices as Windows Mobile devices. (Morespecifically, these new devices were Windows Mobile 2003 forPocket PC devices.)In 2004, Microsoft released another update, Windows Mobile2003 Second Edition, and has subsequently dropped the use ofthe term “Pocket PC”.In 2005, Microsoft released Windows Mobile 5.0, which is builtusing the Windows CE 5.0 development platform.

With ArcPad 5 and ArcPad 6, for ease of communication ESRIused the term “Windows CE” as a generic term to include bothWindows CE and Pocket PC devices. For the first few years thisapproach worked as there were very few Pocket PC devices onthe market – and most rugged mobile devices used Windows CE.Today the situation has reversed with most devices runningWindows Mobile and very few devices running pure WindowsCE. Consequently, with ArcPad 7, ESRI will be using the term“Windows Mobile” as a generic term to include both WindowsMobile and Windows CE devices.

INTRODUCTION TO WINDOWS MOBILE 13

Windows Mobile

If you are familiar with desktop Windows, you shouldimmediately recognize and be able to use the Windows Mobileuser interface.

The similar file system for desktop Windows (Windows XP andWindows 2000) and Windows Mobile means that no conversiontakes place when copying or moving files between desktop PCsand Windows Mobile devices. The only exception is when thecommunication software, Microsoft ActiveSync®, is specificallyconfigured to convert files to formats used by Windows Mobileapplications such as Pocket Word.

ArcPad takes advantage of the similar file systems when sharingGIS data with desktop GIS software. GIS files which are supportedby ArcPad, such as shapefiles and supported images, can beused with desktop GIS software, such as ArcView, and thencopied to the Windows Mobile device for use with ArcPad—nofile conversion is required at any point. Although the file systemsare similar, the medium for storing files is quite different andconstitutes one of the main differences, from a user’s perspective,between Windows Mobile and desktop Windows.

File storage and program memory

Windows Mobile devices do not use hard drives for storage likedesktop PCs—except when a CompactFlash or PC Card harddrive is used as an accessory for additional storage. Instead,ROM, random access memory (RAM), and flash memory are usedfor storage. Just as on desktop PCs, RAM is volatile—meaningthat the contents of RAM are lost when a Windows Mobiledevice is rebooted or shutdown. Unlike desktop PCs, switchingoff a Windows Mobile device does not clear the contents ofRAM since in the latter case only the screen is turned off and notthe actual device.

The operating system is stored in ROM; it is not stored on thehard drive as in desktop PCs. Consequently, Windows Mobiledevices boot up much more quickly than desktop PCs. Readingthe operating system from ROM is much faster than reading theoperating system from a hard disk.

RAM is used for storing both application programs and data, aswell as for running the operating system and programs.(Although, with Windows Mobile 5.0 devices, RAM will only beavailable for running the operating system and programs.Windows Mobile 5.0 devices will include non-volatile flashmemory, or built-in storage, for installing application programsand data.) RAM on a Windows Mobile device can be viewed asthe equivalent of the combination of a desktop PC’s RAM, harddrive, and virtual memory or paging file space. On desktop PCsthe combined RAM and virtual memory is typically at least 512MB, while on Windows Mobile devices the total RAM istypically 64 MB.

Storage cards—either flash memory or hard drives—can increasethe amount of storage space for a Windows Mobile device, butthey cannot increase the amount of memory available for runningprograms. Programs can only run in the memory installed on thedevice. It is therefore important to limit the amount of data andprograms stored in RAM and in so doing maximize the amount offree memory available for running programs. Fortunately, anincreasing number of Windows Mobile devices include built-in,non-volatile, flash memory—in addition to ROM and RAM. Forthese devices it is recommended that applications, and optionallydata, be installed in the built-in storage—keeping most of theRAM free for running the operating system and programs.Different Windows Mobile devices use different names for thebuilt-in storage: Dell uses the name Built-in Storage, HP uses thename iPAQ File Store, Thales uses the name MyDevice, andTrimble uses the name Disk.

14 USING ARCPAD

Windows Mobile automatically manages the allocation of memoryfor storage and running programs. You can use the Memorydialog box on Windows Mobile, or the Memory page of theSystem Properties dialog box on Windows CE, to view how muchmemory is allocated, used, and free for storage and programs, aswell as for adjusting the memory allocation.

To configure memory on Windows Mobile, tap Start>Settings, theSystem tab, and the Memory icon to open the Memory dialogbox.

To configure memory on a Windows CE device, tapStart>Settings>Control Panel, then double-tap the System icon to

open the System Properties dialog box. Tap the Memory tab toopen the Memory settings page.

The left part of the slider bar represents storage memory—inRAM—while the right part of the slider bar represents memoryfor running programs. The amount of storage and programmemory allocated and in use is reported below the slider bar.Windows Mobile also shows the amount of free storage andprogram memory. You can adjust the amount of memory allocatedfor storage and programs by moving the slider to the left or to theright.


Supported mobile devices

ArcPad 7 supports the following Windows operating systems:Windows 2000 and XP, Windows CE and Windows Mobile.ArcPad does not support specific Windows Mobile or WindowsCE devices, but instead supports specific Windows CE versionsand processor chips. ArcPad should run on any Windows Mobileand Windows CE device that uses a supported processor chip,runs a supported version of Windows CE, and meets the minimumrequirements for memory and scripting.

ArcPad is designed to run on any Windows Mobile or WindowsCE device that meets the following minimum system requirements:

Windows CE version

ArcPad supports Windows CE 4.2 or higher. This includesWindows Mobile 2003 and Windows Mobile 2003 Second Editiondevices. For Windows Mobile devices, ArcPad supports thePocket PC and Pocket PC Phone Edition form factors – it does notsupport the Smartphone form factor.

Processor chip

Windows CE devices are built using a variety of processors, orCPU chips. Unlike desktop PCs where processor chips arecompatible—for example, Intel® and AMD chips—processorchips used for Windows CE devices are not compatible andrequire that software be compiled specifically for the particularprocessor chip.

ArcPad 7 only supports ARM-based CPU chips for WindowsMobile and Windows CE devices. ARM-based CPU chipsinclude, but are not limited to, chips made by Intel (StrongARMand XScale), Samsung, Texas Instruments, and Atmel.

Memory

ArcPad requires a Windows Mobile device with at least 32 MB ofRAM; however, there may be insufficient free RAM available towork with anything but the smallest and simplest datasets.Therefore, ESRI recommends a minimum of 64 MB of RAM, andpreferably more RAM if available.

The amount of free RAM required to install and run ArcPaddepends on what sort of data will be used. Installing ArcPadrequires approximately 6 MB of free RAM (8 MB if the NADCONtables are installed). Running ArcPad could require 20 MB ormore of free RAM, especially if you are using compressed imagesin formats such as MrSID® and JPEG2000.

Scripting (customization only)

ArcPad can be customized using ArcPad Application Builder andscripting languages, such as VBScript and JScript. Thecorresponding scripting runtime library file must be installed onthe device before running scripts. Customization of ArcPad isdisabled when running ArcPad on a device that does not havethe required scripting runtime library installed.

16 USING ARCPAD

Selecting a mobile device

Mobile GIS involves a variety of tasks that are performed undervarying environments and conditions. No two Mobile GISapplications are the same, and different people have differentpreferences. For example, one person may be comfortable withentering text using a pen (or stylus) and character recognitionsoftware, while another person using the same application mayprefer to use a physical keyboard. Similarly, one person may becomfortable with working with map data on a quarter-VGA (VideoGraphics Adapter) screen (240 x 320 pixels), while another personmay prefer a larger screen.

Selecting a suitable device for Mobile GIS involves a process todetermine which criteria are essential, “nice to have”, or notrequired. There is no perfect device for Mobile GIS since manycriteria are mutually exclusive. For example, it is not possible tohave a device with a large screen and is compact enough to fit inyour pocket—unless, of course, you have large pockets!

The following factors should be considered when selecting adevice that best meets the needs and requirements of yourMobile GIS application.

Operating system

ArcPad runs on Windows 2000, XP, and Windows Mobiledevices. The first factor to consider is whether the Mobile GISdevice needs to run Windows Mobile or a PC version ofWindows.

The advantages of Windows Mobile devices are:

• More robust. Windows Mobile devices usually use solid-statetechnology with no moving parts (for example, flash memoryfor storage instead of a hard drive) and therefore tend to bemore robust than PCs.

• Less power consumption due to solid-state technology andlow-power processors.

• Instant on and off. Windows Mobile devices can be switchedon without needing to boot up and, similarly, can be switchedoff without needing to be shut down. This is a significantadvantage for Mobile GIS tasks, which often involveswitching the device off while moving to a new location.

• Portability. Windows Mobile devices are available in a varietyof form factors, some of which are small enough to fit in apocket. Windows Mobile devices also tend to weigh less thancomparable tablet PCs.

• Sunlight readable displays. Most Windows Mobile deviceshave screens which are easily readable in outdoor conditions,including direct sunlight.

• Lower cost than PCs. However, this cost advantage can bereduced by the type of accessories needed for a Mobile GISapplication.

The disadvantages of Windows Mobile devices are:

• Limited operating system compared to desktop Windows.Although Windows Mobile is a powerful operating system formobile devices, it does not have all of the capabilities, built-intools, and applications that desktop Windows does. This canalso be an advantage for situations where a simpler operatingsystem is preferable.

• Limited number of available applications. Only a limited, butgrowing number of applications support Windows Mobile. Inmany cases applications that have been ported to WindowsMobile have less functionality on Windows Mobile than ondesktop Windows. This is only a disadvantage if your MobileGIS tasks require additional applications that are not availableon Windows Mobile.

• Use of RAM as the primary storage medium. Windows Mobiledevices do not have a hard drive but instead use RAM forstoring application programs and data and for program


processing. Most Windows Mobile devices do not have theoption of adding additional RAM. There is a limit, therefore,of how many applications and datasets you can store in RAMand still have sufficient RAM free for program processing.Another limitation is that RAM requires power to maintain itscontents. The contents of RAM are lost if the battery isdrained on the Windows Mobile device. The battery can bedrained by leaving the Windows Mobile device disconnectedfrom a power supply for long periods of time. The RAM usessmall amounts of power even when the Windows Mobiledevice is not being used. It is therefore a good idea to alwaysconnect a Windows Mobile device to a power supply when itis not in use.The disadvantage of using RAM as the primary storagemedium can be reduced by using a storage card for storingapplication programs and data—or by using built-in, non-volatile storage when available.

For many Mobile GIS tasks a tablet PC running Windows XPTablet PC Edition may be a better choice than a Windows Mobiledevice. This is especially true if you require a larger screen and/orneed to run additional software that does not support WindowsMobile. There are a number of hardware vendors thatmanufacture Windows XP Tablet PC Edition devices suitable forMobile GIS.

Cost

Your budget for each Windows Mobile device will help dictatewhich factors are essential. For example, ruggedized WindowsMobile devices are at least double the cost of standard WindowsMobile devices. When considering cost it is essential to considerthe total cost of the Mobile GIS task, including labor andreplacement costs. Labor accounts for the major portion ofMobile GIS costs, and therefore it is more cost effective in thelong run to purchase robust, ruggedized devices, which last

longer, resulting in less downtime from damaged and brokendevices.

Size of device

How large or small does the mobile device need to be?Ruggedized devices are usually bulkier and heavier thannonruggedized devices. The size of the device will dictate thescreen size and whether the device has a physical keyboard.

Ruggedization

Do you need a ruggedized mobile device? Ruggedized devicescost more to purchase but are more cost effective in the long runas discussed above.

Screen size and display

How large or small does the screen need to be? Some people arecomfortable using a small screen, while others prefer a largerscreen. Most Windows Mobile devices have quarter-VGAscreens (240 x 320 pixels), while Windows XP Tablet PCs havefull-VGA (640 x 480 pixels) or larger screens.

Do you need a color screen display? Some applications do notrequire color displays, but most GIS data requires color todistinguish the various features and details on a map. This isespecially true when using image data. Some of the ruggedizedmobile devices are only available with grayscale displays.

If a color screen is a requirement, then it is essential that thedisplay be readable in sunlight since Mobile GIS tasks are usuallyperformed outdoors. It is strongly recommended that you testany potential mobile device outdoors, in both direct sunlight andshade, before purchasing the device. Most Windows Mobiledevices available today use reflective thin film transistor (TFT)screen technology, which is readable in direct sunlight.

18 USING ARCPAD

Memory and storage capacity

How much data and what type of data do you need to store anduse on your Windows Mobile device? It is recommended thatyou store your data on a storage card, or built-in storage, and notin RAM to keep as much RAM free for processing as possible.This also ensures that data is not lost if the battery is drained onthe Windows Mobile device. It is also recommended that theWindows Mobile device have at least 64 MB of RAM andpreferably more, if available.

As of this writing, the maximum capacity of commonly availableand affordable storage cards is as follows:

Storage media Maximum capacity

CompactFlash (CF) 8 GB for flash memory

5 GB for microdrive hard drive

Secure Digital (SD) 2 GB for flash memory

Flash memory is a slightly more expensive storage media thanhard drives but is more robust due to the solid-state technologyused in flash memory.

Integrated GPS

Do you need a GPS for your Mobile GIS task? If yes, do you needa GPS that is integrated with the mobile device? Integrated GPSreceivers are easier to use, especially for the novice user. Andintegrated GPS receivers do not require any cumbersome cablesfor connecting the GPS to the mobile device—although anincreasing number of GPS receivers are Bluetooth enabled, whicheliminates the need for cables.

Integrated Camera

Does your Mobile GIS task require a digital camera for takingphotographs in the field? If yes, do you need a camera that isintegrated with the mobile device? The biggest advantage of anintegrated camera is that the image files are automatically storedon the same device as the Mobile GIS data, resulting in easier andbetter integration of data. Unfortunately, integrated digitalcameras are currently of inferior quality compared to standalonedigital cameras, especially in terms of image resolution, opticalzoom, and minimum light needed for taking a photograph.However, it is quite possible that an integrated camera may meetthe requirements for your Mobile GIS task.

Wireless connectivity

Does your Mobile GIS task require wireless connectivity? If yes,then it is recommended that you select a mobile device that hasthe required wireless connectivity integrated with the device.

There are a variety of wireless options available, each for adifferent purpose.

Bluetooth is designed for eliminating cables by wirelesslyconnecting mobile devices and accessories, using serialcommunications. Bluetooth is ideal for connecting a mobiledevice to a GPS receiver, laser range finder, or bar code scanner.Bluetooth is also useful for setting up an ActiveSync partnershipbetween a Windows Mobile device and a desktop PC. It isimportant to note that Bluetooth implementation is not consistantacross all manufacturers. If you need to connect multipleBluetooth devices simultaneously you should ensure that youchoose a mobile device that supports multiple Bluetoothconnections.


WiFi (using either the 802.11b or 802.11g protocols) is useful forwirelessly connecting your mobile device to a local area network,or LAN. Connecting to a LAN is useful for accessing an ArcIMSweb service, downloading or uploading data, as well as forsetting up an ActiveSync partnership between a WindowsMobile device and a desktop PC.

Wide area networks are used for similar purposes as LANs,however the wireless technology for connecting to WANs have alonger range than the technology for connecting to LANs. Thewireless protocols for connecting to WANs include GPRS,CDMA, EV-DO, UMTS/WCDMA, and EDGE.

Expansion capability and accessories

What accessories do you need to use for your Mobile GIS tasks?Your Windows Mobile device should have at least one serial port,or be Bluetooth enabled, for connecting GPS receivers and otherserial input devices. Your Windows Mobile device should alsohave at least one expansion slot for a storage card, for example,CompactFlash or Secure Digital. Multiple expansion slots areuseful when you need to use a storage card and accessory (suchas a CompactFlash GPS receiver) simultaneously.

There are a variety of accessories available for CompactFlash andSecure Digital expansion slots. These accessories include flashmemory, hard drives, GPS receivers, landline and wirelessmodems, digital phone cards, wired (Ethernet) and wireless localarea network (LAN) cards (802.11b, 802.11g) Bluetooth cards,digital cameras, VGA cards, bar code scanners, and serial I/Ocards.

Field testing

It is highly recommended that you test potential Windows Mobiledevices under similar conditions to those expected to beencountered when performing your Mobile GIS tasks to ensurethat the device meets your requirements. A color display may lookbright and crisp under artificial office lighting but may be almostblack when viewed in direct sunlight.

For more information on selecting a Windows Mobile device youcan download the ESRI Whitepaper, ArcPad 7 Devices andAccessories, from the Literature link on www.esri.com/arcpad, orfrom support.esri.com/arcpad.

20 USING ARCPAD

Transferring data to a Windows Mobile device

You can easily transfer data between your Windows Mobiledevice and your desktop PC by establishing a connectionbetween the two devices and then simply dragging and droppingfiles from one device to another.

The primary software used for connecting Windows Mobiledevices to the desktop PC is Microsoft ActiveSync. ActiveSyncis preinstalled in ROM on Windows Mobile devices, and a CDcontaining ActiveSync for desktop PCs is shipped with everyWindows Mobile device. You can also download ActiveSync, forfree, from Microsoft at:

http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/downloads/activesync38.mspx

As of this writing the current version of ActiveSync isversion 3.8. The ActiveSync CD or download also contains helpon using ActiveSync and establishing a connection with yourWindows Mobile device.

ActiveSync serves four major purposes: data synchronization,file management, file backup, and software installation. AnActiveSync connection between your Windows Mobile deviceand desktop PC is required to install ArcPad on your WindowsMobile device. Once you have established an ActiveSyncconnection, you can use Windows Explorer on your desktop PCto transfer files to and from your Windows Mobile device. Youcan also use the Explore button on the ActiveSync dialog box tostart Windows Explorer.

Your Windows Mobile device is automatically listed as a filesystem in the Windows Explorer dialog box and is called MobileDevice. You can copy, move, and drag and drop files to and fromthe Mobile Device file system as you would with any other localor remote file system using Windows Explorer. It is a goodpractice to always store your data under the My Documentsfolder, whether on your Windows Mobile device or on a storagecard. Some Windows Mobile applications require that data belocated under the My Documents folder otherwise they cannotbe viewed by the application.

By default, ActiveSync uses the USB port of your desktop PC toconnect to your Windows Mobile device. You can also connect

Explore


to your Windows Mobile device by using Bluetooth, an Ethernetwired connection to your LAN, or a wireless LAN card.

Most Windows Mobile devices today come standard with USBconnections; however an increasing number of Windows Mobiledevices are also Bluetooth enabled. Consult the documentationincluded with your Windows Mobile device for instructions onhow to create an ActiveSync connection via USB and Bluetooth(if the device is Bluetooth enabled).

22 USING ARCPAD

Windows Mobile resources

There are extensive resources available for learning more aboutWindows Mobile hardware, software, and accessories. Theseresources include Internet sites, print publications, and books.The following list of resources is not intended to be exhaustive orto imply endorsement by ESRI but instead is intended to be astarting point for learning more about Windows Mobile.

News and information resources

There are numerous news and information Web sites that coverWindows Mobile. The following are some of the more popularsites.

Microsoft Corporation

http://www.windowsmobile.com

WindowsMobile.com is the definitive web site for WindowsMobile. The Web site includes Windows Mobile news, how-toinstructions, help, downloads, and discussion forums. It alsoincludes a list of Windows Mobile devices currently available indifferent regions of the world.

Brighthand Consulting, Inc.

http://www.brighthand.com

Brighthand is one of the more popular sites for mobile devices,including Windows Mobile devices. The site includes reviews ondevices, accessories, and software for Windows Mobile.

Chris De Herrera’s Windows CE Website

http://www.cewindows.net

Chris De Herrera’s Website claims to have “the most complete setof frequently asked questions on Windows CE anywhere”. Thesite certainly has one of the most comprehensive set of reviews,Frequently Asked Questions, how-to instructions, and

troubleshooting documents available covering Windows CEversion 1.0 to the current version. This is an excellent resource fortroubleshooting Windows CE and Windows Mobile problems.

Software resources

There are a number of sites that have Windows Mobile softwareavailable for download, including shareware and freewaresoftware. Here are a few of the more popular download sites:

Handangohttp://www.handango.com

TUCOWS, Inchttp://pda.tucows.com

Online stores

There are numerous online stores that specialize in mobiledevices, including Windows Mobile, and their associatedsoftware and accessories. The following online store provides agood list of the currently available Windows Mobile devices andaccessories.

MobilePlanet, Inc.http://www.mobileplanet.com

Magazines

Pen Computing Magazine

http://www.pencomputing.com

Pen Computing Magazine is a bimonthly print magazine thatcovers all pen-based devices, including Windows Mobile devicesand PC pen tablets.


Pocket PC Magazine

http://www.pocketpcmag.com

Pocket PC Magazine is a monthly print magazine devotedexclusively to Windows Mobile devices.

Books

There are a number of books available that cover WindowsMobile devices. You can search your favorite online book store,using the keywords “Windows Mobile”, to get a list of availablebooks.

IN THIS CHAPTER

25

Quick-start tutorial 3• Exercise 1: Exploring your data

• Exercise 2: Working withgeographic features

• Exercise 3: Capturing GPS Data

• Exercise 4: Editing features

• Sample data acknowledgments

The best way to learn ArcPad is to try it yourself. This tutorial guides youthrough some basic ArcPad skills. ArcPad enables you to locate features,update attribute information, and edit layers—live and in the field. WithArcPad your fieldwork is more efficient and immediately productive.

The scenario: Imagine you are a farmer, and your task is to manage thefertilization of a number of properties in a given area. This tutorial takes youthrough your day’s work and focuses on typical field data collection tasksthat you can perform using ArcPad.

This tutorial is designed to let you explore the capabilities of ArcPad at yourown pace and without the need for additional assistance. You’ll need about30–40 minutes of focused time to complete the tutorial. However, you canalso perform the exercises one at a time if you wish.

26 USING ARCPAD

The exercises that follow are fictitious, and they do not inany way represent real occurrences in Elmore. Forinformation about the complete Elmore sample data, referto the end of this chapter.

In this tutorial, the word tap is used when selecting an item,as opposed to the word click. On computers that have atouch screen and pen interface, items are selected bytapping the pen on the screen. This performs the sameaction as clicking does when using a mouse on computerswithout a pen interface. In the interest of brevity, the wordtap will be used, but this should also be taken to mean click.

In this tutorial, you will use several layers to complete yourwork order. The primary layer that you will use is the landuse layer; however, you will also use additional layers tomake it easier to locate yourself and to find the parcel ofland that needs to be identified. The following table providesdescriptions of these layers.

Layer Description

aerial_elmore.jp2 25 cm pixel aerial photograph ofElmore, Victoria, Australia

customers.shp Fictitious customers connected to thesewer network

land_use.shp Fictitious land use types

parcel.shp Cadastral parcels

Rail.shp Railway lines

Rail Infrastructure.shp Railway stations

Road.shp Roads

The exercises in this chapter use the sample datadistributed with ArcPad. The layers are located under theSamples\Elmore folder in the ArcPad install directory. Thesample data is automatically loaded on your desktop PC ifyou selected the automatic install when you installedArcPad. To install the sample data onto your WindowsMobile computer use the Start menu on your desktop PC.The Elmore folder is installed in the My Documents folderon your Windows Mobile computer. The exercises requirethat you have write access to this data. If you don’t, you’llneed to copy the data to a location that you do have writeaccess to.

The Elmoresample data inArcPad

Exercise 1: Exploring your data

QUICK-START TUTORIAL 27

Selecting the appropriate layers

Let’s begin by starting ArcPad and setting the default MapPath to where the Elmore sample data is located. You willthen add the layers that you need.

1. On your Windows Mobile computer, start ArcPad bytapping Start>Programs, then tap ArcPad 7.0. You willsee the ArcPad splash screen briefly, and ArcPad willopen with the Startup dialog box.

2. Tap ok to open ArcPad with a new empty map.

3. Tap the Tools button on the Main toolbar. This opens theArcPad Options dialog box.

1

2

3

6

4

57

4. Tap the right arrow button.

5. Tap the Paths tab.

6. Tap the Folder button next to the Default Maps & DataPath. This will open the Directory Browser. Navigate tothe Elmore folder and tap the folder to select it. Bydefault the Samples folder is installed in the MyDocuments folder on Windows Mobile computers.

7. Tap OK.

28 USING ARCPAD

8. Tap the Add Layer button on the Main toolbar. The AddLayer(s) dialog box opens. Notice that the Path is set tothe Elmore folder that you set in the previous steps.

Exploring your selected layers

Explore the Elmore layers provided for this tutorial.Understanding the properties associated with each layerwill help you to quickly navigate around the map.

1. Tap the Table of Contents button. The layers youselected previously are listed, each with a check in theVisible check box and the Identify check box. The Editcheck box is, by default, unchecked.

9. Select aerial_elmore.jp2, customers.shp, land_use.shp,parcel.shp, rail.shp, rail_infrastructure.shp, and road.shpby checking the check box to the left of the layer. A redcheck indicates that a layer has been selected.

10. Tap OK. The selected layers are drawn in the ArcPadMap window.

8

9

Q

1

Visible

Edit

Identify


2. You can change the order in which layers are drawn bytapping on the Move Up or Move Down arrow buttons.The layers at the bottom are drawn before the layers atthe top. Move the Customers layer up so that it is drawnafter and on top of the Roads layer.

3. Tap the Land Use layer to select it; the layer ishighlighted in blue.

4. Double-tap the Land Use layer or tap the LayerProperties button. The Layer Properties dialog box isdisplayed for the Land Use layer.

2

3

4

5

The Information page is displayed first; you can see thatthe Title field has the name Land Use in it. This is alsothe title that is used to name the layers in the Table ofContents.

5. Tap the right arrow and then tap the Symbology tab toview the layer symbology. You can change symbologydirectly in the field using ArcPad or via the ArcPad toolsfor ArcGIS Desktop. For more information aboutsymbolization, see Chapter 7, ‘Symbolizing your data’.

30 USING ARCPAD

Symbologyfor the LandUse layer

Attributesfor theLand Uselayer. Rednameindicateswhich fieldis beingused torendersymbology.

Index

6. Tap the Attributes tab to see the fields associated withthe Land Use layer. The USE_CODE field is displayedin red to indicate which field is being used to render theattribute base symbology. Later, you will change thevalues of these fields after you have inspected a plot ofland.

The “I” checkbox column indicates whether the layerhas an index. If the checkbox for Geometry is checked,the layer has a spatial index. If the checkbox for a fieldis checked, an attribute index exists for thecorresponding field. To add an index, simply check theIndex checkbox for that attribute field.

7. Explore the additional tabs to learn more about the LandUse layer. Tap ok when you are ready to return to theTable of Contents.

8. Explore each of the layers that you will use to help youlocate the land that needs to be fertilized.


9

Q

W

Zoom into thislocation.

ENortharrow.

9. Tap the Legend tab in the Table of Contents. TheLegend allows you to view and access the symbologyproperties for all the layers in your ArcPad map.

10. Tap the +/- icon next to each layer to display/hide itssymbology.

11. Tap ok in the Table of Contents when you are ready toreturn to your ArcPad map.

12. Tap the Zoom In button, then tap and drag a box aroundthe area of the image file. The rest of the exercises areconcentrated in the area of Elmore northeast of theRailway station.

32 USING ARCPAD

In this exercise you will locate a vineyard that needs to befertilized. You will locate the vineyard and then update itsattribute information, noting that it has been fertilized. Oncethat task is complete you will select other sectors of landneighboring the fertilized vineyard to determine if any ofthose also need to be fertilized.

Locating a feature

In this exercise, you will use the Find tool to locate thevineyard you are looking for. Your work order tells you thatthere is only one vineyard in the suburb of Elmore so itshould be quite easy to locate.

1. Tap the Find button on the Browse toolbar.

2. Tap the Select Layers button on the Criteria page.

Exercise 2: Working with geographic features

2

1

3. Tap the + symbol next to the LAND USE layer and tapUSE_CODE. The USE_CODE field identifies the typeof land for the area (e.g., vine, scrub, and so on).

4. Tap OK.

3

4


5. Use the Soft Input Panel to type the land use type “vine”in the Find box.

6. Tap the Results tab to execute the search and to viewthe results.

7. Scroll to view the attributes of the feature. Tap thematched feature.

8. Tap the Go To button.

7

8

SoftInputPanel

6

5

34 USING ARCPAD

9. ArcPad zooms to the Vine parcel of land. The selectedplot is highlighted and set as the current navigationdestination. The vineyard is also labeled using the valueof the field that was searched on—in this case, the usecode of the plot of land.

10. Your vineyard is clearly labeled, and with your ArcPadmap you can go to the vineyard and fertilize it.

Updating your data

In this section, you will change the attributes of the vineyardthat you fertilized in the previous section.

1. You need to make the Land Use layer editable beforeyou can edit its attributes. Tap the drop down arrow nextto the Start/Stop Editing button.

2. Tap the Land Use layer to select it. A red box aroundthe layer indicates that it is editable. The Edit toolbar andthe Command bar are automatically displayed once alayer is made editable.

2

1

9


4. Tap the Select button.

5. Tap the vineyard you identified in the previous section toselect it.

6. Open the selected features properties by tapping theFeature Properties button.

7. Change the form to reflect that the site has now beenfertilized.

4

5

6

Command bar

8. Tap the Picture tab. If you had a digital cameraconnected to your Windows Mobile device, you couldtake a picture and associate it with this feature. In thiscase we will simply select a picture from an existingfolder.

7

8

36 USING ARCPAD

9 Q

Integratedcamerasupport

E

9. Using the Field drop down list, select the field that thelocation of your photo will be stored in. In this case, it isthe IMAGE field.

10. Tap the open folder button.

11. Navigate to the picture entitled “vine.jpg” and select it.The picture is now associated with this feature and it isdisplayed on the Picture page of the Feature Propertiesdialog box.

Alternatively, if you have a camera connected to yourdevice, tap the camera icon. A picture is taken andautomatically associated with the feature. SeeChapter 13, ‘Using your digital camera’, for moreinformation.

12. Once you have completed updating your form, tap ok.

The information about the vineyard has been updatedand a picture of the area has been associated with thefeature.

In the next section we will select other plots of landsurrounding the vineyard to determine whether or notthey also need fertilizing.

W


1

2

Using the Advanced Select tool

Use the Advanced Select tool to locate all the fields in theimmediate vicinity of the newly fertilized vineyard.

1. With the Land Use layer in Edit mode, tap the arrow tothe right of the Identify tool.

2. Tap Advanced Select.

3

3. Tap and drag a selection box to select all the fields in thevicinity of the vineyard. A list displays the selectedfeatures.

38 USING ARCPAD

45

67

4. Expand the list of features selected within the Land Uselayer by tapping the +/- icon.

5. Tap the first feature.

6. Uncheck the Close After Action check box.

7. Tap the Feature Properties button.

8. The form for the selected feature appears. Make thenecessary changes and close the form.

Q

8

9. Follow the same procedure as outlined above for all thefeatures selected.

10. Tap OK. You have successfully completed your fieldmaintenance duties for the day!


Exercise 3: Capturing GPS data

There is a road that has recently been constructed. It is upto you to capture the new road using a GPS receiver. Withyour GPS activated, you will walk the length of the newroad segment and capture vertices for the length of the newroad. This task is being done in Elmore, Australia but youcan easily perform the same steps for a street or road inyour local area. If you happen to be in Elmore than you canperform the exercise as is!

1. Find the area where we are going to add the new road.It is located at the end of Strawthorn, west of theVineyard we located in the previous exercise.

Tip: Use the Find tool described in Exercise 2.

2. Activate your GPS receiver if you have not already doneso.

Refer to Chapter 9, ‘Connecting your GPS receiver’, forinformation on activating your receiver.

3. Tap the dropdown arrow to the right of the Start/StopEditing button.

4. Tap the Road layer to select it for editing.

The Edit toolbar and Command bar are automaticallydisplayed.

3

4

40 USING ARCPAD

5. Tap the Polyline feature tool.

The Add GPS Vertex and Add GPS VerticesContinuously buttons are enabled.

6. Tap the Add GPS Vertex button to capture a new vertex.Continue to do so until you have reached the end of theextended road. Alternatively, use the Add GPS VerticesContinuously button to capture vertices in streamingmode. Vertices are captured according to the specifiedstreaming vertices interval which is set in the GPSPreferences dialog box.

Tip: Use snapping to snap the end of your new road tothe end of the existing road. See Chapter 14, ‘Editingbasics’ for information on snapping.

5 6

7

8

9

7. Tap the Proceed tool on the Command bar when you arefinished adding your road.

The feature dialog box opens so that you canimmediately enter information about the new road.

8. Fill in the form as follows: Feature Type = Road; RoadName =New; Road Type= Lane, Class Code= NotClassified, and Road Seal = Gravel.

9. Tap OK.

Your new road has been added and you are ready tomove on to the next task.


The owner of the vineyard is thinking of expanding her plotof land. The neighboring plot is vacant and was recently putup for sale so she has asked you to map the potentialexpansion of the land. She is trying to determine whetherexpanding her vineyard to the adjoining space will increaseher net profits.

1. Tap the Clear Selected button, located in the dropdownlist next to the Find tool, to clear the previously selectedfeature.

2. Locate the vineyard.

Tip: Use the Find tool described in Exercise 2.

Exercise 4: Editing features

1

2

3

4

Next, we will set the snapping properties for our layers. Youwill notice that to the right of the vineyard, there is a road,some vacant land, and another road. The second road willbecome the new boundary of your vineyard. In order toensure that you are expanding your vineyard to its fullextent, you will snap the vertices of your new plot of land tothe edge of the short road. We must first begin by settingthe snapping tolerance in the Map Properties dialog box.

3. Tap the dropdown arrow next to the Open Map buttonand tap Map Properties.

4. On the Snapping page set the tolerance to 5 m. Refer tothe scale bar to determine an appropriate tolerance.

42 USING ARCPAD

6

78

Command bar

Edittoolbar

Q

9

5. Tap the Table of Contents button.

6. Tap the Snapping tab on the Table of Contents.

7. Check the Edge check box for the Roads layer. TheRoads layer is the target layer that we want our LandUse layer to snap to.

8. Tap the Zoom In button and zoom closer to the vineyard.

9. Make the Land Use layer editable by tapping thedropdown arrow to the right of the Start Editing buttonand selecting Land Use. The Edit toolbar and theCommand bar are displayed.

10. Tap the Select and Vertex Editing button in thedropdown list to the right of the Select tool.


11. Tap the plot of land. The vineyard is highlighted, and itsvertices are outlined with squares around them.

The vineyard is highlighted,and the vertices are outlined.

W

E

12. Tap and drag the bottom right vertex to the boundary ofthe road. As you approach the road, you will noticeArcPad snaps to the road’s edge. If your sound is on,ArcPad will make a noise indicating that it is snapping tothe feature.

Tip: To display the snapping buffers, on your WindowsMobile device, tap the center key, and on your desktopPC, tap the CTRL key.

44 USING ARCPAD

R

13. Tap the dropdown arrow next to the Feature Propertiestool and select Insert Vertices. This will allow you toadd vertices and extend the plot of land.

Undo

T

Y

14. Tap the top right corner of the new vineyard outline.ArcPad inserts a vertex where you tapped the map.

Tip: Use the Undo button to go back to the previous stepif you make a mistake.

15. When you are finished adding your vertices andexpanding the vineyard, tap the Commit GeometryChanges button.


U

16. Your new vineyard is complete. Exit ArcPad. Yourworkday is over!

Note: Once a change is made in ArcPad, it can only beundone using the Undo tool. However, the Undo tool canonly be used to Undo one step. Once you commit yourchanges, even if you exit ArcPad without saving yourchanges, edits such as changing the shape of the vineyardstill remain. If you would like to go back to your originalvineyard structure, you can use the editing tools to change itback or reinstall the sample data using the ArcPad CD. Youcan do an install that will only add the sample data.

46 USING ARCPAD

Tutorial sample data acknowledgments

The township of Elmore is located on the junction of theMidland and Northern Highway in Central Victoria,Australia. Elmore is an easy two hour drive fromMelbourne.

The utilities and property related datasets and the aerialphotograph are provided by Colliban Autority, Bendigo,Victoria, Australia. The land use dataset is fictitious. Thecoordinate system used is the Australian Geodetic Datum66 (AGD66), Australian Map Grid Zone 55 (AMG z55).

Data Disclaimer

The Coliban Region Water Authority (“The Authority”)believes that the information supplied is correct, however itdoes not warrant the accuracy of that information. TheAuthority disclaims responsibility for any omissions,inaccuracies, discrepancies, errors of scale or anyinconsistencies, which may exist between the actual and thedigital data supplied. The Authority further disclaimsresponsibility for any loss or damage including consequentialloss or damage, suffered by any person relying upon suchinformation, whether that loss or damage is caused bynegligence, or from any other cause whatsoever, on the partof the Authority, its employees agents and contractors.

Most of the datasets originally supplied by Coliban RegionWater Authority have been modified by ESRI in theinterests of reducing file size and to simplify the sampledataset as a whole. The main modifications have involvedremoval of attribute fields that are specific and relevant toColiban Region Water Authority but do not hold any furtherinformation value for users of the sample dataset.

IN THIS CHAPTER

47

ArcPad basics 4ArcPad is a field-based extension to your mapping and GIS system. Theability to compare your data directly to geographic features in the real worldadds a deeper sense of reality to your GIS database. It also opens many newavenues for field data collection, display, and analysis.

Whether you need to add new pump station locations, take a measurementor locate an address, you can do it in the field with ArcPad. This chapter willguide you through the basics of ArcPad and the ArcPad interface andillustrate how to use the tools provided.

• Maps and layers

• Starting ArcPad

• The ArcPad map window

• Opening a map

• ArcPad toolbars

• Map properties

• Layer properties

• Moving around the map

• Rotating the map orientation

• Setting spatial bookmarks

• Locking the ArcPad application

• Setting ArcPad options

• Getting help

• Saving a map and exiting ArcPad

• Working with ArcPad files

48 USING ARCPAD

Maps and layers

A map is the fundamental component you work with in ArcPad.Maps help you visualize geographic data in the field by showingyou where things are, telling you what they are, and helping youunderstand why they are that way.

The ArcPad map file (.apm) stores a list of the map layers andtheir properties in your ArcPad session. A map lists all your layerstogether with the geographic extent and projection of the map.When you begin an ArcPad session, you can open an existingmap or create a new map by adding layers of data or information.

Saves the current map.

Displays the dropdown list.

Opens an ArcPad map.

ArcPad saves a list ofrecently opened mapsand layers.

Adds layers to your ArcPad map.

Creates a new map,shapefile,QuickForm, photolayer, or graphicslayer.

Displays the currentmap’s properties

Opens the Table of Contents.

Ch04.pmd 11/16/2005, 10:06 AM48

ARCPAD BASICS 49

You can display geographic information on a map as layers. Eachlayer represents a particular type of feature, such as streams,lakes, highways, political boundaries, or lightposts. A layer doesnot store the actual geographic data; instead, it references thedata contained in shapefiles or images. The Table of Contents(TOC) button becomes active once a layer or layers have beenadded to the current ArcPad map.

The Table of Contents displays all layers loaded in the currentmap, the GPS Tracklog, and the Map Grid layer. Within the Tableof Contents, you can also change symbology using the legend,set snapping properties for editing, and select whether or noteach layer can be identified or edited.

Indicates whetherthe layer is visible.

Selects a projection.

Displays map properties.

Shows properties for the selectedlayer.Changes the drawing order of theselected layer.

Removes a layer from theArcPad map.

Table of Contents(TOC).

Indicates which layers can be queriedonscreen with the Identify tool.

Adds layers to your map.

Indicates which layers can be edited.

Displays the symbologyfor the layers.

Specifies that new features connectto or align with existing features.

Displays the filename and location of the layer.

50 USING ARCPAD

Starting ArcPadStarting ArcPad is the first stepto field data collection andmanagement. However, beforeyou can start, ArcPad must beinstalled on your computer. Ifyou don’t know whether it’sinstalled, check with yoursystem administrator. For moreinformation about installingArcPad, see the ArcPadInstallation Guide.

Starting ArcPad from theWindows Mobile Startmenu

1. Tap Start on the Windowstaskbar.

2. Tap Programs

3. Tap ArcPad 7.0.

You will see the ArcPadsplash screen briefly, andArcPad will open with theStartup dialog box.

Tip

Click versus TapOn Windows Mobile or Tablet PCcomputers, you will tap the screenwith your pen stylus to selectbuttons and/or features rather thanclick a mouse button, as is done ona desktop PC.

Starting ArcPad on adesktop PC

1. Click Start on the Windowstaskbar.

2. Click All Programs.

3. Click ArcGIS.

4. Click ArcPad 7.

5. Click ArcPad 7.0 forWindows.

You will see the ArcPadsplash screen briefly, andArcPad will open with theStartup dialog box.

Tip

Windows Mobile Start MenuThe Start Menu on your WindowsMobile device can only contain 7programs. If ArcPad 7 is not listed,you can tap Start>Settings >Menusto add ArcPad as one of your StartMenu programs.

5

ARCPAD BASICS 51

Using the Startupdialog boxBy default when ArcPad begins,the Startup dialog box willappear. This allows you toquickly get started with ArcPad.Using the Startup dialog box,you can start using ArcPad withan empty map, browse for data,or open an existing map or data.

You can check the “Do notshow this dialog again”checkbox if you do not want tosee the Startup dialog box againwhen starting ArcPad. To turnthe Startup dialog box on, go tothe Startup page in the ArcPadOptions dialog box.

Open an existing ArcPadmap from the Startupdialog box

1. On the ArcPad Startup dialogbox, tap An existing map ordata radio button.

2. Select an ArcPad map fromthe list of available maps.

ArcPad displays a list ofpreviously used maps anddata.

3. If you do not wish to see thisdialog box again when youstart ArcPad, tap Do notshow this dialog again.

4. Click OK.

ArcPad starts with theselected map.

Tip

Performing an action in theStartup dialog boxYou can either tap the button or thecorresponding radio button and okto perform the desired action in theStartup dialog box. For example,tap the Add data button and theAdd Layer(s) dialog box opens. Youcan also tap an existing map fromthe list of previous maps withouthaving to first tap the Open mapradio button.

1

2

4

3

52 USING ARCPAD

Running ArcPadwithin a skinRunning ArcPad within a skinallows you to view the softwareon your desktop PC within apicture or skin of a WindowsMobile device.

The purpose of the skin is fordemonstrating ArcPad on adesktop PC while giving theaudience an indication of whatArcPad looks like on a mobiledevice.

ArcPad skins consist of astandard Windows bitmap file(.bmp), 8- or 24-bit format, and acorresponding skin definitionfile (.skn). Both filenames musthave the same prefix, forexample, IPAQ.bmp andIPAQ.skn.

Refer to the next section in thischapter to learn how to createyour own skin definition file.

Running ArcPad within askin on desktop PCs

1. Copy and paste the bitmapfile and skin definition file tothe same location as theArcPad application file,arcpad.exe.


3. Click Run.

4. Type the pathname for thelocation of ArcPad followedby /skin=“name of skin” (forexample, “C:\ProgramFiles\ArcPad 7.0\arcpad.exe”/skin=ipaq.skn).

5. Click OK.

6. ArcPad will open within theconfines of the skin.

Tip

Including quotation marksin ArcPad pathnameWhen running a skin from the RunCommand, use quotation marksaround the location of the ArcPadapplication file, forexample,“C:\ProgramFiles\ArcPad 7.0\arcpad.exe”.

4

5

6

ARCPAD BASICS 53

Running a skin directlyfrom the ArcPad desktopicon

1. Right-click on the ArcPaddesktop icon.

2. Click Properties.

3. Click the Shortcut tab.

4. Type the following path in theTarget field: “C:\ProgramFiles\ArcPad 7.0\arcpad.exe”/skin=“C:\ProgramFiles\ArcPad 7.0\ipaq”.

5. Click OK.

6. Double-click on the ArcPaddesktop icon.

7. ArcPad will open within theconfines of the skin.

2

1

3

5

4

54 USING ARCPAD

Tip

Creating your own skinScan your Windows Mobile deviceusing a desktop image scanner.For best results, set your scanningresolution to 100 dots per inch(dpi). Alternatively, visitwww.esri.com/arcscripts for anyavailable skins.

1. Open a text editor such asNotepad.

2. Type the followinginformation for a Pocket PC:

[ArcPad Skin]

HorzOffset=60

VertOffset=75

HorzRes=240

VertRes=320

These settings will changedepending on the device youwould like to represent.

3. Save as “filename”.skn.

Creating a skindefinition fileArcPad skins are easily createdusing a standard Windowsbitmap file (.bmp), 8- or 24-bitformat, and a correspondingskin definition file (.skn). Bothfilenames must have the sameprefix, for example, IPAQ.bmpand IPAQ.skn.

The skin definition file is asimple text file created using atext editor such as Notepad.The values specified forHorzOffset and VertOffset arethe offsets in pixels from thetop-left corner of the skin imageto the screen area where ArcPadwill be shown. The values forHorzRes and VertRes specifythe screen area size in pixels towhich ArcPad will be limited.They correspond to the actualresolution of the device, forexample, 240 x 320 for a stan-dard Windows Mobile device.

2

ARCPAD BASICS 55

The ArcPad user interface provides a simple and intuitive approach to the underlying functionality. It is possible to perform a widerange of functions through controllable toolbars. The ArcPad map window includes three toolbars that are located at the top of thewindow: the Main toolbar, the Browse toolbar, and the Edit toolbar. The Command bar is added to the bottom of the ArcPad map windowwhen the Edit toolbar is added for additional editing functionality. The map window also includes a panning frame, a scalebar, a northarrow, and a status bar, all of which can be turned on or off.

The ArcPad map window

Main toolbar

Browse toolbar

Edit toolbar

Scalebar

Status bar

Panning frame

Command bar

North arrow

56 USING ARCPAD

Opening a mapOnce you have started ArcPad,you can create a new map file oropen an existing one using thetools on the Main toolbar or aspreviously discussed using theStartup dialog box. A new mapis automatically created if nodefault map is specified.

The ArcPad map file (.apm)stores a list of the map layers inyour ArcPad map. A map lists allyour layers together with thegeographic extent andprojection of the map.

Creating a new map

1. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the Open Mapbutton on the Main toolbar todisplay the dropdown list.

2. Tap New.

The New submenu isdisplayed.

3. Tap Map.

ArcPad will create a newmap. You can then add dataand create your own ArcPadmap file.

Tip

Starting ArcPad with adefault mapWhen ArcPad starts, it looks forthe default map, ArcPad.apm.ArcPad will open this map onstartup if it exists. The location ofthe default map is specified on thePaths page of the ArcPad Optionsdialog box.

Tip

ArcPad logoThe ArcPad logo is displayed in theSystem taskbar when ArcPad isrunning. Tap the logo to bringArcPad to the foreground at anytime. On Window Mobile devices,the System taskbar is onlydisplayed on the Today screen.

1

2 3

ARCPAD BASICS 57

Tip

Setting path optionsArcPad allows you to specify adefault map and data, system files,and applet file paths. See the‘ArcPad Reference Guide’ for moreinformation.

Opening an existing map

1. Tap the Open Map button onthe Main toolbar.

2. Alternatively, tap thedropdown arrow to the rightof the Open Map button onthe Main toolbar to displaythe dropdown list.

3. Tap Open Map. u

2

12

58 USING ARCPAD

4. Navigate to the location ofyour existing map file.

5. Tap the ArcPad map file youwould like to open.

ArcPad opens the selectedmap document.

3

4

ARCPAD BASICS 59

ArcPad toolbars

All of the ArcPad tools are located on four toolbars: the Maintoolbar, the Browse toolbar, the Edit toolbar, and the Commandbar which is located at the bottom of the ArcPad window.

The Main toolbar contains the tools necessary for managing yourdata. The Browse toolbar allows you to explore your data bypanning, zooming, and retrieving information. The Edit toolbarand the Command bar activate the editing tools so you can addnew data or update existing data.

By default, only the Main and Browse toolbars are displayedwhen ArcPad starts. The Edit toolbar and the Command bar areautomatically displayed when a layer is selected for editing. TheBrowse and Edit toolbars can be toggled on or off from the Toolsdropdown list. Toolbars can also be moved using the toolbarhandle.

You can also create new toolbars that contain built-in and customtools using ArcPad Application Builder.

Main toolbar.

Edit toolbar.

The downward arrowindicates that there are moretools available in adropdown list.

The toolbar handle is usedto move toolbars around theArcPad interface.

Browse toolbar.

Command bar.

60 USING ARCPAD

Main toolbar

The Main toolbar provides the tools to manage your map, itslayers, and their associated properties. You will also find theoptions to connect to a GPS, rangefinder, or camera; set yourdisplay preferences, such as color or pen size; and establish yourdefault map and system file paths. The Main toolbar cannot betoggled off.

Browse toolbar

The Browse toolbar includes tools for resizing, reframing,information retrieval, spatial bookmarks, and panning andzooming of your display. In addition, the Browse toolbar is usedto select a layer for editing which then automatically displays theEdit toolbar and Command bar. The Browse toolbar can betoggled on or off from the Tools dropdown list.

Open Map

Save Map

Table of Contents

GPS Position WindowTools

Help

Add Layer

LockandunlockArcPad. Zoom

Out

Zoom ToFull Extent

Identify

FindGo Back ToPrevious Extent

Refresh

Start/StopEditing

ARCPAD BASICS 61

Edit toolbar

All editing takes place after a data layer is selected from the

Start/Stop Editing tool on the Browse toolbar or from the Table ofContents. Once a layer is set as editable, the Edit toolbar isautomatically added. The Edit toolbar can also be toggled on oroff from the Tools dropdown list or by unselecting all layers forediting with the Start/Stop Editing tool. A GPS needs to beactivated in order for the GPS buttons to be enabled.

Command bar

The Command bar is also automatically added when a data layeris selected for editing. It includes tools for geometry capture andediting including completing a feature, committing or cancellingchanges to a feature, and undoing edits. The Command bartoggles on and off with the Edit toolbar.

Select afeature.

Show FeatureProperties.

Capture apolyline feature.

Capture a pointusing GPS.

Add verticescontinuously froma GPS position.

Add a single vertexfrom a GPS position.

Offsetpolylineandpolygontoggle

Lock andunlockArcPad.

Commitgeometrychanges.Proceed orcomplete feature. Undo.

Cancelfeature edits.

Toggle pen active forcapture.

62 USING ARCPAD

Map propertiesProperties for the current mapcan be viewed, defined, andchanged in the Map Propertiesdialog box. Properties includescale, title of the map, geo-graphic extent, spatial book-marks, projection information,and snapping tolerance.

Setting map properties

1. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the Open Mapbutton on the Main toolbar.

2. Tap Map Properties. u

Tip

View map properties viathe TOCYou can also view a map’sproperties via the Table ofContents. On the Layers page, tapthe Map Properties button.

1

2

ARCPAD BASICS 63

3. Scroll through the differenttabs using the left and rightarrow buttons. Set yourproperties.

4. When finished, tap OK.

See AlsoFor more information on mapproperties, see the ArcPadReference Guide.

4

3

64 USING ARCPAD

Map projectionsEach layer in ArcPad shouldhave a projection informationfile (.prj) associated with it.Projection information can alsobe stored in the ArcPad map file(.apm). You can view the map’sprojection information in theMap Properties dialog box.

Viewing a map’sprojection

1. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the Open Mapbutton on the Main toolbar.

2. Tap Map Properties.

3. Scroll through the differenttabs using the left and rightarrow buttons.

4. Tap Projection.

The projection informationfor the map is displayed.


See AlsoFor more information on projec-tions and coordinate systems, seeChapter 5, ‘Displaying data’, andthe ArcPad Reference Guide.

45

3

ARCPAD BASICS 65

Layer propertiesProperties for a selected layercan be defined and changed onthe Layers page of the Table ofContents. Properties includeinformation on the selectedlayer, symbology used to drawthe layer’s features, a hyperlinkfield, attributes for the layer,display scale, and the geo-graphic extent of the layer.

Setting layer properties

1. Tap the Table of Contentsbutton on the Main toolbar.

2. On the Layers page, tap thelayer of interest.

3. Open the Layer’s propertiesdialog box by either double-tapping on the selected layeror tapping the LayerProperties button. u

1

2

3

66 USING ARCPAD

4. Scroll through the differenttabs using the left and rightarrow buttons. Set yourproperties.


4

5

See AlsoFor more information on layerproperties, see Chapter 6,‘Managing layers’, and the ArcPadReference Guide.

Ch04.pmd 11/16/2005, 2:16 PM66

ARCPAD BASICS 67

Moving aroundthe mapThe Browse toolbar providestools to move around your mapand investigate different areasand features.

ArcPad has a number of mapnavigation tools includingvariable zoom/pan, fixed zoom,zoom to a specific layer orbookmark, map rotation, andcenter on the current GPSposition.

Zooming and panning

1. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the Zoom Inbutton to display thedropdown list.

2. Tap either the Zoom In, ZoomOut, or Pan tool, dependingon what you would like to do.

3. Zoom In or Out by drawing arubberband box. Pan bydragging the pen along themap.

Alternatively, with the ZoomIn, Zoom Out, or Pan toolactive, tap the map andArcPad will perform theaction and recenter the mapat that location.

4. Tap the Go Back To PreviousExtent button to undo yourlast zoom or pan.

Tip

Interrupting drawingIf you activate a tool, such as zoomor pan, while your map is drawing,ArcPad interrupts the draw.Similarly, if a tool is alreadyactivated, and you draw on thescreen, ArcPad interrupts the draw.

Tip

Active toolsAny button that requires tapping onthe map can be activated includingZoom In, Zoom Out, Pan, andRotate Map buttons.

A tool is activated by tapping thebutton, either on the toolbar orfrom a dropdown list. When a toolis active, the tool’s icon is displayedon the toolbar in a depressedmode, and the icon in thedropdown list is highlighted with ared square. Only one tool can beactive at a time. A tool is deacti-vated by tapping a different button.

1

2

4

68 USING ARCPAD

Tip

Zooming and panningtechniquesAfter selecting the appropriatezoom option, tap the screen at theedge of the required area, thenwithout lifting the pen, slide the pendiagonally across the map until therequired area is enclosed by adashed rectangle. Lift the pen, andthe zoom will be effected. A similaraction is used to pan across themap at the current zoom level.

This action can also be performedwith the action button, or rockerswitch, located on the left-hand sideor front of some Windows Mobiledevices. Pushing the rocker intoggles the mode. Moving therocker up or down performs thezoom or pan. In Z mode the rockeris a fixed zoom in/out, H indicateshorizontal pan, and V indicatesvertical pan.

Zooming with the fixedzoom tool

1. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the Zoom to FullExtent button to display thedropdown list.

2. Tap the Fixed Zoom In/Outtools to perform an incremen-tal zoom in or zoom out.

3. Tap Zoom to Full Extent tozoom to the extent of all thelayers in the map.

4. Tap Zoom To Layer to selecta layer to zoom to. ArcPadzooms to the geographicextent of the selected layer.

5. Tap Center on GPS when youwant to center the display onthe current GPS position. YourGPS receiver needs to beactivated for this tool to beenabled.

Tip

Panning frameArcPad includes a panning framethat can be added to your display.Tap the dropdown arrow to theright of the Tools button and tap thePanning Frame button. Once thepanning frame is activated, tap thearrows located on the frame, andArcPad pans your map displayaccordingly.

1

2

34

5

Displays themode for theaction button.

PanningFrame

ARCPAD BASICS 69

Rotating the maporientationArcPad enables you to rotatethe map based on your ownorientation. Map orientation isextremely useful in the fieldwhen you want to angle themap to match what you areobserving or collecting or tonavigate with your GPSreceiver.

Rotating the map

1. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the Zoom Inbutton to display thedropdown list.

2. Tap the Rotate Map tool.

3. Tap, hold, and drag the penclockwise on the screen tothe desired map orientation.

A black arrow is displayed toguide you with your maprotation.

Tip

Automatic map rotationusing a GPSYou can set the rotation of the mapto automatically update whenconnected to a GPS receiver so thatthe map is orientated in thedirection of travel. See Chapter 11,‘Navigating with your GPS’, formore information.

Clear map rotation

1. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the GPS toolsbutton to display thedropdown list.

2. Tap Clear Rotation.

1

2

1

2

70 USING ARCPAD

Setting spatialbookmarksA spatial bookmark identifies aparticular geographic extentthat you want to save andreturn to later. For example, youmight create a spatial bookmarkthat identifies a study area.That way, as you pan and zoomaround your map, you caneasily return to the study areaby accessing the bookmark.You can also use spatialbookmarks to highlight areas onyour map that you want othersto see.

Creating a spatialbookmark

1. Pan and zoom the map to thearea in which you want tocreate a bookmark.

2. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the Go Back ToPrevious Extent button todisplay the dropdown list.

3. Tap Create Bookmark.

The Bookmark dialog box isdisplayed. u

2

3

ARCPAD BASICS 71

4. Type a name for yourbookmark in the Bookmarkdialog box.

5. Check the Global check boxif you want the bookmark tobe saved in your ArcPadpreferences file. Globalbookmarks can be accessedwithin any map. Localbookmarks are saved in thecurrent map file.

6. Tap OK.

4

5

6

72 USING ARCPAD

Zooming to a spatialbookmark

1. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the Go Back ToPrevious Extent button todisplay the dropdown list.

2. Tap Zoom To Bookmark.

3. Tap the bookmark that youwould like to zoom to.

ArcPad will zoom to theextent of the bookmark youselected.

Tip

Managing bookmarksBookmarks are managed via theMap Properties dialog box. Youcan delete a bookmark, change thename of a bookmark, or set abookmark to be global. For moreinformation, see the Map Proper-ties section earlier in this chapter.

1

23

ARCPAD BASICS 73

Locking theArcPadapplicationArcPad lets you lock theapplication so that no tools canbe accidentally selected whenyour device is not in use or ifyou simply want to view a mapin the field.

When locked, ArcPad cannotreceive input from a mouse orpen; the keyboard, however,remains unlocked. The Locktool applies to ArcPad only anddoes not lock the entire system.You can therefore access otherapplications on your device orcomputer.

Using the lock tool

1. To lock the ArcPad screen,tap the Lock tool.

2. To unlock the ArcPad screen,tap the Lock tool.

3. At the prompt screen, tap Yes.

Tip

Locating the Lock toolThe Lock tool is located on theCommand bar at the bottom of theArcPad screen on a WindowsMobile device. On a Windowsdesktop computer, the lock tool isalso located on the Main toolbar.

3

Lock/Unlock

74 USING ARCPAD

Setting ArcPadoptionsThe ArcPad Options dialog boxallows you to set a number ofoptions, including displaypreferences and quality, mapand data paths, ArcIMSrequests, and camera settings.These options are saved in theArcPad preferences file(ArcPadPrefs.apx), locatedunder the My Documentsfolder. Once set, these prefer-ences are applied to all yourmaps created in ArcPad. You arenot required to set them foreach new map you create.

Setting ArcPad 0ptions

1. On the Main toolbar, tap theTools button.

2. Navigate through the tabsand search for the option youwould like to set.

3. Set your options.

For detailed information onsetting ArcPad options, referto the ArcPad ReferenceGuide.

4. Tap OK.

Tip

Restoring ArcPad defaultsTo restore all ArcPad defaultparameters, close ArcPad, deletethe ArcPad preference file(ArcPadPrefs.apx), and restartArcPad.

Tip

Setting GPS andrangefinder preferencesYou can set GPS options in the GPSPreferences dialog box andrangefinder options in theRangefinder Preferences dialogbox.

1

2

3

4

ARCPAD BASICS 75

Getting helpA quick way to learn whatArcPad can do is to get helpabout the buttons and toolsyou see on the ArcPadinterface.

The ArcPad online help systemis organized by toolbar: Maintoolbar, Browse toolbar, Edittoolbar, and Command bar. Eachbutton on each toolbar has adescription in the online helpsystem.

Getting help in theArcPad window

1. Tap the Help button.

2. Select the toolbar you wish tolearn more about.

3. Scroll down and view thedifferent buttons pertaining tothat toolbar.

4. Tap OK or X.

See Also

Visit the ArcPad Web site forupdated information:www.esri.com/arcpad.

Visit the Online Support Center forFAQs, Knowledge Base, anddiscussion forums:http://support.esri.com/arcpad.

1

4

3

76 USING ARCPAD

Saving a mapand exitingArcPadAfter you finish working on amap, you can save it and exitArcPad. You save it as anArcPad map file and store it onyour computer or your mobiledevice. ArcPad automaticallyappends a file extension (.apm)to your map document namewhen saved.

Saving a map

1. Tap the arrow to the right ofthe Open Map button todisplay the dropdown list.

2. Tap Save Map.

3. Alternatively, tap the SaveMap button on the Maintoolbar. If you haven’t savedthe map before, you’ll needto provide a name for it.

See Also

See Chapter 2, ‘Introduction toWindows Mobile’, for informationon device accessories.

Tip

Compact Flash and SecureDigital Memory CardsConsider storing your data onCompact Flash (CF) or SecureDigital (SD) Memory Cards. Thiswill ensure that your data is notlost if the battery on your mobiledevice is drained.

1

2

3

ARCPAD BASICS 77

Saving as a new map

1. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the Save button todisplay the dropdown list.

2. Tap Save Map As.

3. Type a name for your map.

4. Navigate to the location ofthe folder where you wouldlike to save the map file.

5. Tap OK.

Exiting ArcPad

1. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the Save button todisplay the dropdown list.

2. Tap Exit.

3. Tap Yes to save any changes,No to discard any changes,or Cancel to continueworking on your map.

3

4

5

2

3

78 USING ARCPAD

Working with ArcPad files

With ArcPad, you work with several different types of files. Eachfile type plays a specific role in ArcPad and is differentiated by aunique file extension.

The key file types include:

• Custom Default Configuration File (ArcPad.apx)

This file is loaded by default each time ArcPad starts and must belocated in the ArcPad installation directory. ArcPad.apx cancontain custom toolbars, forms, and system object eventhandlers. In addition, it can contain other parameters thatoverride the ArcPad default such as which toolbars are initiallyvisible when the application starts.

• Global Bookmark File (ArcPadBookMarks.apx)

This file contains spatial bookmarks that can be used in ArcPadregardless of the current map. It is saved in the My Documentsfolder on your device.

• ArcPad Preference File (ArcPadPrefs.apx)

This file contains ArcPad default parameters, such as GPSsettings, default symbology, default file paths, and so on. It issaved in the My Documents folder on your device.

• ArcPad Layer Definition File (*.apl)

Layer definitions are stored in a file associated with a shapefile,with the same filename as the shapefile but with the extension.apl. Layer definition files provide a way of developingcustomizations that are delivered and loaded with data. Layerdefinition files may also contain custom symbology exported fromArcGIS Desktop.

• ArcPad Map File (*.apm)

An ArcPad map file, or map, stores a list of the map layers foryour ArcPad session. A map lists all of your feature layerstogether with their display settings, including the extent of yourmap, color, and projection environment.

• ArcPad Graphics Layer file (*.apg)

The ArcPad Graphics Layer file is an XML file that can store text,points, lines, and polygons. It is used to make freehandgeoreferenced edits in the field which can then be imported intoArcGIS Desktop.

• ArcPad Photo Layer file (*.aph)

The ArcPad Photo Layer file is an XML file that references afolder containing georeferenced images. Images contained in thefolder are projected on-the-fly to the current map projectioncoordinates when displayed in ArcPad. The ArcPad Photo Layerfile supports JPEG images. The default symbol for features in thislayer is a camera.

• ArcPad Stylesheet (*.aps)

An ArcPad Stylesheet is a file that provides symbol definitionsfor the symbol styles used by ArcPad. ArcGIS Desktop stylesheetfiles can be exported to ArcPad Stylesheet files.

Section 2

Displaying data

IN THIS CHAPTER

81

Creating maps 5• Creating a new map

• Adding layers

• Adding shapefiles

• Adding images

• Adding graphics layers

• Adding an ArcIMS Internet Server

• Adding ArcIMS layers

• About coordinate systems

• Specifying a coordinate system

In order to create efficient maps for use in the field, ArcPad leveragesexisting mapping and GIS software systems and databases. There is noneed to convert data to unique portable data formats. ArcPad supports amultilayer environment with industry-standard vector map and raster imagedisplay that includes aerial photographs and satellite imagery. Maps createdin the field can easily be uploaded into the master database in the office.

In addition, ArcPad supports wireless data acquisition. ArcPad can act as aclient to ArcIMS, ESRI’s Internet mapping and GIS software or to theGeography Network (www.geographynetwork.com). Data is downloadedto ArcPad using a TCP/IP connection, such as a wireless local areanetwork, cellular phone, or a wireless modem.

82 USING ARCPAD

Creating a newmapA map is the fundamentalcomponent you work with inArcPad. The ArcPad map file(.apm) stores a list of the maplayers and their properties inyour ArcPad session. A maplists all your layers togetherwith the geographic extent andprojection of the map. Whenyou begin an ArcPad session,you must first open an existingmap or create a new map byadding layers of data orinformation.

Once shapefiles, images,graphics layers, or Internet dataare added to your ArcPad map,you determine whether or notthey are displayed, edited,updated, or moved. Each fileappears in ArcPad as a layer inthe map.

Creating a new map fromthe Windows Mobile Startmenu

1. Tap Start on the Windowstaskbar.

2. Tap Programs

3. Tap ArcPad 7.0.

You will see the ArcPadsplash screen briefly andArcPad will open with theStartup dialog box.

Creating a new map on adesktop PC


2. Click All Programs.

3. Click ArcGIS.

4. Click ArcPad 7.

5. Click ArcPad 7.0 forWindows.

You will see the ArcPadsplash screen briefly andArcPad will open with theStartup dialog box.

See Also

For more information aboutsupported ArcPad data formats,refer to the ArcPad ReferenceGuide.

5

CREATING MAPS 83

Creating a new mapusing the Startup dialogbox

1. By default, ArcPad beginswith the Startup dialog box.When it appears, tap A newempty map.

2. If you do not wish to see theStartup dialog box againwhen ArcPad starts, tap Donot show this dialog again.

3. Tap OK.

ArcPad will open a newblank map.

Tip

Start with browsing for dataIf you select Browsing for data onthe Startup dialog box, ArcPad willautomatically navigate to your MyDocuments folder so that you canimmediately begin to add data.

1

2

3

Tip

Turning the Startup dialogbox on or offYou can check Do not show thisdialog again if you do not want tosee the Startup dialog box againwhen starting ArcPad. To turn theStartup dialog box on, go to theStartup page in the ArcPad Optionsdialog box.

Ch05.pmd 11/16/2005, 2:24 PM83

84 USING ARCPAD

Creating a new map inArcPad

1. If you do not wish to use theStartup dialog you can alsoopen a new map from theMain toolbar in ArcPad. Tapthe dropdown arrow to theright of the Open Map button.

2. Tap New.

3. Tap Map.

ArcPad will open a newblank map. If you haveanother map open, ArcPadwill ask you if you would liketo save any changes.

Tip

Prepare your DataUse ArcGIS Desktop to prepareyour data for ArcPad. With thesedesktop tools, you can createsubsets of your data, convert datato shapefiles, and export legendsymbology.

See Also

See Chapter 18, ‘ArcPad Tools forArcGIS’.

1

2 3

If you have another map open, ArcPadwill ask if you would like to save yourchanges.

CREATING MAPS 85

Adding layersYou can display geographicinformation on a map as layers.Each layer represents a particu-lar type of feature, such asstreams, lakes, highways, orlight posts. A layer does notstore the actual geographicdata; instead, it references thedata contained in shapefiles,images, graphics layers, orArcIMS services.

Adding layers to yourArcPad map

1. Tap the Add Layer(s) buttonon the Main toolbar.

2. Tap the Folder button tonavigate to the directory thatyou would like to add datafrom.

3. Tap the folder in the DirectoryBrowser dialog box thatcontains the layers you wishto add to your map.

4. Tap OK.

5. Check the check box besidethe datafile(s) you would liketo add.

The Add Layer(s) dialog boxonly displays layers that aresupported by ArcPad. A redcheck mark indicatesselected files.

6. Tap OK.

Your data layers are nowadded to the existing ArcPadmap.

Tip

Layer projection conflictsOnly add layers with the sameprojection. ArcPad will not addlayers with different projections tothe same map. Projection informa-tion for each layer is contained inthe layer’s projection (.prj) file. Inaddition, each map has anassociated projection that can bestored in the ArcPad map (.apm).

2

5

6

1

3

4

Tip

Distinguishing layer typesThe different layers supported byArcPad are represented by thefollowing icons:

for point shapefiles

for line shapefiles

for polygon shapefiles

for image layers

for graphics layers

for ArcIMS layers

for photo layers

86 USING ARCPAD

AddingshapefilesArcPad uses vector data inshapefile format, as doesArcView, ArcEditor, ArcInfo,ArcIMS, and other ESRIsoftware programs. A shapefile(.shp) is a vector file format forstoring the location, shape, andattributes of geographicfeatures. Shapefiles can supportpoint, line, and polygonfeatures. Attributes are held in adBASE® (.dbf) format file.

Adding shapefiles to yourArcPad map


2. Tap the Folder button tonavigate to the shapefile youwould like to add.

Shapefiles have a .shp suffix.

3. Check the checkbox besidethe datafile(s) you would liketo add.

A red check mark indicatesselected files.

4. Tap OK.

Your shapefiles are nowadded as layers to theexisting ArcPad map.

Tip

Prepare your shapefilesUse ArcGIS Desktop to prepareyour data for ArcPad. With thesedesktop tools, you can createsubsets of your shapefiles andexport ArcGIS Desktop stylesheets.ArcPad also supports spatial andattribute indexes of shapefiles.Create attribute indexes in ArcPadvia the Attributes tab in theLayerProperties dialog box. Createa spatial index for large shapefilesin ArcGIS Desktop to improveperformance in ArcPad. For moreinformation on indexing, seeChapter 8, ‘Querying your data’,and ArcGIS Desktop Help.

2

3

4

See Also

For more information on creatingshapefiles in ArcPad, see Chapter 15,‘Creating new features’.

CREATING MAPS 87

Adding imagesArcPad directly supports theuse of the following rasterimage formats: GIF, JPEG,JPEG2000, MrSID, PNG, TIFF(including GeoTIFF and LZWcompression), WindowsBitmap, and CADRG rastermaps.

ArcPad requires thegeoreferencing information andcoordinate system informationin order to correctly displayimages on a map.

Georeferencing information canbe included in the header of theimage, associated .aux file, orworld file.

Coordinate system informationcan also be included in theheader of the image, associated.aux file, or projection (.prj) file.

See Also

For more information aboutsupported raster image formats,refer to the ArcPad ReferenceGuide.

Adding images to yourArcPad map


2. Tap the Folder button tonavigate to the raster imageyou would like to add.



4. Tap OK.

Your images are now addedas another layer to theexisting ArcPad map.

2

3

4

Ch05.pmd 11/16/2005, 2:31 PM87

88 USING ARCPAD

Adding graphicslayersArcPad supports graphics layerfiles. The ArcPad GraphicsLayer (.apg) is an XML file thatcan store annotation, points,lines, and polygons. It is usedfor redlining or to makefreehand georeferenced edits inthe field. Graphics layer filescan be easily imported toArcGIS Desktop.

See Also

For more information aboutcreating ArcPad Graphics Layers,refer to Chapter 16, ‘Creating newfeatures’.

Adding graphics layers toyour ArcPad map


2. Tap the Folder button tonavigate to the graphics layeryou would like to add.

Graphics layers have a .apgsuffix.



4. Tap OK.

Your graphics layer is nowadded as another layer to theexisting ArcPad map.

Tip

Adding layers via the Tableof ContentsThe Add Layer(s) tool is alsoavailable on the Layers page of theTable of Contents.

Tip

Adding photo layersArcPad Photo layers (.aph) canalso be added using the samemethod as a graphics layer. Aphoto layer displays a camera iconat the location of a hyperlinkedphotograph. See Chapter 13,‘Using your digital camera’, formore information.

2

3

4

CREATING MAPS 89

Adding anArcIMS InternetServerArcPad supports wireless dataacquisition. ArcPad acts as aclient to ArcIMS, ESRI’sInternet Mapping and GISsoftware. Data is downloadedto ArcPad using a TCP/IPconnection, such as a wirelesslocal area network (LAN),cellular phone, or a wirelessmodem. ArcPad supportsArcIMS image services.

Tip

The Geography NetworkWith ArcPad, you can easily accessESRI’s Geography Network(www.geographynetwork.com).The Geography Network is a richsource for geographic data. Usethe Geography Network buttonunder the Add Layer(s) tool for adirect connection, if your TCP/IPconnection is active.

1. Tap the arrow to the right ofthe Add Layer(s) button.

2. Tap Add Internet Server.

3. Type the URL of the ArcIMSInternet Server you wouldlike to connect to.

4. Tap the Refresh button.

ArcPad lists the supportedservices that are available toyou.

5. Tap the service you wouldlike to connect to.

6. Tap OK.

ArcPad creates a .gnd file(Geography NetworkDefinition) which stores thereference to the ArcIMS hostURL and the chosen mapservice.

7. Navigate to the location youwant to save the file in andtap Save.

8. ArcPad will ask you whetheror not you would like to addthe service to your currentproject. Tap Yes to add it. Ifyou tap No, you can add itlater with the Add Layer(s)tool.

1

2

34

5

6

90 USING ARCPAD

Adding ArcIMSlayersA Geography Network Defini-tion file (.gnd) is created whenan ArcIMS Internet Server isadded (see previous page).Once added, the ArcIMS layercan be added to ArcPad via theAdd Layer(s) tool. ArcPadautomatically establishes aconnection to the server andretrieves data for the currentview—if an active TCP/IPconnection exists. The ArcIMSlayer is downloaded and storedlocally as an image. ArcPad alsosupports the Identify tool onArcIMS layers, if the layercontains attributed vector dataon the host server.

Tip

Refresh buttonTap the Refresh button on theBrowse toolbar to refresh theArcIMS layer when the map extentchanges. You can also set ArcPadto automatically refresh ArcIMSlayers in the ArcIMS page of theArcPad Options dialog box or inthe ArcIMS page of the LayerProperties dialog box.

Adding ArcIMS layers toyour ArcPad map


2. Tap the Folder button tonavigate to the ArcIMS layeryou would like to add.

ArcIMS layers are displayedas Geography NetworkDefinition files with a .gndsuffix. These allow you torefresh the layer from theInternet server where youoriginally retrieved it. Theimage layer received fromthe ArcIMS image service isstored locally.

3. Check the check box besidethe datafile(s) you would liketo add.

A red check mark indicatesselected files. If you check the.jpg layer, you are adding thelast image requested fromthe ArcIMS service. If youcheck the .gnd layer, you canrefresh the layer for the mostcurrent data. You should onlyselect one.

4. Tap OK.

Your ArcIMS layers areadded to the existing ArcPadmap.

2

3

4

CREATING MAPS 91

The features on a map reference the actual locations of theobjects they represent in the real world. The positions of objectson the earth’s spherical surface are measured in degrees oflatitude and longitude, also known as geographic coordinates.While latitude and longitude can locate exact positions on thesurface of the earth, they are not uniform units of measure; onlyalong the equator does the distance represented by one degree oflongitude approximate the distance represented by one degree oflatitude. To overcome measurement difficulties, data is oftentransformed from the three-dimensional geographic coordinatesystem to the two-dimensional planar surface in a projectedcoordinate system. Projected coordinate systems describe thedistance from an origin (0,0) along two separate axes, a horizontalx-axis representing east–west, and a vertical y-axis representingnorth–south.

Because the earth is round and maps are flat, getting informationfrom the curved surface to a flat one involves a mathematicalformula called a map projection. A map projection transformslatitude and longitude to x,y coordinates in a projected coordinatesystem.

About coordinate systems

This process of flattening the earth will cause distortion in one ormore of the following spatial properties: distance, area, shape,and direction. No projection can preserve all these properties and,as a result, all flat maps are distorted to some degree. Fortunately,you can choose from many different map projections. Each isdistinguished by its suitability for representing a particularportion and amount of the earth’s surface and by its ability topreserve distance, area, shape, or direction. Some map projectionsminimize distortion in one property at the expense of another,while others strive to balance the overall distortion. As amapmaker, you can decide which properties are most importantand choose a projection that suits your needs.

Locations are expressed as latitude and longitude on a globeand as x,y coordinates on a map.

Displaying the world using the Albers projection (left) and theRobinson projection (right).

92 USING ARCPAD

Specifying acoordinatesystemIn order for ArcPad to displaythe layers of your data cor-rectly, they need to be in thesame coordinate system orprojection. Projection informa-tion is stored in a separate filenamed after the data source butwith a .prj file extension—forexample, citytrees.prj. Inaddition, each map has anassociated projection that canbe stored in the ArcPad map(.apm).

The default projection for a newmap in ArcPad is latitude–longitude WGS84. If you have anarcpad.prj file in your MyDocuments folder, then it replaceslatitude–longitude WGS84 as thedefault map projection. When youadd a layer or map with a differentprojection to a new map, thedata’s projection replaces thedefault projection. u

1. Tap the Table of Contentsbutton.

2. Tap Choose Map ProjectionDefinition File. u

Tip

Convert GPS input dataArcPad supports on-the-flyprojection and datum conversionfrom the (geographic) GPS inputmap datum to the projection of thecurrent map.

2Projectioninformation ofcurrent mapvia MapPropertiesdialog

CREATING MAPS 93

3. Navigate to the location ofyour projection file (.prj) onthe Choose Map ProjectionDefinition File dialog box.

4. Select the projection file thatmatches the projection of thelayers in your current map.

The coordinate system hasbeen specified. View theProjection page in the MapProperties dialog box todisplay the coordinatesystem of the current map.

Tip

Convert your dataUse ArcGIS Desktop to change theprojection of your data beforeadding it to your ArcPad map.

See Also

For information about supportedprojections and datums, refer to theArcPad Reference Guide.

If you add a layer with noprojection (.prj file) to a mapwith a geographic projection,ArcPad checks if the dataappears to be latitude–longitude (i.e., geographic). If itappears to be geographic,ArcPad asks if you would liketo assume the data is in thesame geographic projection asthe map. If it does not appear tobe geographic, ArcPad removesthe default projection and themap has no projection.

3

4

IN THIS CHAPTER

95

Managing layers 6• Turning a layer’s visibility on or

off

• Changing a layer’s drawing order

• Removing a layer from the map

• Selecting a layer for the Identifytool

• Selecting a layer for editing

• Layer properties

• Changing layer properties

• Creating a transparent layer

• The Map Grid layer

ArcPad displays geographic information on a map as layers. Each layerrepresents a particular type of feature, such as streams, lakes, highways,political boundaries, or light posts. A layer does not store the actualgeographic data; it references the data contained in shapefiles, images,graphics and photo layers, or ArcIMS services.

As you saw in the previous chapter, it’s easy to add layers to a map. Oncethey are on your map, you will want to organize them to make your map lookthe way you want it to. You organize and manage layers through the Table ofContents. The Table of Contents allows you to turn a layer’s visibility on oroff, change a layer’s drawing order, remove layers, select layers for editing,change a layer’s properties, and set snapping properties for editing.

96 USING ARCPAD

Turning a layer’svisibility on or offOnce a layer has been added toyour map, you have the optionof turning it on or off withouthaving to completely remove itfrom your map. If a layer isturned off, it does not displayon your map. You can, however,view a layer’s properties andedit and identify a layer even ifit is turned off.


The Table of Contents openson the Layers tab anddisplays a list of the layersthat have been added to yourmap.

2. Check the visible check boxto turn the layer on. Uncheckthe check box if you want toturn the layer off.

3. Tap OK.

Tip

Making all the layers visibleOn the Layers page of the Table ofContents, tap the visible icon tomake all the layers visible. Tap itagain to turn off all the layers.

Tip

Editing layers are visibleIf a layer is checked for editing inthe Table of Contents, it is alwaysvisible. In order to turn off thatlayer, you must ensure that it is notchecked for editing.

2

3

Visibleicon

1

MANAGING LAYERS 97

Changing alayer’s drawingorderThe order in which a layerappears in the Layers section ofthe Table of Contents corre-sponds to the opposite order inwhich it is drawn on the map.Layers at the bottom of the listare drawn first, and the layers atthe top are drawn last.

By default, ArcPad inserts pointlayers at the top, line layerssecond, and polygon layersthird. Raster images are placedat the bottom of the list andhence are drawn first.


The Table of Contents openson the Layers page anddisplays a list of the layersthat have been added to yourmap.

2. Tap the layer whose orderyou would like to change.

3. Tap the arrows to change theorder of the selected layer.

4. Tap OK.

1

23

4

98 USING ARCPAD

Removing a layerfrom the mapWhen you are finished using alayer, you can simply remove itfrom the map. In the Table ofContents, select the layer youwould like to remove and tapthe delete button. When youremove a layer, you are notdeleting the data from yourdevice; you are only deleting itfrom the current map.


2. Tap the layer you would liketo remove.

3. Tap the delete button.

4. Tap Yes.

The layer is removed fromyour map.

5. Tap OK.

4

23

5

1

MANAGING LAYERS 99

Selecting a layerfor the IdentifytoolThe Identify tool lets you viewattribute information for aparticular feature. Once a layeris selected for the Identify tool,make the Identify tool active,then tap the feature, and theFeature Properties dialog boxappears. By default, the FeatureProperties dialog box includespages for Attributes, Picture,Symbology—if defined—andGeography. If a custom formexists for the feature, it will bedisplayed. You cannot edit yourdata using the Identify tool;you can only view it.


The Table of Contents openson the Layers page and listsall of the layers in the currentArcPad map.

2. Check the Identify tool checkbox for the layer(s) youwould like to retrieve infor-mation for.

3. Tap OK.

See Also

For more information on how touse the Identify tool, seeChapter 8, ‘Querying your data’.

Tip

Select all layers for theIdentify toolIn the Table of Contents, tap theIdentify tool to activate all layers.Tap again to deactivate all layers.

1

2

3

100 USING ARCPAD

Selecting a layerfor editingLayers are selected for editingby enabling the Start/StopEditing tool on the Browsetoolbar or by checking thelayer’s Edit check box on theLayers page in the Table ofContents.

In ArcPad, you can have up tothree shapefiles active forediting—one shapefile for eachfeature type: one pointshapefile, one line shapefile,and one polygon shapefile.Alternatively, if you are editingthe Graphics Layer, you canonly have that layer active.

See Also

Refer to Chapter 14, ‘Editingbasics’, for more information onediting your data.

1. Tap the arrow to the right ofthe Start/Stop Editing buttonon the Browse toolbar.

The dropdown list displaysall of the editable layers inthe current ArcPad map witha corresponding icon toindicate the type of layer.

2. Tap the layer that you want toedit.

The Edit toolbar and theCommand bar will bedisplayed if they are notalready displayed.

In order to select more thanone layer you will need torepeat steps 1 and 2. You canselect one point, one line,and one polygon layer forediting, at one time, or thegraphics layer.

A red box around the layericon indicates that the layerhas been selected for editing.

Tip

Determining the layer typeArcPad allows you to edit point,line, and polygon shapefiles, andgraphics layers. Photo layers canonly be identified. The layer type isindicated by the following icons:


for line shapefiles


for graphics layers

for photo layers

1

2

MANAGING LAYERS 101

Properties for a selected layer can be defined and changed in the Layer Properties dialog box. Properties include information about theselected layer, symbology used to draw the layer’s features, a hyperlink field, attributes for the layer, a display scale, transparencyoptions for the layer, and the geographic extent of the layer. A complete list of possible layer properties is available in the ArcPadReference Guide.

Layer properties

Information page: Viewsimple metadata.

Labels page: Setlabeling information.

Hyperlinks page:Specify the hyperlinkfield.

Attributes page:View attributeand indexinformation.

Symbology page: Viewand edit the symbols.

Scale page: Specifya scale range fordisplaying the layer.

Geography page:View the geographicextent of the layer.

Transparency page:Set the transparencylevel and color.

102 USING ARCPAD


2. Tap the layer of interest.

3. Open the Layer’s propertiesby either double-tapping theselected layer or tapping thelayer properties button.

The Layer Properties dialogbox opens. u

See Also

For detailed information abouteach of the pages of the LayerProperties dialog box, refer to theArcPad Reference Guide.

Changing layerpropertiesYou can change the propertiesfor a selected layer using theLayer Properties dialog box.You can set labels, specifyhyperlinks, change symbology,view attribute information, andspecify a scale range fordisplaying layers.

See Also

Refer to Chapter 11, ‘Navigatingwith your GPS’, for information onthe GPS Tracklog.

23

MANAGING LAYERS 103

4. Scroll through the differenttabs depending on what youwould like to set.


See Also

Refer to Chapter 7, ‘Symbolizingyour data’, for information onlabeling and symbology properties.

4

5

104 USING ARCPAD

Creating atransparent layerGiving a layer transparency is asimple way of showing varyingand overlapping information.This is crucial when you aredisplaying many layers inArcPad on a small portablescreen. Transparency is set foran entire layer in the LayerProperties dialog box.

Setting transparency fora layer

1. From the Layer Propertiesdialog box, tap Transparency.

2. To change the transparencycolor, tap the color box.

The Color Designer opensand displays a selection ofcolors.

3. Tap the appropriate color onthe Color Designer.

4. Tap OK.

5. Use the slider bar to selectthe percent transparency youwant for this layer.

6. Tap OK to close the LayerProperties dialog box.

7. Tap OK to close the Table ofContents.

Tip

Setting transparency colorSome compression techniques donot provide exact colors andtherefore could alter the result ofyour transparency color. Foroptimal transparency results usepure images such as TIFF, BMP, orPNG.. 1

2

5

6

3

4

MANAGING LAYERS 105

The Map GridlayerArcPad allows you to include aMap Grid layer for your map.ArcPad displays the grid basedon the current map projection.The size of each grid cell isautomatically calculated byArcPad, based on the currentmap scale. You can change thestyle of the lines and text usingthe Layer Properties dialog boxfor the Map Grid layer.

Activating the Map Gridlayer


The Table of Contents openson the Layers page.

2. Check the checkbox for theMap Grid layer.

3. Tap OK.

The Map Grid layer isautomatically generated foryour ArcPad map.

2

3

The MapGrid layer

106 USING ARCPAD

Setting the style of theMap Grid layer


The Table of Contents openson the Layers page.

2. Tap the Map Grid layer andcheck its check box.

3. Open the Map Grid layer’sproperties by either double-tapping on the layer ortapping the Layer Propertiesbutton. u

2

3

MANAGING LAYERS 107

4. Set the line and text proper-ties for the grid layer.

5. Tap OK.

6. Tap OK on the Table ofContents.

The Map Grid layer is addedusing the properties youdefined.

4

5

IN THIS CHAPTER

109

Symbolizing your data 7• How symbology works in ArcPad

• Supported symbols

• Display quality

• Displaying symbology

• Defining simple symbology

• Defining complex symbology

• Working with scale-dependentsymbology

• Labeling features with text

Choosing the correct symbology for ArcPad is important for effectivelydisplaying your data in the field. You want to be certain that you specifysymbology that has sufficient contrast for the expected field lightingconditions. The artificial light and large monitors used in an officeenvironment enable the use of a wide range of colors and symbols;whereas, only a limited number of colors and symbols provide sufficientcontrast when used in the field with small computer screens and strongsunlight.

The large range of supported symbols for ArcPad enables you to displaylayers in the field using the symbology standards of your organization. Theuse of familiar symbology makes it easier for field users of ArcPad totransition from using paper maps, or desktop PCs, to using mobile deviceswith small, quarter-VGA screens.

ArcPad supports simple and complex symbology. Complex symbology willresult in slower draw performance on a Windows Mobile device. Forexample, a simple red line with a width of 1 will draw quicker than afreeway line symbol that has a red line drawn over a thicker black line. Toimprove performance, you can select a more simple symbol and/or setdisplay scale ranges for your layers.

110 USING ARCPAD

How symbology works in ArcPad

ArcPad has two levels of symbology: simple and complex. Simplesymbology refers to the basic style of the symbol. For example, aline layer’s simple symbology can be set in ArcPad as a dashedline, a thickness of three pixels, and the color red. Complexsymbology refers to symbology that is specified using a choiceof marker (point), line, and fill (polygon) symbols from standardStyle sheets or in the ArcPad Layer file (.apl) using the ArcPadTools for ArcGIS Desktop. ArcPad supports most of the symbolsavailable in ArcGIS Desktop therefore making the transition fromyour desktop GIS to the field much easier.

Simple symbology

Simple symbology is specified and changed in ArcPad using thePoint, Line, or Polygon Style page of the Symbol Propertiesdialog box. The Symbol Properties dialog box is accessed via theLegend in the Table of Contents or via the Symbology tab in theLayer Properties dialog box.

The Style page can be defined for point (marker), line, andpolygon (fill) layers. Once the style is set for a layer or for asubset of features within a layer, all the features in that categorywill have the same symbol.

The following styles can be set depending on the type of layer:

• Point Layer: In ArcPad, you can set the point marker to be acircle, square, triangle, cross, star, or diamond. In addition,you can set the outline color, the fill color, and the size of themarker.

• Line Layer: In ArcPad, you can set the line style to be solid,dash, dot, dash dot, or dash dot dot. In addition, you can setthe thickness and the color of the line.

• Polygon Layer: In ArcPad, you can set the polygon to be filledor unfilled. In addition, you can set the outline style (solid,dash, dot, dash dot, dash dot dot), thickness, and color, aswell as the fill color of the polygon.

Use the Set to Default Point (Line, Polygon) Style button to clearany symbology setting for the layer before setting new simplesymbology settings.

Style page for a point layer

SYMBOLIZING YOUR DATA 111

Complex symbology

ArcPad supports a wide range of complex symbols making thetransition from your desktop to the field much easier. With thecapbility to use the same symbology from your desktop GIS inthe field with ArcPad, you can maintain a mapping standardacross your office and mobile GIS applications.

ArcGIS Desktop (ArcView 9, ArcEditor 9, or ArcInfo 9) includesmore than 18,000 predefined symbols, the majority of which canbe used in ArcPad either via predefined styles or via stylesexported with ArcPad Tools for ArcGIS Desktop.

Working with styles and symbols

Styles are a collection of pre-defined colors, symbols, andproperties of symbols that allow you to maintain a mapping

The Style Manager in ArcGIS Desktop includes a comprehensiveselection of symbols and styles which can be exported for use inArcPad.

Point symbol properties from a style sheet.

Select from anextensive list ofavailable pointsymbols inArcPad.

standard and promote consistency in your organization’smapping products, whether you are working on the desktop or inthe field. By default, ArcPad includes the text, marker, line, and fillsymbols from the ESRI.Style, allowing you to select from anextensive list of commonly used symbols. Changes to symbologycan be made directly in ArcPad with the use of Styles.

In addition, you can create your own styles or export any of theother styles that are available in ArcGIS Desktop includingcommonly used symbols for conservation, forestry, and utilityapplications or projects. This gives you field access to almost allof the symbology available in your desktop GIS applications.Refer to Using ArcMap for more information about styles and therange of symbols supported by ArcGIS Desktop.

112 USING ARCPAD

ArcPad Tools for ArcGIS Desktop

ExportSymbology

Export ReferencedStyle(s)

Exporting symbology from ArcGIS Desktop

Complex symbology can also be created by exporting the legendinformation from ArcGIS Desktop to an ArcPad Layer file (.apl)using the Export Symbology or Get Data for ArcPad (7) tools inthe ArcPad Tools for ArcGIS Desktop. This enables a seamlessintegration between the maps you create on your desktop toArcPad and the field. Refer to Chapter 18, ‘ArcPad Tools forArcGIS’, for more information on how to export symbolgy fromArcGIS Desktop.


Supported symbols

ArcPad supports the majority of the 18,000 predefined symbolsthat are included with ArcGIS Desktop. Refer to Using ArcMapfor more information about styles and the range of symbolssupported by ArcGIS Desktop.

Symbology categories

Simple symbology can be defined in ArcPad and complexsymbology categories can only be defined using the ArcPadtools for ArcGIS Desktop. For point, line, and polygon layers,ArcPad supports the following symbology categories:

• Single Symbol: Drawing your data with a single symbol givesyou a sense of how features are distributed—whether theyare clustered or dispersed. An extensive list of complexsymbols are available to you in ArcPad. Alternatively, you candefine simple symbology in ArcPad or you can define complexsymbols using the ArcPad Tools for ArcGIS Desktop.

• Graduated Color: When you need to map quantities of things,you might choose to use a graduated color map. Graduatedcolor maps have a series of symbols whose colors changeaccording to the values of a particular attribute.

• Graduated Symbol: Another way to represent quantities is tovary the size of the symbol with which a feature is drawn. Likegraduated color maps, graduated symbol maps are mostuseful for showing rank or progression values. However,instead of using color to represent the differences in values,the size of the symbol varies.

• Unique Symbol: On a unique values map, you draw featuresbased on an attribute value or characteristic that identifiesthem. Typically, each unique value is symbolized with adifferent color.

114 USING ARCPAD

The display quality of your symbols directly affects the speed atwhich ArcPad draws them. Under certain conditions, you maywant to sacrifice the display quality of your symbology inexchange for a faster drawing speed. ArcPad uses greeking toquickly display symbols at a lower threshold of quality so thatthey draw faster.

Greeking is a method of displaying small text or symbols bysoftware programs. Because some text or symbols are too small todisplay, more simple characters or lines are used to display thattext. The color and the general shape of the symbol aremaintained but the details of the symbol are simplified. Greekingfor points, lines, polygons, and multipoint features can be turnedon or off via the Display Quality page of the ArcPad Optionsdialog box. These properties are stored in the ArcPadPrefs.apxfile.

Display Thresholds

Display thresholds or greeking can be enabled or disabled in theArcPad Options dialog box for points, lines, polygons, andmulitpoints. You can also change the greeking thresholds byediting the ArcPadPrefs.apx file. Refer to the ArcPad Studio Helpfor more detailed information on greeking thresholds.

The following display thresholds exist for each geometry type:

Point

• Threshold 1: Draw as a single pixel.

• Threshold 2: Draw using the real symbol’s greeking style.

Line


• Threshold 2: Draw as a greeking colored hairline.


Display quality

Polygon

• Threshold 1: Draw as a single pixel

• Threshold 2: Draw as a rectangle.

• Threshold 3: Draw as a greeking colored polygon (no outline).


Multipoint



Greeking for each geometry type can be turned onor off in the ArcPad Options dialog box


DisplayingsymbologyThe Legend page in the Table ofContents displays the layers ofthe current ArcPad map with theirassociated symbology. Withinthe Legend, you can turn layersor subset of layers on and offbased on their symbology. TheSymbol Properties dialog box isaccessed via the Legend bytapping on individual symbols.

Alternatively, you can view anindividual layer’s symbology byselecting a layer in the Table ofContents and opening itsproperties.

Displaying the currentmap’s symbology


2. Tap the Legend tab in theTable of Contents.

3. To display/hide the details ofa layer’s symbology, tap onthe plus/minus, +/-, symbolnext to the layer name ordouble tap the layer’s icon.

4. To open the legend for alllayers, tap the Layers icon atthe top of the legend.

5. To view a symbol’s proper-ties, tap on the symbol.

The Symbol Propertiesdialog box opens andenables you to define yoursimple and complexsymbology.

6. Tap OK when you arefinished.

1

2

3

4

5

6

116 USING ARCPAD

Displaying a layer’ssymbology


2. Tap the layer you wish todisplay symbology for.

3. Open the Layer’s propertiesby either double-tapping onthe selected layer or tappingthe Layer Properties button.

4. Tap the arrows to navigate tothe Symbology page and tapon the Symbology tab.

ArcPad displays the layer’ssymbology.

5. Uncheck the Value checkbox.

When checked, the symbolshown will be used to displayfeatures with the correspond-ing attribute values. Whenunchecked, no symbol will bedisplayed for features withthe corresponding attributevalue.

6. To view a symbol’s proper-ties, tap on the symbol.

The Symbol Propertiesdialog box opens andenables you to define yoursimple and complexsymbology.

7. Tap OK.4

5

6

7

2

3


Defining simplesymbology inArcPadSimple symbology is specifiedand changed in ArcPad usingthe Point, Line, or PolygonStyle page of the SymbologyProperties dialog box. TheSymbol Properties dialog box isaccessed via the Legend or theSymbology tab in the LayerProperties dialog box.

The Symbology can be definedfor point, line, and polygonlayers. Once the symbology isset for a layer or for a subset offeatures within a layer, all thefeatures in that category willhave the same symbol.

Defining a point layer’ssimple symbology


2. Tap the layer you would liketo set a style for.

3. Open the Layer Propertiesdialog box by either double-tapping on the selected layeror tapping the Layer Proper-ties button. u

1

2

3

118 USING ARCPAD

4. Tap the arrows to navigate tothe Symbology page.

5. Tap the displayed symbol.

The Symbol Propertiesdialog box opens. u

4

5


6. Tap the Point Style page onthe Symbol Properties dialogbox.

There are also Line andPolygon Style pages to setthe style for line and polygonlayers, respectively.

7. Select the marker type andset the outline and fill color,and size of the point symbol.

8. Tap OK on the SymbolProperties dialog box.

9. Tap OK on the Layer Proper-ties dialog box.

Tip

Set to Default StyleIf you tap Set to Default Point(Line, Polygon) Style, ArcPad willset the point (or line or polygon)marker to the default settings. Youcan then make any necessaryadjustments to the default.

6

7

8

120 USING ARCPAD

Defining complexsymbology inArcPadThe Symbol Properties dialogbox is used to define complexsymbology in ArcPad. From theStyles page, you can selectfrom an extensive list of point,line, or polygon (fill) symbols.ArcPad enables you to select asymbol but you cannot changethe properties of a complexsymbol in ArcPad.

Complex symbols are importedinto ArcPad via ArcPad Toolsfor ArcGIS Desktop. By default,ArcPad includes the text,marker, line, and polygonsymbols from the ESRI.Stylesheet.


2. Tap the Legend tab.

3. To display/hide the details ofa layer’s symbology, tap onthe plus/minus, +/-, symbolnext to the layer name.

4. Tap the symbol you wouldlike to change.

The Symbol Propertiesdialog box opens andenables you to define yoursimple and complexsymbology. u

2

3

4

Tip

Displaying symbolpropertiesYou can also display the SymbolProperties dialog box by tappingon a symbol from the Symbologypage of the Layer Properties dialogbox.


5. To select a new symbol, tapon the appropriate symbol.

The new symbol is displayedin the showcase box at thetop right of your screen.

6. To view the symbols from aspecific style, tap the appro-priate style in the selectionbox.

By default, the symbols fromall imported styles aredisplayed, designated by the* symbol.

7. The percent box illustrateswhat the symbol will look likeat the specified size. Thissetting is useful if you havedefined a reference scale forthe layer’s symbology. Usethe scroll bars or type thenew percentage in the givenbox.

8. Tap OK on the Styles page ofthe Symbol Properties dialogbox.

9. Tap OK on the Table ofContents.

Tip

Arranging the list ofsymbolsBy default, the symbols aredisplayed in the same order astheir respective stylesheet. Tappingthe Label colum heading will sortthe symbols in ascending orderbased on the name of the label. Tosort in descending order, tap theLabel heading column again.Tapping the Symbol columnheading will display the symbols inicon view. By default, they aredisplayed in list view.

5

6

7

8

122 USING ARCPAD

Working withscale-dependentsymbologyThe Scale page of the Symbol-ogy Properties dialog box isused to specify the minimumand maximum display scales fora layer’s symbology. WhenShow at all scales is selected,the layer’s symbology will bedisplayed regardless of thecurrent map scale. When Don’tshow when zoomed: is selected,the symbol will only be dis-played when the map scale iswithin the range specified in theIn beyond 1: and Out beyond 1:fields.

The Reference 1: scale specifiesat which scale the symbol willbe displayed at the defined size.The symbol will be shownlarger when zoomed in, andsmaller when zoomed out.

The 1:N scale button is used tocapture the scale of the currentmap’s view in ArcPad.

Defining scale-dependencies to displaysymbology

1. From the Symbol Propertiesdialog box, tap Scale.

2. Tap the Don’t show whenzoomed: radio button.

3. Tap the 1:N button to capturethe current map’s scale.

4. Set the minimum andmaximum scale ranges, asneeded.

5. Tap OK.

Tip

Set scale-dependent layersand labelsYou can also set minimum andmaximum display scales for anentire layer and for the labels of alayer. See the ArcPad ReferenceGuide for more information.

1

2

34

5


Labeling featureswith textArcPad allows you to labelfeatures with text. The TextLabel field is supported forpoint, line, and polygon layers.

The Labels page of the LayerProperties dialog box is used tospecify display settings forlabels of a point, line, orpolygon layer. You can specifythe attribute field for the labeltext; the size, color, and type offont; the reference scale for thelabel text; the placement forpoint and line features; and thedisplay scale range of the labeltext.


2. Tap the layer you wish tolabel with text.

3. Open the Layer’s propertiesby either double-tapping onthe selected layer or tappingthe Layer Properties button. u

Tip

Importing text symbolsfrom ArcGIS DesktopstylesThe text symbols from the ArcGISDesktop Styles can be importedinto ArcPad using ArcPad Toolsfor ArcGIS. See Chapter 18,‘ArcPad Tools for ArcGIS’, formore information.

2

3

124 USING ARCPAD

4. Tap the arrows to navigate tothe Labels page and tap theLabels tab.

5. Check the Labels using field:radio button.

6. Select an attribute field forthe label text or, optionally,enter an expression tospecify your labels.

7. Tap the Label propertiesbutton.

The Label Properties dialogbox opens. u

See Also

For more information on LayerProperties, see the ArcPadReference Guide.

Tip

Using an expression tolabel your featuresArcPad enables you to use anexpression to label your features.Expressions can be any valid scriptin the default script language (e.g.VBScript).

Following standard scriptingnotation, string literals must beenclosed in quotation marks,attribute fields are accessed via the[fieldname] technique, and the CStrfunction can be used to concatenatenumeric fields. ArcPad automati-cally converts any resultantexpression into a string.

For example, the followingVBScript expression will result in astacked label of two fileds, NAMEand YEAR..

[NAME] & vbCrLf & [Year]

The following VBScript expressionwill result in a label showing acaption followed by the area. Thearea is calculated from two fields,WIDTH and LENGTH.

“Area=” [WIDTH] * [LENGTH]

7

4

5 6


8. Tap the arrows to navigatethrough the label properties.

9. Set your label propertiesincluding color, font type,size, style, placement, andscale.


11. Tap OK to close the LayerProperties dialog box.

Q

8

9

Section 3

Querying data

IN THIS CHAPTER

129

Querying your data 8• Identifying features

• Hyperlinks

• Finding features

• Using other tools on your query

• Finding a location

• Spatial and attribute indexes

• Using the Advanced Select tool

• Using other tools with theAdvanced Select tool

• Measuring distance, area, andbearings on a map

When you are out in the field, ArcPad gives you the ability to compare yourdata directly to geographic features in the form of a map. More importantlyArcPad provides the tools to query your data to solve problems and retrieveinformation directly in the field.

With ArcPad you can:

• Uncover information about features by tapping on them.

• Display additional information about features through a picture, video, orvoice recording.

• Locate a feature within the extent of your map, label it, and zoom to it.

• Find a location and zoom to it.

• Measure the distance between features.

• Determine the area of a polygon feature.

130 USING ARCPAD

IdentifyingfeaturesThe Identify tool lets you viewattribute information for aparticular feature. Once a layeris selected for the Identify tool,make the Identify tool activeand tap the feature, and theFeature Properties dialog box isdisplayed. By default, theFeature Properties dialog boxincludes pages for Attributes,Picture, Symbology—ifdefined—and Geography. If acustom form exists for thefeature, it will be displayed. Youcannot edit your data using theIdentify tool; you can only viewit.

Tip

Selecting layers for theIdentify toolTap the Identify button on theLayers page in the Table ofContents to activate all layers. Tapagain to deactivate all layers.

Selecting a layer for theIdentify tool


The Table of Contents openson the Layers page and listsall of the layers in the currentArcPad map.

2. Check the Identify tool checkbox for the layers you wouldlike to retrieve information for.

3. Tap OK.

1

2

3

QUERYING YOUR DATA 131

Using the Identify tool

1. Tap the Identify button on theBrowse toolbar.

2. Tap the feature you wouldlike to identify.

The Feature Propertiesdialog box or, if it exists, acustom form, is displayed.

3. Tap OK.

Tip

Increasing the pentolerance to selectfeaturesIncrease your pen tolerance if youare having difficulty selecting afeature. The pen tolerance can beset in the Display page of theArcPad Options dialog box.

Tip

What is included in theFeature Properties dialogbox?By default, the Feature Propertiesdialog box includes pages forAttributes, Picture, Symbology, ifdefined, and Geography. If acustom form exists for the feature,it will be displayed. You cannot edityour data using the Identify tool;you can only view it.

1

2

3

132 USING ARCPAD

HyperlinksHyperlinks provide an addi-tional way to present informa-tion about your map features.With hyperlinks, you candisplay photographs, playvideos, and access Web pagesover the Internet for a particularfeature on your map.

A hyperlink is a document pathand name or a Web pageaddress stored with the feature.A hyperlink field within a layercan be any text field whichcontains a file name or URL. Toactivate a hyperlink in ArcPad,select a field to be assigned tothe Hyperlink tool in the LayerProperties dialog box.

Activating hyperlinks


2. Tap the layer that you wish toactivate a hyperlink for.

3. Tap the Layer Propertiesbutton.

4. Tap the right arrow tonavigate to the Hyperlinkpage.

5. Tap the Hyperlink tab.

6. Select the Hyperlink fieldwhere the file path or Webaddress is stored.

7. Tap OK.

8. Tap OK on the Layers pageof the Table of Contents.

8

2

3

7

45

6


Using hyperlinks

1. Once hyperlinks have beenactivated for a layer, tap thedropdown arrow to the rightof the Identify button.

2. Tap Hyperlink.

The hyperlink tool is acti-vated, and the Hyperlinkbutton is depressed andpromoted onto the toolbar.

3. Tap the feature for which youwould like to display ahyperlink.

4. ArcPad launches theprogram associated withyour hyperlink, and it isdisplayed on the screen.

5. Tap X to close the externalapplication and return toArcPad.

Tip

Displaying hyperlinkeddocumentsHyperlinks in ArcPad are links toexternal programs. They are notopened directly in ArcPad. If youspecify a Web address as ahyperlink, you must start theaddress with http://—for example,http://www.esri.com. ArcPad thenlaunches your default Web browserand displays the Web page, if youare connected to the Internet. If youspecify a photograph or video as ahyperlink, ArcPad will launch theassociated program that will thenopen the document.

Tip

Troubleshooting hyperlinksHyperlinks will fail to launch forone of the following reasons:

• There is no program associ-ated with the hyperlink file.

• The associated program cannotfind the file.

• The Web address does not startwith http://.

• The Internet connection isunavailable.

1

2

3

4

5

134 USING ARCPAD

Finding featuresThe Find tool can be used toselect features from a layerusing a search query. Theresults of the query are dis-played in a list. Once a list ofqueried features is displayed,select a feature and perform oneof the following actions on thatfeature:

• View information about thefeature using the Identifytool.

• Edit the feature’s propertiesthrough the Feature Proper-ties dialog box or a customform, if one exists.

• Zoom to the feature andlabel it.

• Select a feature and make itthe current navigationtarget.

• Center the selected featureon the screen.

• Select the feature for editing.

Using the Find tool toquery data

1. Tap the Find button on theBrowse toolbar.

The Find dialog box opens.

2. Tap the Select Layers buttonon the Criteria page of theFind dialog box.

The Field Browser dialog boxopens.

3. Tap the layer that you wish tosearch on and, optionally, thefield.

To select an optional field,tap on the plus, +, symbolnext to the layer name todisplay the list of availablefields.

4. Tap OK. u

1

2

3

4


5. Use the Soft Input Panel totype the value that you wantto find.

If you do not enter a value,ArcPad will display a list ofall the features in that layerwhen you execute the search(see Step 6).

6. Tap the Results tab toexecute the search.

ArcPad displays a list offeatures based on your queryon the Results page of theFind dialog box.

7. Tap the feature you aresearching for.

Tip

Refining your searchCheck the Search only features inview checkbox in the Find dialogbox for ArcPad to only query thosefeatures that are within yourscreen’s view.

56

7

136 USING ARCPAD

Using the Identify tool onyour query

1. Tap the feature you wouldlike to find information about.

2. Tap the Identify tool.

ArcPad displays the FeatureProperties dialog box for thatfeature or a custom form if itexists. You can simply viewthe information and not edit it.

3. Tap OK.

ArcPad returns to the list ofqueried features.

12

3


Using the FeatureProperties tool on yourquery

1. Tap the feature for which youwould like to display itsproperties.

2. Tap the Feature Propertiesbutton.

The Feature Propertiesdialog box or custom formdisplays, if one exists. Thefeature properties can beedited through this method.the layer must be set aseditable in order for theFeature Properties button tobe enabled.

3. Tap OK.

ArcPad returns to the list ofqueried features.

Tip

Editing with the Find toolIf the Feature Properties button isunavailable once you have selectedyour feature, you have not selectedthis feature to be editable via theStart/Stop Editing tool on theBrowse toolbar or in the Table ofContents. You can only display andedit features with the FeatureProperties dialog box once thelayers have been made editable.

Tip

Sorting the resultsTo sort the results of your searchin ascending or descending order,tap the column heading on theResults page of the Find dialog box.

1

2

3

138 USING ARCPAD

Using the Go To tool onyour query

1. Tap the feature you wouldlike to select as a destination.


3. ArcPad zooms to theselected feature.

The feature is highlightedusing the current highlightcolor and set as the currentnavigation destination. Thefeature is also labeled usingthe value of the field that wassearched on. If no field wasspecified, then the label willuse the field that has any partof the word ‘name’ in the fieldname.

Tip

Clearing the selectedfeatureTap the Clear Selected Feature toolon the dropdown list to the right ofthe Find button on the Browsetoolbar to clear the selecteddestination and remove its label.The feature is not deleted, it issimply unselected and thereforeunhighlighted.

Tip

Changing the highlightcolor of selected featuresUse the Display page of the ArcPadOptions dialog box to change thehighlight color and thickness of thebox that highlights your selectedfeature.

See Also

See Chapter 11, ‘Navigating withyour GPS’, to learn how to use theFind tool and the Go To tool toselect a navigation destination foryour GPS.

1 2

ClearSelected

3


1. Tap the feature you wouldlike to query. Follow Steps 2,3, 4, or 5 depending on whataction you would like toperform.

2. Tap the Zoom to Feature tool.

ArcPad will zoom to theextent of the selected feature.

3. Tap the Center tool.

ArcPad will center theselected feature on thescreen. The current mapscale is maintained.

4. Tap the Select tool.

The feature is highlightedand selected.

5. Tap the Hyperlink tool.

The hyperlink for the featureis displayed if there is one.

Tip

Resizing columns in thetable of matched featuresTap and drag the column border inthe field name row of the table tochange the size of the columns.

Using other toolson your queryArcPad also includes thefollowing tools you can performon your query:

• Zoom to Feature

ArcPad will zoom to theextent of the selectedfeature.

• Center

ArcPad centers the selectedfeature on the screen. Thecurrent map scale ismaintained.

• Select

The feature is highlighted—and selected—on the map.

• Hyperlink

A hyperlink for the feature isdisplayed. The Hyperlinkbutton will be unavailable ifthe feature has no activehyperlink.

1

23

4

5

140 USING ARCPAD

Finding alocationThe Find dialog box alsoenables you to find a locationbased on a set of coordinates.You can select from thefollowing coordinate systems:WGS84, Latitude/Longitude,UTM Zone, and MGRS. Simplyenter the required informationand ArcPad will go to thelocation and label it. Thedefault label is Mark.

Using the Find tool tolocate a place

1. Tap the Find button on theBrowse toolbar.

The Find dialog box opens.

2. Tap the Location tab.

3. Tap the appropriate radiobutton from the availableselection.

4. Enter the required coordinateinformation.

5. Enter a name for the label.The default is Mark.

6. Tap ok.

The location is labeled onyour map.

2

3

4

5

6


Spatial andattribute indexesAn index is a data structureused to speed the search forrecords in a database or forspatial features in geographicdatasets. Attribute indexes areused with data in tables. Spatialindexes are used with graphicalqueries of spatial features.Having a current spatial indexensures that a high level ofperformance is maintained whendrawing and working with theshapefile’s features and that theshapefile’s extent is accurate.

ArcPad supports spatial andattribute indexes of shapefiles.You can create spatial andattribute indexes in ArcPad viathe Attributes tab in the LayerProperties dialog box. ArcGISDesktop is used to createspatial indexes for largeshapefiles.

Creating a spatial and/orattribute index in ArcPad

1. In the Table of Contents,select the layer you wouldlike to create an index for.

2. Open the Layer Propertiesdialog box by double-clickingthe layer or by tapping theLayer Properties button.

3. Tap the Attributes tab.

4. Check the Geometrycheckbox under the Indexcolumn to create a spatialindex for the layer.

5. Check the appropriate fieldcheckbox under the Indexcolumn to create an attributeindex for that field.

6. Tap ok.

Your indexes are created.

See Also

For more information on spatialand attribute indexing, see UsingArcCatalog and the ArcGISDesktop Help.

3

4

5

6

142 USING ARCPAD

Using theAdvanced SelecttoolThe Advanced Select tool canbe used to select multiplefeatures at once. Features areselected from the active layersfor the Identify tool in the Tableof Contents. One, many, or allvector layers can be activatedfor the Advanced Select tool.The selected features aredisplayed in a list.


2. Check the Identify check boxfor the layers you would liketo use with the AdvancedSelect tool and tap OK.

3. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the Identify button.


A red box around theAdvanced Select toolindicates that it is active.

5. Tap the map to select afeature, or tap and drag aselection box to selectmultiple features from theactive layers.

A list displays the coordi-nates where the map wastapped and the selectedfeatures. Tap the + icon todisplay the attributes of theselected feature.

6. Tap the feature you wish toselect.

See Also

Refer to Chapter 11, ‘Navigatingwith your GPS’, for information onusing the Advanced Select tool withyour GPS.

3

4

5

6


Using the Identify toolwith the Advanced Selecttool

1. Tap the feature you wouldlike to find information about.

2. Uncheck the Close AfterAction check box if you wishto keep the Feature Informa-tion dialog box open afteryou Identify the feature.

3. Tap the Identify tool.

ArcPad displays the FeatureProperties dialog box for thatfeature or a custom form, if itexists. With the Identify form,you can only view theattribute information but youcannot edit it.

4. Tap OK.

4

1

23

144 USING ARCPAD

Using the FeatureProperties tool with theAdvanced Select tool

1. Tap the feature for which youwould like to display itsproperties.

2. Uncheck the Close AfterAction check box if you wishto keep the Feature Informa-tion dialog box open afteryou view the feature’sproperties.

3. Tap the Feature Propertiesbutton.

The Feature Propertiesdialog box or custom formdisplays, if one exists. Thefeature properties can beedited or viewed through thismethod. In order to edit thelayer, it must be set aseditable in the Table ofContents or via the Start/StopEditing dropdown list on theBrowse toolbar.

4. Tap OK.

1

23

4


Using the Go To tool withthe Advanced Select tool

1. Tap the feature you wouldlike to go to and select as adestination.

2. Check the Close After Actioncheck box.

The Feature Informationdialog box will close afteryou go to the feature.


ArcPad zooms to theselected feature.

4. The feature is highlightedusing the current highlightcolor and set as the currentnavigation target.

The feature is also labeledusing the value of the fieldthat was searched on. If nofield was specified, then thelabel will use the field thathas any part of the word‘name’ in the field name.

Tip

Changing the highlightcolor of selected featuresUse the Display page of the ArcPadOptions dialog box to change thehighlight color and thickness of thebox that highlights your selectedfeature.

1

23

4

146 USING ARCPAD

1. Tap the feature you wish toselect.

2. Tap the dropdown arrow onthe Feature Informationdialog box.

3. Tap Center.


Using other toolswith theAdvanced SelecttoolArcPad also includes thefollowing tools that you canuse with the Advanced Selecttool:

• Zoom to Feature

ArcPad will zoom to theextent of the selectedfeature.

• Center


• Select

The feature is highlighted—and selected—on the map.

• Hyperlink

A hyperlink for the feature isdisplayed. The Hyperlinkbutton will be unavailable ifthe feature has no activehyperlink.

2

3

1


Measuringdistance, area,and bearings ona mapArcPad lets you measuredistance, area, and bearings onyour map. ArcPad has threeprincipal measuring tools: theMeasure tool, the FreehandMeasure tool, and the RadialMeasure tool. The Measuretool allows you to measuredistance in a straight line or aseries of lines to form apolygon. The FreehandMeasure tool enables you todraw a line or object freely onyour map. The Radial Measuretool measures the radius of acircle. Each of these tools alsoallows you to determine area,view coordinates for the fromand to locations, and measurebearings.

Using the Measure tool

1. Tap the arrow to the right ofthe Identify tool to display thedropdown list.

2. Tap Measure.

The Measure tool is acti-vated, and the Measurebutton is depressed andpromoted onto the toolbar. Ared box around the Measuretool also indicates that it isactive.

The Command bar isdisplayed at the bottom of themap window. u

Tip

Changing measuring unitsYou can change the units used formeasuring in the ArcPad Optionsdialog box under the Display page.

1

2

148 USING ARCPAD

3. Tap the map where youwould like to begin tomeasure.

4. Tap again to end the distanceor continue to tap to create apolyline or polygon.

5. Tap the Proceed button onthe Command bar when youare finished. u

3

4

5 Undo

Tip

Undoing or cancelling yourmeasurement referencepointsUse the Undo tool on theCommand bar to go back a step tothe previously captured point foryour measurement or use theCancel Edits tool to erase allpoints for your measurement.


The Measurement Informa-tion dialog box displays withthe following data: thecoordinates (from and tolocation); the direct distance(from start to end); the actualdistance drawn; the bearings;and if you drew more thantwo vertices, the estimatedclosed area of the shape.

6. Tap OK to close the Measure-ment Information dialog box.

6

150 USING ARCPAD

Using the Radial Measuretool

1. Tap the arrow to the right ofthe Identify tool to display thedropdown list.

2. Tap Radial Measure.

The Radial Measure tool isactivated, and the RadialMeasure button is depressedand promoted onto thetoolbar. A red box around theRadial Measure tool alsoindicates that it is active. u

1

2


3. Tap and hold the radiallength you wish to measure.

ArcPad displays the Mea-surement Information dialogbox with the following data:the coordinates (from and tolocation), the radius, theperimeter, the bearings, andthe area.

4. Tap OK to close theMeasurement Informationdialog box. 3

4

152 USING ARCPAD

Using the FreehandMeasure tool

1. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the Identify buttonto display the dropdown list.

2. Tap Freehand Measure.

The Freehand Measure toolis activated, and the Free-hand Measure button isdepressed and promotedonto the toolbar. A red boxaround the FreehandMeasure tool indicates that itis active. u

1

2


3. Draw the line you wish tomeasure by tapping andholding the pen on the map.

ArcPad displays the Mea-surement Information dialogbox with the following data:the coordinates (from and tolocation), the direct distance(from start to end), the actualdistance drawn, the bear-ings, and the area.

4. Tap OK to close theMeasurement Informationdialog box.

3

4

Section 4

Using data capture devices

IN THIS CHAPTER

157

Connecting your GPS receiver 9• Introduction to GPS

• Supported GPS protocols

• Connecting your GPS receiver

• Setting communication parameters

• Activating your GPS

• The GPS/Rangefinder Debug tool

• Troubleshooting your GPSconnection

• NMEA 0183 sentences recognizedby ArcPad

• TSIP packets recognized byArcPad

This chapter begins with an introduction to the global positioning system(GPS) and describes how to connect your GPS receiver to ArcPad. Thischapter also discusses which GPS protocols are supported by ArcPad andhow to use the GPS/Rangefinder Debug tool to verify or troubleshoot yourGPS connection.

Ch09.pmd 11/16/2005, 10:40 AM157

158 USING ARCPAD

Introduction to GPS

GPS is a radio-based navigation system capable of providing anexact three-dimensional position (latitude, longitude, and altitude)anywhere on the earth, 24 hours a day, in any weather condition.GPS consists of three components: space, control, and usersegments. The space segment is a constellation of 24 activesatellites—as well as a few spares—orbiting the earth at a heightof approximately 12,600 miles in six evenly distributed orbitalplanes. The control segment consists of five tracking stationsspread out around the earth that monitor the satellites’ orbits andsend precise orbital data and clock corrections back to thesatellites. The user segment is made up of GPS receivers and theuser community. GPS was originally developed by the U.S.Department of Defense (DoD) for military use. However, GPS hasalso proven to be a very useful tool for civilian use and isavailable to anyone with a GPS receiver.

Each GPS satellite transmits signals on two frequencies: L1(1575.42 MHz) and L2 (1227.60 MHz). The L1 frequency containsthe civilian Coarse Acquisition (C/A) Code as well as the militaryPrecise (P) Code. The L2 frequency contains only the P code. TheP code is encrypted by the military—using a technique known asanti-spoofing—and is only available to authorized personnel. Theencrypted P code is referred to as the Y Code. Civilian GPSreceivers use the C/A Code on the L1 frequency to computepositions—although high-end survey grade civilian receivers usethe L1 and L2 frequencies’ carrier waves directly. Military GPSreceivers use the P (Y) Code on both L1 and L2 frequencies tocompute positions.

GPS receivers monitor these signals from multiple satellites—atleast three for a two-dimensional position and at least four for athree-dimensional position—and through a process calledtrilateration, they compute a position. This position is accuratefrom about 10 to15 meters—now that selective availability, anintentional degradation of the satellite signals, has been turned

off—down to a centimeter or less, depending on equipment andconditions.

GPS accuracy

Although GPS receivers give you exact positions—for example,34° 28' 18.8765"N, 122° 15' 34.0832"W, 302.56 meters elevation—itis important to understand that there is some amount ofuncertainty, or error, inherent in these positions. A number offactors contribute to this error including satellite clock drift,atmospheric conditions, measurement noise, and multipath. Inaddition, due to the satellite geometry, vertical accuracy(elevation) is generally one and a half to three times worse thanhorizontal accuracy. You should consider each GPS position as abox, and you are somewhere within that box. The size of that boxdepends on the overall accuracy of your GPS receiver.

Differential GPS

The accuracy of GPS receivers can be improved by using atechnique known as differential correction, or differential GPS(DGPS), to reduce some of the error. DGPS involves using astationary GPS receiver, called a base station, at a knownlocation—an accurately surveyed point—to calculate correctionsfor each satellite it is tracking. The corrections can be calculatedby comparing the known location of the base station to the GPSlocation determined by using the satellites. These corrections arethen applied to the satellite data received by your GPS receiver,resulting in positions that are accurate from about five metersdown to less than one meter for civilian C/A Code receiver,depending on the receiver.

There are two approaches to DGPS: postprocessing, in which thecorrections are stored on a disk and then applied to the field GPSdata back at the office after the data collection is complete, andreal-time, in which the corrections are broadcasted from the base

CONNECTING YOUR GPS RECEIVER 159

station to the field GPS receiver as soon as they are calculated.Real-time DGPS allows the corrections to be applied almostinstantly so that you can begin to work with the more accurateGPS positions immediately. In addition, accurate in-field GPSnavigation requires real-time DGPS. Many modern GPS receivershave built-in real-time DGPS capabilities or support add-on real-time DGPS components. There are various sources of real-timeDGPS signals, including Coast Guard beacons; Wide AreaAugmentation System (WAAS), a U.S. Federal Aviation Authority(FAA) system of equipment and software that supplements GPSaccuracy, availability, and integrity; FM-based services; andsatellite-based services. The U.S. Coast Guard beacons andWAAS services are free of charge. Other services may require asubscription fee. Since real-time DGPS calculations are handledinternally by the GPS receivers themselves, ArcPad supports thisform of DGPS. Postprocessing requires additional file formats,proprietary protocols, and additional software and therefore isnot supported directly by ArcPad.

Another way to improve the accuracy of GPS positions is byaveraging multiple fixes at the same location over time. Forexample, instead of taking a single GPS position at a particularlocation, you can stand in the same position for 30 seconds andaverage all the GPS positions you receive during that time toproduce one final position. An averaged position tends to bemore accurate than one single position.

Measures of accuracy

There are several indicators of the potential accuracy of particularGPS positions. Dilution of Precision (DOP) is probably the mostcommon indicator and is output by most, if not all, modern GPSreceivers. DOP indicates the quality of the geometry of the GPSsatellite constellation at a particular time. A higher DOP indicatespoor satellite geometry and a potentially less accurate positionthan a lower DOP. There are several expressions of DOP—forexample, HDOP-horizontal DOP, TDOP-time DOP—but positionPDOP (PDOP) is the most commonly used. A PDOP value of six orless is generally acceptable. By only capturing GPS positionswith a low DOP, you tend to capture more accurate positions.

Ch09.pmd 11/16/2005, 10:47 AM159

160 USING ARCPAD

Supported GPS protocols

ArcPad supports the following protocols for communicating withGPS receivers:

• National Marine Electronics Association. (NMEA) 0183,version 2.0

• Trimble Standard Interface Protocol (TSIP)

• Rockwell PLGR Protocol

• Delorme® Earthmate®

Any GPS receiver that outputs any of the above protocols shouldwork with ArcPad, as long as the GPS receiver is correctlyconfigured and properly connected to the device being used withArcPad.

ESRI does not publish a list of supported GPS receivers forArcPad. ArcPad supports the above list of GPS protocols ratherthan specific GPS receivers.

Selecting a GPS receiver

ESRI does not publish a list of recommended GPS receivers sincethere are many factors that need to be considered when selectingan appropriate GPS receiver for your specific field GIS needs.Factors that need to be considered include:

Supported protocols

Does the GPS receiver output a protocol that is supported byArcPad?

Accuracy

What accuracy do you require for your GPS positions?

Is autonomous GPS with 5–15 meters accuracy sufficient, or doyou require differential correction to achieve higher accuracy?

Does the GPS receiver have the ability to differentially correct theGPS positions when connected to a differential receiver or usingthe WAAS differential system?

How well does your GPS receiver work under a canopy or inenvironments that are susceptible to multipath errors?

Differential correction

What type of real-time differential correction is available andreliable in the area where you will be working: beacon, satellite, orWAAS?

GPS receiver functionality

Can the GPS receiver be configured to set such factors aselevation mask, position interval, and SNR mask?

Does the GPS receiver have its own display to configure thereceiver and use the receiver in a standalone mode?

Cost

How much do you want to spend on a GPS receiver? Moreaccurate GPS receivers cost more than less accurate receivers.

Size and configuration

Do you require a compact GPS receiver or a backpack GPSreceiver? Ultra-compact GPS receivers tend to be less expensivebut also less accurate than larger GPS receivers. GPS receivers areavailable in various configurations including Compact Flashreceivers, PC Card receivers, Bluetooth receivers, specializedbuilt-in receivers, add-on expansion packs, handheld receivers,integrated receivers and mobile devices, all-in-one antennas andGPS receivers, and backpack GPS receiver systems.


Are cables an issue? Bluetooth is a good alternative forwirelessly connecting an external GPS receiver to your mobiledevice.

Availability and support

What GPS receivers are available in your local area, and is thelocal GPS vendor’s support adequate?

There is no perfect GPS receiver for use with ArcPad. You shouldconsider all of the above factors when deciding which GPSreceiver best meets your field GIS and GPS needs.

For more information on selecting a GPS receiver you candownload the ESRI Whitepaper, ArcPad 7 Devices andAccessories, from the Literature link on www.esri.com/arcpad, orfrom support.esri.com/arcpad.

Ch09.pmd 11/16/2005, 10:48 AM161

162 USING ARCPAD

Connecting your GPS receiver

Connecting your GPS receiver to ArcPad is a simple process thatinvolves the following steps:

1. Determine what cables, adapters, and gender changers, if any,are needed to connect your GPS receiver to the mobile devicebeing used to run ArcPad.

2. Connect the GPS receiver to the mobile device.

3. Configure the GPS receiver.

4. Set the GPS Preferences in ArcPad.

There is no standard method for connecting a GPS receiver toArcPad since most GPS receivers have unique configurations.However, by using this section and the documentation for yourGPS receiver and mobile device, it is fairly easy to successfullyconnect your GPS receiver to ArcPad.

Determining what items are needed

In general, you will need one or more of the following items toconnect your GPS receiver to the mobile device being used to runArcPad:

• A serial cable to connect to the GPS receiver

• A serial cable to connect to the mobile device

• A male-to-male gender changer

• A null modem adapter

You will not need any of the above items if you are connectingyour GPS receiver to your mobile device via Bluetooth.

Many GPS receivers and mobile devices have unique fittings fortheir serial ports and hence require their own proprietary serialcables. This is particularly true for handheld GPS receivers andWindows Mobile devices. However, not all GPS receivers requireall of the above items to connect to the mobile device. Forexample, the Leica GS5, GS5+, and Trimble Pathfinder Pocket GPS

receivers connect directly to the serial cable for the mobile deviceand do not require their own proprietary serial cable, null modemadapter, or gender changer. Some GPS receivers do not requireany cables or adapters—for example, GPS receivers whichsupport Bluetooth, Compact Flash and built-in GPS receivers.

Most serial cables that connect to the GPS receiver on one endare designed to connect directly to a PC serial port on the otherend using a standard DB9 serial connector. This is not the casewhen connecting to most Windows Mobile since these devicesusually have nonstandard, proprietary serial ports. Consequently,a proprietary serial cable is usually also required whenconnecting a GPS receiver to a Windows Mobile device. Thisdependency on proprietary serial cables makes Bluetooth anattractive option for connecting serial devices, including GPSreceivers, to Windows Mobile devices—although not allWindows Mobile devices support Bluetooth.

Most GPS serial cables and Windows Mobile device proprietaryserial cables have 9-pin DB9 female connectors on the ends thatneed to be connected together. Consequently, a 9-pin male-to-male gender changer is required to connect the two female serialcables.

Ultra-thin style DB9 male-to-male gender changer


to connect a Windows Mobile device to a GPS receiver. The nullmodem adapter also reverses pins 2 and 3 and therefore cancelsthe pin reversal in the sync cable.

How do you know whether the Windows Mobile serial cable is async cable and therefore requires a null modem adapter? In mostcases, if the Windows Mobile serial cable has a female DB9connector on one end, it is likely to be a sync cable, and thus anull modem adapter will be required to connect to a GPS receiver.

Connecting your GPS receiver

Using the information in the preceding discussion you shouldnow be able to determine which cables, null modem adapters, andgender changers you will need to connect your GPS receiver tothe device that is running ArcPad. Obviously, you will not needany cables or adapters if connecting via Bluetooth. Assemble andconnect the required items before moving to the next step ofconfiguring your GPS receiver. Also, make sure that the batterieson your GPS receiver are fully charged!

Configuring your GPS receiver

By default, most handheld GPS receivers are configured to notoutput any GPS data. You need to configure your GPS receiver tooutput data, generally via the NMEA protocol unless your GPSreceiver supports additional protocols such as TSIP. ArcPadsupports the NMEA 0183 version 2.0 standard protocol, so makesure that you select at least version 2.0 of NMEA on your GPSreceiver if the receiver supports multiple NMEA versions.

You also need to verify the communication parameters that yourGPS receiver is configured for, specifically the baud rate, parity,data bits, and stop bits. You will need this information for the nextstep of setting the GPS Preferences in ArcPad.

Finally, a null modem adapter or cable is usually needed whenconnecting a GPS receiver to a Windows Mobile device, usingthe device’s sync cable.

Null modem adapters and cables

The following paragraph explains why you usually need a nullmodem adapter when using a sync cable to connect a GPSreceiver to a Windows Mobile device.

PCs and Windows Mobile devices use the serial port’s pin 2 toreceive data and pin 3 to transmit or send data. Devices thatoutput data via serial ports, such as GPS receivers, use pin 2 totransmit or send data and pin 3 to receive data. This works sincethe GPS receiver sends data on pin 2, while the PC receives dataon pin 2. However, a Windows Mobile device will not be able tocommunicate with a PC when connected using a standard serialcable since both the Windows Mobile device and PC will betrying to send data on the same pin 3. To solve this problem, mostWindows Mobile devices have sync cables that reverse pins 2and 3 so that the device can communicate with a PC. This synccable works for communicating between a Windows Mobiledevice and a PC. It does not work, however, when communicatingbetween a Windows Mobile device and a GPS receiver since bothdevices are now sending data on the same pin. Consequently,you need a null modem adapter, or cable, when using a sync cable

DB9 male-to-female null modem adapter

Ch09.pmd 11/16/2005, 10:48 AM163

164 USING ARCPAD

If you are using Bluetooth, you will need to use the BluetoothManager on your mobile device to discover the GPS receiver, andpossibly to pair your GPS receiver with your mobile device.Consult the documentation for your GPS receiver and mobiledevice for more information on connecting via Bluetooth.

Setting the GPS Preferences in ArcPad

Before you can activate your GPS, you need to set the GPScommunication parameters in ArcPad to match the parameters seton your GPS receiver. The GPS protocol and communicationparameters are set in the GPS page of the GPS Preferences dialogbox.

The task later in this chapter describes how to set thecommunication parameters in ArcPad.


SettingcommunicationparametersBefore you can activate yourGPS, you need to set the GPScommunication parameters inArcPad to match the parametersset on your GPS receiver. Themost common communicationparameters are located in theGPS page of the GPS Prefer-ences dialog box. Less commoncommunication parameters arelocated in the Serial PortParameters dialog box, which isopened by tapping the SerialPort Parameters button, .

You can use the Find GPS tool,, to search for your GPS if

you do not know which port onyour mobile device your GPS isconnected to. However, youneed to make sure that yourGPS is connected and turned onin order for the Find GPS tool todetect your GPS. The Port andBaud dropdown list options willbe updated as the Find GPSsearches for a connected GPS.

Setting the GPS protocol,port, and baud rate

1. Tap the arrow to the right ofthe GPS Position Windowbutton, on the Main toolbar,to display the dropdown list.

2. Tap GPS Preferences toopen the GPS Preferencesdialog box.

The GPS page is the firstpage displayed.

3. Tap the Protocol dropdownarrow to select the protocolused by your GPS receiver tooutput data.

4. Tap the Port dropdown arrowto select the port used byyour GPS receiver to outputdata.

5. Tap the Baud dropdownarrow to select the baud rateused by your GPS receiver tooutput data.

See Also

Refer to your GPS receiver’smanual for information on how toset the output GPS protocol andport communication parameters onthe GPS receiver.

3

4

5

Ch09.pmd 11/16/2005, 10:49 AM165

166 USING ARCPAD

See Also

Refer to Chapter 4 of the ArcPadReference Guide for moreinformation on the fields in the GPSPreferences and Serial PortParameters dialog boxes.

Setting the advancedserial port parameters

1. Tap the Serial Port Param-

eters button, , on the GPS

page of the GPS Preferencesdialog box, to open the SerialPort Parameters dialog box.

The Port and Baud rateselected in the GPS page willautomatically be selected inthe Serial Port Parametersdialog box.

2. Tap the Data Bits dropdownarrow to select the number ofdata bits used by your GPS tooutput data.

3. Set the remaining communi-cation parameters to matchthe settings on your GPSreceiver.

2


Activating yourGPSBefore you activate your GPS inArcPad, you need to ensurethat the GPS receiver is cor-rectly connected to your mobiledevice and that the GPSprotocol and communicationparameters in ArcPad match thesettings on the GPS receiver.You also need to turn your GPSreceiver on before activating itin ArcPad.

The GPS can only be activatedif there is a projection definedfor the current ArcPad map. TheGPS Active tool is disabled ifthe current ArcPad map doesnot have a projection defined.The default projection inArcPad is latitude–longitudeusing the WGS84 datum. Thedefault projection can bechanged by placing anarcpad.prj file in your \MyDocuments folder.

1. Configure your GPS receiverto output data using one ofthe GPS protocols supportedby ArcPad.

2. Connect your GPS receiverto your mobile device usingthe appropriate cables, nullmodem adapters, andgender changers—or, ifusing Bluetooth, via theBluetooth Manager.

3. Set the GPS Protocol andcommunication parametersin the GPS Preferencesdialog box to match thesettings on the GPS receiver.

4. Tap the arrow to the right ofthe GPS Position Windowbutton to display thedropdown list.

5. Tap GPS Active. u

Tip

Activating your GPS withthe GPS Position WindowbuttonYou can also activate the GPS bytapping the GPS Position Windowbutton. A message box will bedisplayed if the GPS is not active.Tap Yes to activate the GPS andopen the GPS Position Window.

4

5

Ch09.pmd 11/16/2005, 10:49 AM167

168 USING ARCPAD

Tip

Deactivating your GPSIf the GPS is activated, you candeactivate it by tapping GPS Active.

The GPS cursor is displayedwhen the GPS is active andis initially located at the lastknown or current GPSposition. The GPS cursor isshown with a slash whenusing the last known GPSposition.

The GPS Active icon is alsohighlighted with a red boxwhen the GPS is active.

Tip

Activating your GPS withthe worldmap.jpg sampledataArcPad includes WorldMap.jpg, asample JPEG image. TheWorldMap.jpg file has an associ-ated worldfile and aux file (withprojection information) and coversthe whole world in latitude–longitude coordinates. This isuseful when activating a GPS forthe first time since it provides aquick method for determining if theGPS communication parametersare set correctly.

The WorldMap.jpg file is automati-cally installed on your PC underthe C:\Program Files\ArcPad\7.0\Sample\World folder. TheWorldMap.jpg file is only installedon your Windows Mobile devicewhen the sample world data isinstalled. To install the worldsample data on your WindowsMobile device:

1. Establish an ActiveSync sessionbetween your PC and WindowsMobile device.

2. On your PC, click Start, AllPrograms, ArcGIS, ArcPad 7,Install ArcPad 7.0 World SampleData on Windows Mobile.

3. Follow the prompts.

The GPScursor


The GPS/Rangefinder Debug tool

GPS/Rangefinder Debug is a useful tool for troubleshooting GPSconnection problems. The GPS/Rangefinder Debug tool isopened by tapping the arrow to the right of the GPS PositionWindow button and then tapping GPS/Rangefinder Debug. TheGPS Debug tool is only opened when a GPS or rangefinder iscurrently active.

The GPS/Rangefinder Debug tool opens a window that displaysdata from either the GPS receiver or rangefinder, or both. ArcPaduses the settings for the GPS and rangefinder communicationparameters to parse, or interpret, the GPS and/or rangefinder databeing received on the serial port of your device. The informationdisplayed in the GPS/Rangefinder Debug window is dependent

on the GPS and rangefinder protocols being used to communicatewith your GPS receiver or rangefinder. ArcPad then displaysinformation in the GPS/Rangefinder Debug window that indicatesthe status of the GPS and/or rangefinder connection.

Valid GPS data is displayed in green text, and valid rangefinderdata is displayed in blue text. Invalid data is displayed in red text.Valid data is data that is constructed properly, in accordance withthe selected GPS or rangefinder protocol, and has a validchecksum.

The GPS/RangefinderDebug tool

The GPS/Rangefinder Debug window for NMEA0183 GPS and rangefinder data. Valid GPS data isdisplayed using green text, and valid rangefinderdata is displayed using blue text.

Ch09.pmd 11/16/2005, 10:49 AM169

170 USING ARCPAD

Chapter 12, ‘Using your rangefinder’, includes a section on usingthe GPS/Rangefinder Debug tool for troubleshooting yourrangefinder connection. This section will focus on using the toolfor troubleshooting your GPS connection.

No information displayed in the GPS\RangefinderDebug window

Irrespective of which GPS protocol is being used, the firstobservation to make when opening the GPS/Rangefinder Debugwindow is whether any information is being displayed at all. Noinformation displayed in the GPS/Rangefinder Debug windowindicates a GPS connection or configuration problem. Problemsare caused by any one of the following factors:

• Your GPS receiver is not turned on or has not been configuredto output data in a protocol such as NMEA 0183.

• The batteries on your GPS receiver may be low; some GPSreceivers stop outputting data via the NMEA 0183 protocolwhen the battery power gets too low.

• The GPS Protocol selected in the GPS Preferences dialog boxdoes not match the protocol being used by your GPS receiverto output data. For example, your GPS receiver may beconfigured to output data using the TSIP protocol, but theNMEA 0183 protocol has been selected in the GPSPreferences dialog box.

• The cable connection between your GPS receiver and thedevice running ArcPad may be incorrect. Add a null modemadapter if you are not using one, or remove the null modemadapter if you are using one.

• The GPS port communication parameters selected in the GPSPreferences dialog box do not match the serial communicationparameters set on your GPS receiver. For example, your GPS

receiver may be set to output at a baud rate of 4800, while abaud rate of 9600 has been selected for the GPS port settingsin ArcPad.

• If using Bluetooth, your Bluetooth connection to your GPSreceiver is not defined correctly. Make sure that you canconnect to your GPS receiver from the Bluetooth Manager onyour mobile device.

Test each of these factors one by one to isolate the problem anddetermine why no information is being displayed in the GPS/Rangefinder Debug window.

If you have not already done so, run the Find GPS tool—which islocated on the GPS page of the GPS Preferences dialog box.

It is worthwhile to note that some GPS receivers have qualitycontrols set—such as PDOP, HDOP, and Elevation Maskangles—which could affect the output of the GPS receiver.Although these settings would not typically be the reason for noinformation displayed in the GPS/Rangefinder Debug window,these settings could explain why your GPS receiver is notreporting a coordinate to ArcPad. It may be useful to confirm thatthese parameters on your GPS receiver are set to minimal levelswhen experiencing difficulties obtaining a coordinate from yourGPS.

Illegible information displayed in theGPS\Rangefinder Debug window

In some instances you may see illegible characters displayed inthe GPS/Rangefinder Debug window. This is usually caused byGPS port communication parameters selected in the GPSPreferences dialog box that do not match the serialcommunication parameters set on your GPS receiver.


GPS Debug information for the NMEA 0183protocol

If you are using the NMEA 0183 protocol, you should see theNMEA 0183 sentences displayed in the GPS/Rangefinder Debugwindow as ASCII text. Each NMEA sentence that ArcPad readsfrom the serial port is displayed in the GPS Debug window. ValidGPS data is displayed using green text, while invalid GPS data isdisplayed using red text.

The displayed NMEA 0183 sentences can be used totroubleshoot your GPS connection. In the following example, a

number of the NMEA 0183 sentences are displayed showingempty fields with commas and no preceding information.

For instance, the $GPGGA sentence (in the middle of the GPS/Rangefinder Debug window) is displayed as:

$GPGGA,,,,,,0,03,,,M,,M,,*65

The $GPGGA NMEA 0183 sentence includes the GPS fix data,with the first field containing the UTC time, the second and thirdfields containing the latitude, the fourth and fifth fieldscontaining the longitude, the sixth field containing the fix quality,and the seventh field containing the number of satellites beingtracked. In the above example $GPGGA NMEA 0183 sentence, theUTC time, latitude, and longitude values are empty. The fix qualityfield is 0, which means there is no GPS fix. The number ofsatellites being tracked is 3, which is insufficient to calculate aposition (4 satellites are needed to calculate a position. So theabsence of latitude and longitude values and the fix quality of 0—that is, no fix—indicate that the GPS receiver has not locked on tosufficient satellites to calculate a GPS position and consequentlyis not outputting a GPS position to ArcPad. This would explainwhy, in this situation, ArcPad does not display a GPS position inthe GPS Position Window.

Similarly, empty fields in other NMEA 0183 sentences can explainwhy the corresponding information is not displayed in the GPSPosition Window.

GPS Debug information for the TSIP protocol

The TSIP protocol is quite different to the NMEA 0183 protocol.First, the TSIP protocol is a binary protocol in which the GPS datais sent in a binary format as data packets of information. Thisbinary data is illegible and needs to be decoded by a computerprogram. Consequently, the TSIP packet contents are not shownin the GPS/Rangefinder Debug window, but instead a message isdisplayed showing the TSIP packet number, a description of the

The GPS/Rangefinder Debug window for NMEA0183 GPS data

Ch09.pmd 11/16/2005, 10:50 AM171

172 USING ARCPAD

contents of the packet, and whether ArcPad has received thepacket without errors. Packets that have been successfullyreceived are displayed using green text. Packets that have notbeen successfully received are displayed using red text.

Second, with the TSIP protocol, some of the GPS data is only sentby the GPS receiver when it receives a request to do so. Forexample, ArcPad needs to send the TSIP packet 0x003C, RequestTracking Status, to the GPS receiver to receive the packet 0x005C,Satellite tracking status, in return.

In the example above, all of the TSIP packets have beensuccessfully received, and are all displayed using green text.

The TSIP packet messages in the GPS/Rangefinder Debugwindow can be used to troubleshoot your GPS connection in thesame way as the NMEA 0183 sentences. Missing information inthe GPS Position Window can usually be explained by a TSIPpacket that ArcPad has requested but has not yet received.

The GPS/Rangefinder Debug window for TSIPGPS data


Troubleshooting your GPS connection

The preceding sections of this chapter help identify and solvemost of the problems encountered when connecting a GPSreceiver to ArcPad. However, situations may arise in which youcontinue to encounter problems connecting your GPS receiverdespite verifying that both your GPS and ArcPad have beenconfigured correctly, and your GPS is connected to the devicewith the correct cables. This section discusses some of thesesituations, as well as tools to help troubleshoot your GPSconnection.

“Error 55 opening COM1” message when activating the GPS

This error may occur when ArcPad attempts to open the serialport, such as COM1, when the port has already been opened byanother application. Any application that uses the serial portcould be responsible for this situation. On Windows Mobiledevices, however, the application is usually MicrosoftActiveSync, drivers for keyboards, or programs used to configureGPS receivers. It is common on Windows Mobile devices forapplications to not release the serial port even though theapplication may no longer be running.

The solution on Windows Mobile devices is to perform a softreset, or reboot, of the device. In practice, it is a worthwhile habitto always perform a soft reset of the Windows Mobile devicewhen switching from ActiveSync to using a GPS and vice versa.

This error message may also occur on PCs that have MicrosoftActiveSync running in the background. The solution in this caseis to open the Connection Settings dialog box in ActiveSync anduncheck the Allow serial or infrared connection to this COM portcheck box. This will disable ActiveSync from locking the serialport.

Pocket Outlook’s Inbox opens when connectingyour GPS receiver to a Windows Mobile device

This situation may occur if you are using a portable keyboardthat connects to the serial port of your Windows Mobile device.The portable keyboard usually has an associated program thatruns in the background and regularly checks the serial port forthe keyboard.

The solution is to disable or exit the keyboard software beforeconnecting your GPS receiver. You may also need to do a softreset of your Windows Mobile device.

Using HyperTerminal to test your GPS connection

HyperTerminal can be a very useful tool for testing your GPSconnection communication parameters and cables and verifyingthat the GPS receiver is outputting data using the selected GPSprotocol. HyperTerminal can also be a useful tool for determiningwhether or not the cause of the connection problem is ArcPad. Inmost cases ArcPad should be able to connect to your GPSreceiver if HyperTerminal connects successfully.

Opening HyperTerminal on PCs

To open HyperTerminal on PCs running Windows XP or 2000;click Start> Programs> Accessories> Communications>HyperTerminal. This opens Hyperterminal with the NewConnection dialog box. Type GPS in the Name field of the NewConnection dialog box and click OK. Click OK in the Connect Todialog box.

In HyperTerminal, click the Properties button to open theproperties dialog box.

In the Properties dialog box (which will be titled ‘GPS Properties’)select the COM port you are using to connect to your GPS fromthe list in the Connect Using dropdown list.

Ch09.pmd 11/16/2005, 10:50 AM173

174 USING ARCPAD

Click the Configure button to open the selected COM port’sproperties. On the COM Properties dialog box, select thecommunication parameters to match the settings on your GPSreceiver.

Click OK to save your settings and return to the mainHyperTerminal window. Click the Call (‘telephone’) button toconnect to your GPS receiver.

The HyperTerminal window should show the data being receivedfrom your GPS receiver—for example, ASCII NMEA sentences orillegible TSIP binary data. No data displayed in the HyperTerminalwindow indicates a connection problem to your GPS receiver.


NMEA 0183 sentences recognized by ArcPad

ArcPad supports a number of protocols for communicating withGPS receivers, one of which is the NMEA 0183 version 2.0standard protocol defined by the National Marine ElectronicsAssociation. The NMEA 0183 standard definition is availablefrom http://www.nmea.org.

The NMEA 0183 standard defines sentences that are used totransmit data. These sentences consist of printable ASCII text(plus carriage return and line feed). Each sentence consists of thefollowing data sequence:

• A $ always starts an NMEA 0183 sentence.

• A two-letter talker ID—for example, GP for global positioningsystem receiver.

• A three-letter sentence ID—for example, GGA.

• Several data fields separated by commas.

• An optional checksum to terminate the sentence and acarriage return or line feed.

The NMEA 0183 standard allows individual manufacturers todefine proprietary sentence formats. These sentences start with$P, then a 3-letter manufacturer ID, followed by data from themanufacturer that follows the general format of the standardsentences.

A sample NMEA 0183 sentence for the GPS fix data might be asfollows:

$GPGGA,121505,4807.038,N,01131.324,E,1,08,0.9,133.4,M,46.9,M, ,*42

where

• $GPGGA is the NMEA 0183 sentence ID for the GPS fix data.

• 121505 is the fix taken at 12:15:05 UTC.

• 4807.038,N is latitude 48° 07.038' N.

• 01131.324,E is longitude 11° 31.324' E.

• 1 is the fix quality. The fix quality can have a value between 0and 3, defined as follows:

• 0 = no fix

• 1 = GPS or standard positioning service (SPS) fix

• 2 = DGPS fix

• 3 = Precise positioning service (PPS) fix

• 08 is the number of satellites being tracked.

• 0.9 is the horizontal dilution of position (HDOP).

• 133.4,M is the altitude, in meters, above mean sea level.

• 46.9,M is the height of the geoid (mean sea level) above theWGS84 ellipsoid.

• (empty field) is the time in seconds since the last DGPSupdate.

• (empty field) is the DGPS station ID number.

• *42 is the checksum field.

The NMEA 0183 version 3.0 standard adds the followingadditional values for the $GPGGA fix quality, which ArcPadrecognizes:

• 4 = Real Time Kinematic (RTK) fixed solution

• 5 = Real Time Kinematic (RTK) float solution

• 6 = Estimated dead reckoning

• 7 = Manual input mode

• 8 = Simulation mode

Ch09.pmd 11/16/2005, 10:50 AM175

176 USING ARCPAD

NMEA 0183 sentences recognized by ArcPad

ArcPad recognizes the following NMEA 0183 version 2.0 orhigher sentences:

Sentence Description

$GPGGA GPS fix data

$GPGLL Geographic position, latitude and longitude

$GPGSA GPS Dilution of Precision (DOP) and activesatellites

$GPGSV GPS satellites in view

$GPRMC Recommend minimum specificGPS/TRANSIT data

$GPRRE Range residual error

$GPVTG Track made good and ground speed

$GPZDA Time and date

$PGRME Estimated error information(Garmin Proprietary)

$PGRMT Sensor Information(Garmin Proprietary)

$PMGNVER GPS hardware and software version numbers(Magellan Proprietary)

$PASHR,POS Position information(Ashtech Proprietary)

$PASHR,SAT GPS satellite tracking status information(Ashtech Proprietary)

$PRWIRID Version Information(Rockwell Proprietary)

Most GPS receivers output a limited number of NMEA 0183sentences. ArcPad uses data from a number of NMEA 0183sentences to display all of the information in the GPS PositionWindow as well as to populate the fields associated with the GPSTracklog. When information is not displayed in the GPS PositionWindow it is usually the result of ArcPad not receiving therequired NMEA 0183 sentence from the GPS receiver.

$PRWIZCH Channel Status(Rockwell Proprietary)

$SDDPT Depth, in meters

$SDMTW Water Temperature, in degrees Celcius


TSIP packets recognized by ArcPad

The Trimble Standard Interface Protocol (TSIP) is a Trimbleproprietary protocol for communicating with Trimble GPSreceivers and some GPS receivers which use Trimble GPS boards.

The TSIP protocol consists of a number of binary packets whichare used to request and receive information from the GPS receiver.Many TSIP packets are not sent by the GPS receiver unlessspecifically requested to do so via the receipt of a request TSIPpacket. In contrast, most NMEA sentences are automatically sentby the GPS receiver once the receiver has been configured tooutput the NMEA 0183 sentence.

TSIP packets recognized by ArcPad

ArcPad recognizes the following TSIP packets sent by the GPSreceiver:

Packet Description

0x13 Packet send error

0x41 GPS Time

0x42 XYZ ECEF, single precision

0x43 Velocity XYZ ECEF

0x44 Satellite selection

0x45 Software version

0x46 Health of receiver

0x47 Signal levels for all satellites tracked

0x4A Single precision LLA

0x4B Machine code/status

0x55 Input/Output options

0x56 Velocity fix (ENU)

0x5C Satellite tracking status

0x6D All-in-view satellite selection

0x82 Differential status

0x83 XYZ ECEF, double precision

0x84 Double precision LLA

0xBC Protocol configuration

TSIP packets sent by ArcPad to GPS device

ArcPad sends the following TSIP packets to the GPS receiver inorder to request a TSIP packet from the receiver:

Packet Description

0x1F Receiver Firmware Information Request

0x21 Current Time Request

0x24 GPS Position Fix Mode Request

0x26 Health Request

0x27 Signal Levels Request

0x35 I/O Option Flags Command

0x3C Satellite Tracking Status Request

Ch09.pmd 11/16/2005, 10:51 AM177

IN THIS CHAPTER

179

Using the GPS Position Window 10• Opening and closing the

GPS Position Window

• The GPS Position Window

• Selecting the positioncoordinate system

• Selecting the positionmeasure of quality

• Toggling between the Skyplot,Signal Chart, and Compass

The GPS Position Window is used to display information about the GPSsatellites and the GPS position, as well as navigational information. Most ofthe information displayed in the GPS Position Window is calculated by theGPS receiver and output to ArcPad via the selected GPS protocol. Althoughmany GPS receivers also display this information on the receiver’s screen, itis useful and convenient to use the ArcPad GPS Position Window. UsingArcPad reduces the need to view information on two different devices. Inaddition, the GPS Position Window provides a means of displaying keyinformation if the GPS receiver has no display screen.

180 USING ARCPAD

The GPS Position Window

The GPS Position Window displays the following information:

GPS Mode

The GPS Mode displays the type of position being calculated bythe GPS receiver. There are three groups of GPS modes that canbe displayed: NOFIX, 2D/3D, and differential modes.

NOFIX

NOFIX indicates that ArcPad is not receiving a position from theGPS receiver. No position coordinate will be displayed if the initialGPS Mode is NOFIX. Also, the 2D/3D or differential modes willnot be displayed during the NOFIX mode.

The GPS Position Window displays a rich variety of informationabout the GPS satellites, position coordinates, and navigationalinformation.

Some of the display fields have context or tap and hold menus; ifyou tap and hold the field, a menu list will be displayed withalternative information or data formats, to be displayed in theassociated field. In the following example, the position coordinatedisplay field has been tapped and held, using the cursor orstylus, to display the menu of coordinate systems. The currentselection in the tap and hold menu is indicated by a check mark tothe left of the selection—for example, DMS in the followingscreenshot.

PositionCoordinates

Elevation

NavigationInformation

PositionMeasureof Quality

GPS Mode

Satellite Skyplot(toggle display)

Position Coordinates tap and hold menu

USING THE GPS POSITION WINDOW 181

2D/3D

2D indicates that only three satellites are available and are beingused to calculate the x,y position coordinates.

3D indicates that at least four satellites are available and are beingused to calculate the x, y, and z (elevation) position coordinates.

Differential

DGPS indicates that real-time differential correction is being usedto calculate the x, y, and z position coordinates.

RTK fix indicates that a real-time kinematic (RTK) fixed solution isbeing used to calculate the x, y, and z position coordinates.

RTK flt indicates that a real-time kinematic (RTK) float solution isbeing used to calculate the x, y, and z position coordinates.

PPS indicates that a Precise Positioning Service is being used.

Multiple GPS modes can be displayed simultaneously; forexample, the 2D or 3D mode can be displayed simultaneously withthe differential DGPS or PPS modes.

Satellite Skyplot

The Satellite Skyplot shows the almanac of which satellitesshould be visible or available to the GPS receiver. The PRN(PseudoRandom Noise) number and position of each satellite aredisplayed using a color to indicate the availability of the satellite:

Black indicates the satellite is available and used for calculatingthe GPS position.

Blue indicates the satellite is available but not used.

Red indicates the satellite is unavailable.

The Satellite Skyplot view shows a bird’s-eye view of the positionof each satellite according to the satellite almanac. The outercircle represents the horizon (north is up); the inner circlerepresents 45° above the horizon; and the center point representswhat is directly overhead.

The Satellite Skyplot is a toggle field; tapping the skyplotchanges the display to the Signal Chart.

Signal Chart

The Signal Chart shows a horizontal bar chart of the PRNnumbers and relative signal strengths of the satellites in thealmanac. A red bar indicates that the satellite is unavailable.

The Signal Chart is a toggle field; tapping the Chart changes thedisplay to the Compass.

Signal Chart(toggle display)

Satellite Skyplot(toggle display)

182 USING ARCPAD

Compass

The Compass shows the GPS direction with a black arrow and thedirection to the selected destination in red. The GPS directioncorresponds to the COG (Course Over Ground) directiondisplayed in the navigation section of the GPS Position Window,and the direction to the destination corresponds to the BRG(Bearing).

The Compass is a toggle field; tapping the Compass changes thedisplay back to the Satellite Skyplot.

Position Coordinates

Position Coordinates is a tap and hold menu field; tapping andholding on the coordinates display the following menu list ofalternate coordinate systems, or projections, to be used fordisplaying the current GPS position:

Map Projection: the projection of the current map, which may bein latitude–longitude or UTM—or any other projection supportedby ArcPad.

DMS: latitude–longitude in degrees, minutes and decimalseconds (ddd°mm’ss.ss”).

DMM: latitude–longitude in degrees and decimal minutes(ddd°mm.mmmm’).

DD: latitude–longitude in decimal degrees (ddd.ddddddddd°).

Compass(toggle display)

Position Coordinates tap and hold menu


UTM: the current UTM (Universal Transverse Mercator)coordinates and zone.

WGS84 DMS: latitude–longitude in degrees, minutes, and decimalseconds (ddd°mm’ss.ss”), using the WGS84 datum.

WGS84 DMM: latitude–longitude in degrees and decimal minutes(ddd°mm.mmmm’), using the WGS84 datum.

WGS84 DD: latitude–longitude in decimal degrees(ddd.ddddddddd°), using the WGS84 datum.

MGRS: The Military Grid Reference System coordinate.

Elevation

Elevation is a tap and hold menu field; tapping and holding onthe elevation displays the following menu list of altitude or depthunits to show in the elevation field:

Altitude (Meters)

Altitude (Feet)

Depth (Meters)

Depth (Feet)

The depth information is obtained from the standard NMEAmessage $SDDPT which provides the depth below the transducerand the offset of the transducer to the water line. This NMEAmessage is typically output by marine GPS devices such as depthsounders.

Navigation Information

The Navigation Information displays the following information:

SOG: Speed Over Ground, as calculated by the GPS. SOG is theactual speed the GPS receiver is moving over the ground.

COG: Course Over Ground, as calculated by the GPS. COG is thedirection the GPS receiver is moving and corresponds to thedirection of the black Compass arrow.

DST: The distance from the current GPS position to the selecteddestination. The DST is calculated by ArcPad.

Elevation

Elevation tap and hold menu

184 USING ARCPAD

BRG: The bearing from the current GPS position to the selecteddestination. The BRG corresponds to the red destinationdirection on the Compass. The BRG is calculated by ArcPad.

COG is also a tap and hold menu field that provides the option ofdisplaying the COG in one of the following formats:

TCOG: True North Course Over Ground

MCOG: Magnetic North Course Over Ground

Position Measure of Quality

Position Measure of Quality is a tap and hold menu field. Tappingand holding on the Position Measure of Quality displays thefollowing menu list of information to be displayed in the field:

PDOP: Position Dilution of Precision.

DOP: Horizontal Dilution of Precision.

VDOP: Vertical Dilution of Precision.

TDOP: Time Dilution of Precision.

Position Measure of Quality tap and hold menu

COG tap and hold menu


HPE: Estimated Horizontal Position Error.

VPE: Estimated Vertical Position Error.

EPE: Estimated Position Error.

SATS: Satellites used in solution. The number of satellitesused by the GPS receiver to calculate the GPS position.

DAGE: Differential data age. The age, in seconds, of thedifferential signal and correction used by the GPS receiver todifferentially correct the GPS position.

DSID: Differential reference station ID. The ID of thedifferential reference station used by the GPS receiver.

186 USING ARCPAD

Opening andclosing the GPSPosition WindowThe GPS Position Window canonly be opened if the GPS hasbeen activated. The GPSPosition Window can beopened, moved, and closed atany time—as long as the GPSremains active. The GPSPosition Window is automati-cally closed when the GPS isdeactivated.

Opening the GPSPosition Window

1. Tap the GPS Position buttonto open the GPS PositionWindow.

A message box will bedisplayed if the GPS is notactive.

2. Tap Yes to activate the GPSand open the GPS PositionWindow.

Tip

Activating the GPSThe GPS can only be activated ifthere is a projection defined for theArcPad map.

Closing the GPS PositionWindow

1. Tap the X button on the GPSPosition Window, or tap thedepressed GPS Positionbutton on the Main toolbar toclose the GPS PositionWindow.

Tip

GPS Position buttonThe GPS Position button remains depressed as long as theGPS Position Window is open.

Tip

Moving the GPS PositionWindowThe GPS Position Window can bemoved around by tapping andholding the blue title bar.

See Also

Refer to Chapter 9, ‘Connectingyour GPS receiver’, for help onactivating the GPS.

1

2

1


Selecting thepositioncoordinatesystemThe GPS Position Windowdisplays the current GPSposition coordinates in one of anumber of different projectionsor coordinate systems.

The latitude–longitude positionis obtained from the GPSmessages, while the otherprojection coordinates arecalculated by ArcPad.

Tapping and holding thePosition Coordinate lists amenu of coordinate systems tobe used for displaying thecurrent GPS position.


By default, the positioncoordinate display shows theposition in DMS—latitudeand longitude in degrees,minutes and decimalseconds.

2. Tap and hold the positioncoordinate display field todisplay the menu list ofavailable coordinatesystems.

3. Tap the required coordinatesystem to be used fordisplaying the current GPSposition—for example, UTM.

4. The current GPS position willbe displayed using theselected coordinate system.

Tip

GPS Position WindowcoordinatesThe GPS Position Windowcoordinates are for display only;changing the displayed coordinatesystem does not affect the projec-tion of the coordinates used forGPS data capture.

2

3

4

188 USING ARCPAD

Selecting theposition measureof qualityGPS receivers calculate variousmeasures of position quality toquantify the accuracy of theGPS position. Most GPSreceivers only calculate a limitednumber of these quality mea-sures, and not all measures areoutput by the GPS receiver viathe selected GPS protocol—forexample, NMEA. The GPSPosition Window simplydisplays the measure receivedfrom the GPS. N/A indicates thatno value for the correspondingmeasure has been received byArcPad from the GPS.

Dilution of precision (DOP) is ameasure of the receiver–satellitegeometry quality (i.e., thenumber of satellites receivedand where they are relative toeach other) on a scale of one to10. The lowest numbers are thebest quality, and the highestnumbers are the worst quality.DOP is a description of thepurely geometric contribution tothe uncertainty in a position fix.


By default, the positionmeasure of quality shows thecurrent PDOP value (Positiondilution of precision) ifavailable.

2. Tap and hold the positionmeasure of quality field todisplay the menu list ofavailable measures ofquality.

3. Tap the required measure ofquality to be displayed.

4. The selected measure ofquality will be displayed inthe GPS Position Window.

See Also

Refer to your GPS receiver’smanual to determine whichmeasures of quality your GPSreceiver outputs.

2

3

4


Toggling betweenthe Skyplot,Signal Chart, andCompassThe GPS Position Window bydefault displays the GPSSatellite Skyplot.

Tapping the Skyplot changesthe display to a horizontal barchart of the relative satellitesignal strengths.

Tapping the Signal Chartchanges the display to acompass. The compass showsthe direction angle receivedfrom the GPS and the bearing tothe destination, if selected.

The Skyplot, Signal Chart, andCompass direction informationare received from the GPS. Thecompass bearing to thedestination is calculated byArcPad.


2. The Skyplot shows the PRNnumbers and positions of thesatellites that should beavailable based on thealmanac. The color used toshow the satellite indicatesthe availability of the satellite:Black is available and usedfor calculating the GPSposition.Blue is available but notused.Red is unavailable.

3. Tap the Skyplot to display theSignal Chart.

The Signal Chart shows thePRN numbers and relativesignal strengths of thesatellites. A white barindicates sufficient signalstrength, while a red barindicates an insufficientsignal strength.

4. Tap the Signal Chart todisplay the Compass.

The Compass shows theGPS direction with a blackarrow and the direction to theselected destination in red.The GPS direction corre-sponds to the COG displayedon the GPS Position Window,and the direction to thedestination corresponds tothe BRG.

See Also

Refer to Chapter 11, ‘Navigatingwith your GPS’, for help onselecting a destination.

2

3

4

IN THIS CHAPTER

191

Navigating with your GPS 11• Selecting a navigation destination

using the Go To tool

• Selecting a navigation destinationusing the Find tool

• Selecting a navigation destinationusing the Advanced Select tool

• Selecting a navigation destinationusing the Go To Selected Featuretool

• Setting the distance alert

• Displaying the distance andbearing to the destination

• Displaying the bearing on thecompass

• Using the Map Rotation tool

• The GPS Tracklog

• Starting and stopping theGPS Tracklog

ArcPad offers two methods for basic navigation when using a GPSconnected to ArcPad.

First, ArcPad provides navigational information from the current GPSposition to the destination. This information includes the distance and bearingto the destination (calculated by ArcPad) and the speed and course overground, which ArcPad obtains from the GPS receiver.

The term navigation destination is similar to the term waypoint used by theGPS industry, with the exception that waypoints generally refer todestination points, whereas ArcPad navigation destinations can includecoordinates on a map as well as point, line, or polygon features. ArcPadprovides four tools for selecting a navigation destination:

• Go To tool

• Find tool

• Advanced Select tool

• Go To Selected Feature tool

The second basic navigation method that ArcPad provides is a GPSTracklog. A GPS Tracklog is an electronic breadcrumb trail that illustratesthe path you have traveled. The GPS Tracklog can help you backtrack fromyour current GPS position to your starting point.

192 USING ARCPAD

Selecting anavigationdestination usingthe Go To toolThe Go To tool can be used toselect a navigation destination.Simply activate the tool and tapanywhere on the map to selectyour destination.

1. Tap the arrow to the right ofthe Identify button to displaythe dropdown list.

2. Tap Go To. u

Tip

Activating the GPSIt is not necessary to activate theGPS before selecting a navigationdestination. However, the GPSdoes need to be activated in orderto open the GPS Position Windowand view the distance and bearingto the destination.

See Also


1

2

NAVIGATING WITH YOUR GPS 193

3. The Go To button is dis-played on the Browse toolbarand is depressed to indicatethat the tool is active.

4. Tap the map to select anavigation destination.

The destination is displayedwith a Mark label.

5. Use the GPS PositionWindow to view the distance(DST) and bearing (BRG)from your current GPSposition to your selecteddestination.

Tip

Clearing the selecteddestinationTo clear the selected destinationand remove the destination Marklabel, tap the Clear Selected toollocated on the dropdown list to theright of the Find Features button onthe Browse toolbar. The Mark labelis displayed when a destination hasbeen selected.

5

3

4

194 USING ARCPAD

Selecting anavigationdestination usingthe Find toolThe Find tool can be used toselect features from a layerusing a search query. Theresults of the query aredisplayed in a list. The Go Tobutton in the Find dialog boxcan be used to select a featureas the navigation destination.

1. Tap the Find button to openthe Find dialog box.

2. Tap the Select Layers buttonto select the layer andoptional field to search on.

3. Use the Soft Input Panel orkeyboard to type the valuethat you want to search for inthe Find box.

If you leave the Find boxblank, ArcPad will list allfeatures in the selected layer.

4. Tap the Results tab toexecute the search.

A table is displayed listing allof the selected features. u

1

2

3

4


5. Tap the feature that you wantto navigate to.

6. Tap the Go To button to makethe selected feature yourdestination. u

See Also

Refer to Chapter 8, ‘Querying yourdata’, for help on using the Findtool.

5

6

196 USING ARCPAD

7. The selected feature ishighlighted using the currenthighlight color.

The destination is displayedand labeled using the valueof the field that was searchedon. If no field was specified,the label will use the value ofthe first field that has any partof the word ‘name’ in the fieldname.


Tip

Changing the highlightcolorYou can change the highlight colorof a selected feature on the Displaypage of the ArcPad Options dialogbox.

8

7


Selecting anavigationdestination usingthe AdvancedSelect toolThe Advanced Select tool canbe used to select multiplefeatures. Only layers that havebeen activated for the Identifytool will be selected. Layers areactivated for the Identify tool inthe Layers page of the Table ofContents dialog box. Theselected features are displayedin a list. The Go To button inthe Advanced Select dialog boxcan be used to select thecoordinate or feature as thenavigation destination.


2. Tap Advanced Select. u

See Also

Refer to Chapter 8, ‘Querying yourdata’, for more help on using theAdvanced Select tool.

1

2

198 USING ARCPAD

3. The Advanced Select buttonis displayed on the Browsetoolbar and is depressed toindicate that the tool is active.

4. Tap the map to select afeature or tap and drag aselection box to selectmultiple features from theactive layers.

A list is displayed showingthe coordinates and theselected features where themap was tapped. The + iconcan be tapped to display theattributes of the selectedfeature.

5. Tap the feature that you wantto navigate to.

6. Tap the Go To button to makethe selected feature yourdestination. u

Tip

Selecting the coordinatesfor the navigationdestinationThe coordinates displayed at thetop of the Advanced Select list canalso be selected for the navigationdestination. Tap the Coordinateslabel, then tap the Go To button.

5

3

6


7. The destination is displayedand labeled with the samefeature attribute shown in theAdvanced Select list.


7

8

200 USING ARCPAD

Selecting anavigationdestination usingthe Go ToSelected FeaturetoolThe Go To Selected Feature toolcan be used to select a naviga-tion destination by using theSelect tool on the Edit toolbar.Select a feature from an editablelayer and tap the Go ToSelected Feature tool.

1. Tap the drop down arrownext to the Start Editingbutton.

2. Activate a layer for editing, byselecting it from the availablelist.

The Edit toolbar isdisplayed.u

See Also

Refer to Chapter 14, ‘Editingbasics’, for more information onthe editing tools and editingfeatures.

1

2


3. Tap the Select tool on theEdit toolbar.

4. Tap the feature on the mapthat you want to select foryour navigation destination.

The selected feature ishighlighted with a dashedbox, showing the extent ofthe feature. u

Tip

Selecting vertical orhorizontal linesIncrease the Pen Tolerance if youare having difficulty selecting ahorizontal or vertical line feature.The Pen Tolerance can be set in theDisplay page of the ArcPadOptions dialog box.

Tip

Displaying the Edit toolbarThe Edit toolbar is automaticallydisplayed when a layer is checkedfor editing. You can also open theEdit toolbar by using the Toolbarslist, located on the dropdown list tothe right of the Tools button on theMain toolbar.

4

3

202 USING ARCPAD

5. Tap the arrow to the right ofthe Select button to displaythe dropdown list.

6. Tap Go To SelectedFeature. u

6

5


7. The destination is displayedwith a Mark label.


8

7

204 USING ARCPAD

Setting thedistance alertYou can set an alert message—and sound—to be displayedwhen the distance from thecurrent GPS position to theselected destination is less thana specified distance. The alertmessage and sound arespecified in the Alerts page ofthe GPS Preferences dialog box.The distance is specified on theLocation page of the GPSPreferences dialog box.

Setting the alert messageand sound


2. Tap GPS Preferences.

3. In the GPS Preferencesdialog box, tap the rightarrow button until the Alertstab is displayed.

4. Tap the Alerts tab to displaythe Alerts page.

5. Check the Visible check boxfor the ApproachingDestination alert to display amessage box, when the alertis activated.

Check the Sound check boxto play a sound when thealert is activated.

6. If the Visible check box ischecked, the ApproachingDestination message boxwill be displayed when thedistance to the destination isless than the specified alertdistance.

7. Tap OK.

See Also

See the ArcPad Reference Guide onthe GPS Preferences dialog box formore information on alerts andsounds.

Tip

Creating a custom alertmessageYou can create your own Alertmessage by creating a .wav file onyour Windows Mobile device ordesktop PC. To activate it, go to theAlerts page in the GPS Preferencesdialog box.

6

5

3

47

1


Setting distance alert


2. Tap GPS Preferences.

3. In the GPS Preferencesdialog box, tap the rightarrow button until theLocation page is displayed.

4. Tap the Location tab todisplay the Location page.

5. Enter a distance value to beused for the ApproachingDestination alert in the DSTDistance Alert input field.

6. Select the type of units youwould like to use for yourdestination value.

7. Tap OK.

4

3

5

6

7

1

206 USING ARCPAD

Displaying thedistance andbearing to thedestinationThe GPS Position Windowdisplays the distance (DST) andbearing (BRG) from the currentGPS position to the selectednavigation destination.

1. Activate your GPS if you havenot already done so.

2. Select a destination using theGo To, Find, AdvancedSelect, or Go To SelectedFeature tools.

3. Tap the GPS Position Windowbutton to open the GPSPosition Window.

The GPS Position Windowdisplays the distance (DST)and bearing (BRG) from thecurrent GPS position to theselected destination.

See Also


Tip

Changing the distanceunitsThe distance is displayed in theunits specified for the display units.You can change the units on theDisplay page of the ArcPadOptions dialog box.

3


Displaying thebearing on thecompassThe compass in the GPSPosition Window displays theGPS direction, or course overground (COG), with a blackarrow and the direction orbearing from the current GPSposition to the selecteddestination with a red line.

1. Activate your GPS if youhave not already done so.

2. Select a destination usingthe Go To, Find, AdvancedSelect, or Go To SelectedFeature tools.

3. Tap the GPS PositionWindow button to open theGPS Position Window.

4. Tap the GPS PositionWindow Satellite Skyplottwice to toggle to the Com-pass display.

5. The GPS Position Windowdisplays the GPS COG with ablack arrow and the bearingto the selected destinationwith a red line.

3

4

5

208 USING ARCPAD

Activating the AutomaticMap Rotation tool


2. Tap the drop down arrownext to the GPS PositionWindow button.

3. Tap Automatic Map Rotation.

As you begin to travel andchange directions, ArcPadwill automatically redraw themap so that the direction oftravel is always up.

Stopping or clearingautomatic map rotation


2. Tap Automatic Map Rotationto disable the tool.

3. To clear the map rotation andset it back to its originalnorthern orientation, tapClear Rotation, .

Tip

Rotating the maporientationUse the Map Rotate tool toorientate the map without the use ofthe GPS receiver. See Chapter 4,‘ArcPad Basics’, for moreinformation.

Using theAutomatic MapRotation toolBy activating the AutomaticMap Rotation tool, ArcPad willreorientate the map based onthe direction of travel. With theAutomatic Map Rotation toolactive, ArcPad redraws the mapas you move and change yourorientation so that the directionof travel is always up. The GPSmust be active to use this tool.

1

2

3


The GPS Tracklog

The GPS Tracklog in ArcPad is stored in a shapefile format. TheGPS Tracklog can be started or activated when the GPS is active.ArcPad automatically records each GPS position it receives as apoint feature in the GPS Tracklog shapefile, as long as the GPSTracklog is running and the GPS is active. The GPS Tracklog is anelectronic breadcrumb trail that shows the path that you havetraveled. ArcPad uniquely displays these GPS positions, orpoints, in the tracklog as a red line.

The GPS Tracklog points are always captured in latitude andlongitude degrees using the WGS84 datum. ArcPad automaticallyprojects the tracklog points using the projection of the currentArcPad map when displaying the tracklog. Although ArcPadtreats the GPS Tracklog point shapefile in a unique way, thetracklog is still a standard PointZM shapefile that can be used inthe same way as other PointZM shapefiles. The Tracklogshapefile can be added to an ArcPad map by using the AddLayer(s) dialog box.

The Add Layer(s) dialog boxThe GPS Tracklog

210 USING ARCPAD

When adding the tracklog shapefile with the Add Layer tool,ArcPad treats the shapefile as a standard point shapefile. ArcPaddisplays the points as points and does not perform on-the-flyprojection of the tracklog’s point data—which is in latitude andlongitude degrees using the WGS84 datum.

For each point in the tracklog shapefile, ArcPad captures an x, y,and z coordinate with a user-specified m value. ArcPad alsocaptures a variety of information received from the GPS receiverand stores this information in the attributes associated with thepoint. These attributes can be viewed by using the Add Layer

tool to add the tracklog shapefile to an ArcPad map and then byusing the Identify tool to display the selected point’s attributes.

The GPS information captured for each point in the tracklog, andthe associated field, is as follows:

LATITUDE: Latitude in the datum of the GPS receiver

LONGITUDE: Longitude in the datum of the GPS receiver

ALTITUDE: Altitude in the datum of the GPS receiver (in meters)

EASTING: UTM easting

The GPS Tracklog shapefile displayed as points

The feature attributes for the GPS Tracklog


NORTHING: UTM northing

UTCDATE: UTC date

UTCTIME: UTC time

SOG: Speed over ground (in km/h)

COG_TRUE: True Course Over Ground (in decimal degrees)

COG_MAG: Magnetic Course Over Ground (in decimal degrees)

SATS_USED: Number of satellites used

HPE: Horizontal position error (in meters) (only when using aGarmin GPS receiver)

VPE: Vertical position error (in meters) (only when using a GarminGPS receiver)

EPE: Estimated position error (in meters) (only when using aGarmin GPS receiver)

HDOP: Horizontal Dilution of Precision

VDOP: Vertical Dilution of Precision

PDOP: Position Dilution of Precision

QUALITY: GPS fix quality, where:0 represents no fix.1 represents GPS or SPS (Standard Positioning Service) fix.2 represents DGPS (Differential GPS) fix.3 represents PPS (Precise Positioning Service) fix.

DIFF_AGE: Age of DGPS fix (in seconds)

DIFF_ID: ID of DGPS station used

DEPTH : Depth (in meters)

DEPTH_OFF: Depth offset (in meters)

WATERTEMP: Water temperature (in degrees Celsius)

The size of the GPS Tracklog shapefile’s dBASE® table can getfairly large if the Tracklog is active for a long period of time. Youcan reduce the size by deleting fields from the tracklog shapefile’sdBASE (*.dbf) table. You can use ArcGIS Desktop (ArcView,ArcEditor, or ArcInfo) to delete fields in the shapefile’s dBASEtable.

The x, y, and z coordinates, together with the m value, can beviewed by using the Geography tab of the point feature’sproperties.

The tracklog point feature’s x, y, and z coordinates and m value

212 USING ARCPAD

The GPS Tracklog points can be captured simultaneously whileusing the incoming GPS positions to capture other point, line, orpolygon features. Consequently, the GPS Tracklog capturespoints independently from the ArcPad editing tools.

The GPS Tracklog layer is always displayed as the first layer onthe Layers page of the Table of Contents.

The GPS Tracklog layer can be displayed, or made visible,whether the GPS is active or not. The GPS Tracklog has its own

The GPS Tracklog’s layer properties

set of unique properties, which can be displayed by using theLayer Properties button in the Table of Contents.

Using these properties you can:

• Change the name and location of the Tracklog shapefile.

• View the number of GPS positions or points in the tracklog.

• Clear or delete all of the points in the tracklog.

The Layers page of the Table of Contents


• Specify the interval to be used by ArcPad when recording theGPS positions in the tracklog. An interval of 2, for example,means that ArcPad will only use every second incoming GPSposition to record a tracklog point.

• Specify whether or not ArcPad must use the GPS Quality ruleswhen capturing points in the Tracklog. The GPS Quality rulesare specified on the Quality page of the GPS Preferencesdialog box.

• Select which GPS information ArcPad must use to store in thetracklog point’s measure value. Available options are PDOP,HDOP, VDOP, TDOP, EPE, HPE, VPE, TIME, DEPTH, and SOG.

Any changes to the tracklog properties only take effect the nexttime the tracklog is started. Changes do not take effect if thetracklog is currently running.

214 USING ARCPAD

Starting andstopping the GPSTracklogThe GPS Tracklog is started andstopped by tapping the GPSTracklog tool from the GPStools dropdown list. Startingthe GPS Tracklog automaticallysets the tracklog layer’s displaystatus to visible.

GPS positions are automaticallysaved as points in the GPSTracklog point shapefile,according to the intervalspecified in the GPS Tracklog’slayer properties.

Starting the GPSTracklog



3. Tap GPS Tracklog to startcapturing the tracklog.

The GPS Tracklog layerdisplay status isautomatically changed tovisible when the GPSTracklog is started. u

Tip

Disabled or grayed-out GPSTracklog toolThe GPS Tracklog tool, in the GPStools dropdown list, will bedisabled or unavailable if the GPSis not active. The GPS Tracklogbutton is enabled when the GPS isactivated.

Tip

Starting a new GPSTracklogUse the Clear button in the GPSTracklog’s layer properties todelete any previous tracklog pointsor to start a new tracklog shapefile.You can also type a new filename tocapture a new GPS Tracklog.

2

3


Stopping the GPSTracklog


2. Tap GPS Tracklog to stopcapturing the tracklog points.

New GPS Tracklog positionsare captured in the Tracklogshapefile and added to anyprevious points that mayexist.

The tracklog positions arecaptured as a point shapefile;however, ArcPad displaysthe tracklog points as a redline.

Tip

Deactivating the GPS whilethe GPS Tracklog is runningDeactivating the GPS while theGPS Tracklog is running willautomatically stop the GPSTracklog.

The GPSTracklog

IN THIS CHAPTER

217

Using your rangefinder 12• Introduction to rangefinders

• Supported rangefinder protocols

• Connecting your rangefinder

• Setting communication parameters

• Activating your rangefinder

• The GPS/Rangefinder Debug tool

This chapter begins with an introduction to rangefinders and describes howto connect your rangefinder to ArcPad. This chapter also discusses whichrangefinder protocols are supported by ArcPad and how to use the GPS/Rangefinder Debug tool to verify or troubleshoot your rangefinderconnection.

218 USING ARCPAD

Introduction to rangefinders

Rangefinders are devices which, at a minimum, measure distancefrom a rangefinder, or observer, to a target. There are a variety ofrangefinders available for different purposes, includingrangefinders for measuring distances for construction, golf shots,speeding vehicles, and GIS data collection. Rangefinders are alsoknown as laser rangefinders, distancemeters, and laser locators.In ArcPad, the term ‘rangefinder’ will be used for ease ofcommunication.

In addition to different terms used for rangefinders there are alsodifferent terms used for the measurements made by rangefinders.Distance is also referred to as range, and can also be moreaccurately described as horizontal distance, slope distance, orvertical distance. Bearing is also referred to as azimuth or angle.Bearing can be relative to Magnetic north or True north.Inclination is also often referred to as pitch.In ArcPad, we will use the terms distance, bearing, andinclination.

Rangefinders are typically used for GIS data collection for thefollowing situations:

• When mapping the location of an object which is inaccessible,either because it is difficult to get to or it is not safe to get tothe object. For example, a tree on an island, or a manhole inthe middle of a busy road.

• When mapping the location of an object where it is notpossible to get a GPS signal, or a GPS position of sufficientaccuracy. For example, under a large tree or in a narrow streetor ‘urban canyon’.

Rangefinders designed for GIS data collection typically measuredistance and inclination, while more expensive rangefinders alsomeasure bearing. With ArcPad, you can use a rangefinder whichonly measures distance, or which measures a combination ofdistance plus inclination and/or bearing. You can also use a

‘rangefinder’ which only measures bearing—also known as acompass!

Rangefinders are used to take measurements that are then used tocalculate the offset of the target relative to one or two knownreference points. The offset is used to calculate the location, orcoordinates, of the target based on the coordinates of therangefinder or observer. Inclination is used to calculate thevertical distance, or elevation difference, between the observerand the target. The vertical distance can then used to calculatethe Z-coordinate of the target—based on the Z-coordinate of theobserver’s reference point.

The easiest rangefinders to use for GIS data collection are thosethat measure distance and bearing. In this case only a singledistance plus bearing measurement is needed to compute thelocation of the target. Inclination is also needed if the Z-coordinate of the target is to be calculated. This is referred to as adistance-bearing offset measurement. However, rangefinderswhich measure both distance and bearing tend to be moreexpensive than rangefinders which only measure distance (and,optionally, inclination).

Rangefinders which only measure distance or only measurebearing can also be used to map the offset location of an object.In this case, two distance (or bearing) measurements are neededto compute the location of the target, from two known referencepoints to the target. This is referred to as a distance-distance (orbearing-bearing) offset measurement.

Rangefinder accuracy

Although rangefinders report measurements to at least onedecimal place it is important to understand that there is someamount of error inherent in these measurements. A number offactors contribute to this error, including the quality of therangefinder, the distance to the target, stability of the rangefinder

USING YOUR RANGEFINDER 219

when taking the measurement, magnetic interference,charactersitics of the target, poor weather, and daytime solarconditions. Some rangefinders have options to minimize error,such as a poor weather setting to minimize the impact of rain,snow, smoke, or airborne dust particles. The best approach tominimizing errors, however, is to be aware of the above factors,and to select a rangefinder that is appropriate for your applicationneeds.

The three most important factors for introducing error are:

1. The quality of the rangefinder: The quality of the rangefinderis directly proportional to the cost of the rangefinder. Moreexpensive rangefinders use better quality components and asa result provide more accurate measurements at greaterdistances. Less expensive rangefinders provide less accuratemeasurements, and are only suitable for measuring shorterdistances.

2. The distance to the target: The measurement error increasesas the distance from the observer to the target increases. Forexample, a compass error of 1 degree for a bearingmeasurement results in a horizontal error of 1.75 feet at adistance of 100 feet, and 8.73 feet at a distance of 500 feet.

3. The pointing stability: To achieve maximum accuracy, it isrecommended that you use a rangepole, monopole, or tripodto stabilize the rangefinder—especially when measuring largedistances. It can sometimes be difficult to target small objectsat large distances when holding the rangefinder in your handwithout any stabilizing support.

Working with rangefinders

Rangefinder measurements are used by ArcPad in the Point/Vertex dialog box to calculate the coordinates of the target object.Rangefinders output distance and angle (bearing or inclination)measurements using different units. When ArcPad receives data

from the rangefinder, it converts all distance measurements tometers, and all angle measurements to degrees. ArcPad thendisplays the distance measurements using the units of the currentmap projection, or the display units for Geographic projections.The rangefinder protocol and communications parameters are setin the Rangefinder Preferences dialog box.

When ArcPad receives data from the connected and activatedrangefinder, a sound is played to notify the user. ArcPad alsoautomatically opens and populates the Point/Vertex dialog box ifthe point, polyline, or polygon tools are active and thecorresponding Offset Point, Linear Traverse, or Radial Traversemodes are enabled.

The Point/Vertex dialog box with the 2 Point Offset page active

220 USING ARCPAD

The 2 Point Offset page of the Point/Vertex dialog box isautomatically displayed and populated if Reference points A andB have been specified. The first measurements from therangefinder will be used to fill in the measurement fields forReference point A. The next set of measurements received fromthe rangefinder will be used to fill in the measurement fields forReference point B. At any time you can edit the measurements inthe fields in the Point/Vertex dialog box. Tap OK when you aresatisfied with the measurements and are ready to use them tocreate a point or vertex.


Supported rangefinder protocols

ArcPad supports rangefinder protocols rather than specificrangefinders. In practice, however, most rangefinders useproprietary protocols that are not supported by other vendors’rangefinders. Consequently, many of the rangefinder protocolssupported by ArcPad are often used by a single vendor’srangefinders.

ArcPad supports the following rangefinder protocols:

• Laser Atlanta $LA1KA (original)

• Laser Atlanta $LA1KD (extended)

• Laser Atlanta $LA1KC (CMT, Corvallis MicroTechnology)

• LaserCraft Contour $PLCI

• Laser Technology Criterion 400 format ($PLTIT)

• Leica DISTO interface protocol

• Leica Vector/Laser Locator data transfer format

• Measurement Devices Ltd. $PMDLA

Any rangefinder that outputs any of the above protocols shouldwork with ArcPad, as long as the rangefinder is correctlyconfigured and properly connected to the device being used withArcPad.

ESRI does not publish a list of supported rangefinders forArcPad. ArcPad supports the above listed rangefinder protocolsrather than specific rangefinders.

222 USING ARCPAD

Connecting your rangefinder

Connecting your rangefinder to ArcPad is a simple process thatinvolves the following steps:

1. Determine what cables, adapters, and gender changers, if any,are needed to connect your rangefinder to the mobile devicebeing used to run ArcPad.

2. Connect the rangefinder to the mobile device.

3. Configure the rangefinder.

4. Set the Rangefinder Preferences in ArcPad.

There is no standard method for connecting a rangefinder toArcPad since most rangefinders have unique configurations. Byusing this section and the documentation for your rangefinderand mobile device, it is fairly easy to successfully connect yourrangefinder to ArcPad.

Determining what items are needed

In general, you will need one or more of the following items toconnect your rangefinder to the mobile device being used to runArcPad:

• A serial cable to connect to the rangefinder

• A serial cable to connect to the mobile device

• A male-to-male gender changer

• A null modem adapter

You will not need any of the above items if you are connectingyour rangefinder to your mobile device via Bluetooth.

Many rangefinders and mobile devices have unique fittings fortheir serial ports and require their own proprietary serial cables.This is particularly true for Windows Mobile devices. Not allrangefinders, however, require all of the above items to connectto the mobile device.

Many serial cables that connect to the rangefinder on one end aredesigned to connect directly to a PC serial port on the other endusing a standard DB9 serial connector. This is not true whenconnecting to many Windows Mobile devices since thesedevices usually have nonstandard, proprietary serial ports.Consequently, a proprietary serial cable is usually required whenconnecting a rangefinder to a Windows Mobile device. Thisdependency on proprietary serial cables makes Bluetooth anattractive option for connecting serial devices, includingrangefinders, to Windows Mobile devices—although not allWindows Mobile devices support Bluetooth.

Most rangefinder serial cables and Windows Mobile deviceproprietary serial cables have 9-pin DB9 female connectors on theends that need to be connected together. Consequently, a 9-pinmale-to-male gender changer is required to connect the twofemale serial cables. Finally, a null modem adapter or cable isusually needed when connecting a rangefinder to a WindowsMobile, using the device’s sync cable.

Connecting your rangefinder

Using the information in the preceding discussion you shouldnow be able to determine which cables, null modem adapters, andgender changers you will need to connect your rangefinder to thedevice that is running ArcPad. Assemble and connect therequired items before moving to the next step of configuring yourrangefinder. No assembly of cables and adapters is needed if youare using Bluetooth! Also, make sure that the batteries on yourrangefinder are fully charged!

Configuring your rangefinder

You need to configure your rangefinder to output data in aprotocol supported by ArcPad. You also need to verify thecommunication parameters that your rangefinder is configured


for, specifically the baud rate, parity, data bits, and stop bits. Youwill need this information for the next step of setting theRangefinder Preferences in ArcPad.

If you are using Bluetooth, you will need to use the BluetoothManager on your mobile device to discovery the rangefinder, andpossibly to pair your rangefinder with your mobile device.Consult the documentation for your rangefinder and mobiledevice for more information on connecting via Bluetooth.

Setting the Rangefinder Preferences in ArcPad

In order to activate your rangefinder, you first need to set therangefinder communication parameters in ArcPad to match theparameters on your rangefinder. The rangefinder protocol andcommunication parameters are set in the Rangefinder Preferencesdialog box.

The task later in this chapter describes how to set thecommunication parameters in ArcPad.

224 USING ARCPAD

SettingcommunicationparametersIn order to activate yourrangefinder, you first need toset the rangefinder communica-tion parameters in ArcPad tomatch the parameters on yourrangefinder. The communicationparameters are set in theRangefinder Preferences dialogbox.

1. Tap the arrow to the right ofthe GPS Position Windowbutton, on the Main toolbar, todisplay the dropdown list.

2. Tap the Rangefinder Prefer-ences tool to open theRangefinder Preferencesdialog box.

3. Tap the Protocol dropdownarrow to select the protocolused by your rangefinder tooutput data.

4. Tap the Port dropdown arrowto select the serial port onyour mobile device, which isconnected to yourrangefinder.

5. Tap the Baud dropdownarrow to select the baud rateof your rangefinder’s output.

34

5

See Also

Refer to Chapter 4 of the ArcPadReference Guide for moreinformation on the fields in theRangefinder dialog box.

See Also

Refer to Chapter 9, ‘Connectingyour GPS receiver’, for informa-tion on how to set the advancedSerial Port Parameters.

Tip

Setting advanced serialport parametersYou can tap the Serial PortParameters button, ,to open the

Serial Port Parameters dialog boxin order to set advanced portparameters.


Activating yourrangefinderIn order to activate yourrangefinder in ArcPad, you firstneed to ensure that therangefinder is correctly con-nected to your mobile deviceand that the rangefinderprotocol and communicationparameters in ArcPad match thesettings on the rangefinder. Youalso need to turn yourrangefinder on before activatingit in ArcPad.

1. Configure your rangefinderto output data using one ofthe rangefinder protocolssupported by ArcPad.

2. Connect your rangefinder toyour mobile device using theappropriate cables, nullmodem adapters, andgender changers, orBluetooth communicationsettings.

3. Set the rangefinder protocoland communication param-eters in the RangefinderPreferences dialog box tomatch the settings on therangefinder.


5. Tap Rangefinder Active.

The Rangefinder Active iconis highlighted with a red boxwhen the rangefinder isactive.

Tip

Deactivating yourrangefinderIf the rangefinder is activated, youcan deactivate it by tappingRangefinder Active.

4

5

226 USING ARCPAD

The GPS/Rangefinder Debug tool

GPS/Rangefinder Debug is a useful tool for troubleshooting GPSand rangefinder connection problems. The GPS/RangefinderDebug tool is opened by tapping the arrow to the right of theGPS Position Window button and then tapping GPS/RangefinderDebug. The GPS/Rangefinder Debug tool is only opened when aGPS or rangefinder is currently active.

The GPS/Rangefinder Debug tool opens a window that displaysdata from either the GPS receiver or rangefinder, or both. ValidGPS or rangefinder data is displayed in green text, and valid GPSor rangefinder data is displayed in blue text. Invalid data isdisplayed in red text. Valid data is data that is constructed

properly, in accordance with the selected GPS or rangefinderprotocol, and has a valid checksum.

Chapter 9, ‘Connecting your GPS receiver’, includes a section onusing the GPS/Rangefinder Debug tool for troubleshooting yourGPS connection. This section will focus on using the tool fortroubleshooting your rangefinder connection.

The GPS/Rangefinder Debug window with NMEA0183 GPS and rangefinder data

The GPS/RangefinderDebug tool


ArcPad uses the settings for the rangefinder Protocol and portcommunication parameters to parse, or interpret, the rangefinderdata being received on the specified serial port of your device.ArcPad then displays information in the GPS/Rangefinder Debugwindow that indicates the status of the rangefinder connection.

No information displayed in the GPS/RangefinderDebug window

Irrespective of which rangefinder protocol is being used, the firstobservation to make when opening the GPS/Rangefinder Debugwindow is whether any information is being displayed at all. Noinformation displayed in the GPS/Rangefinder Debug windowindicates a rangefinder connection or configuration problem.Problems are caused by any one of the following factors:

• Your rangefinder is not turned on or has not been configuredto output data in the protocol specified in the RangefinderPreferences.

• The cable connection between your rangefinder and thedevice running ArcPad may be incorrect. Add a null modemadapter if you are not using one, or remove the null modemadapter if you are using one.

• The rangefinder port communication parameters selected inthe Rangefinder Preferences dialog box do not match theserial communication parameters set on your rangefinder. Forexample, your rangefinder may be set to output at a baud rateof 4800, while a baud rate of 9600 has been selected for therangefinder port settings in ArcPad.

• If using Bluetooth, your Bluetooth connection to yourrangefinder is not defined correctly. Make sure that you canconnect to your rangefinder from the Bluetooth Manager onyour mobile device.

Test each of these factors one by one to isolate the problem anddetermine why no information is being displayed in the GPS/Rangefinder Debug window.

Illegible information displayed in the GPS/Rangefinder Debug window

In some instances, you may see illegible characters displayed inthe GPS/Rangefinder Debug window. This is usually caused byrangefinder port communication parameters selected in theRangefinder Preferences dialog box that do not match the serialcommunication parameters set on your rangefinder.

Rangefinder Debug information

Most rangefinders output data as ASCII text. Some rangefindersoutput data using the NMEA 0183 protocol, which is also anASCII based protocol. In either case, you should see the datafrom the rangefinder displayed in the GPS/Rangefinder Debugwindow as ASCII text. Each data string or NMEA sentence thatArcPad reads from the serial port is displayed in the GPS/Rangefinder Debug window. Valid rangefinder data is displayedusing blue text, and invalid rangefinder data is displayed usingred text.

The displayed data can be used to troubleshoot your rangefinderconnection. In the example on the previous page, a number ofNMEA 0183 sentences from a GPS and a LaserCraft Contour XLRrangefinder are displayed. For instance, the rangefinder $PLCIsentence is displayed in blue text as:

$PLCI,,,250.0,D,M,057.4,D,,,,,,,,, *5A

Using the documentation for the LaserCraft Contour XLR, we candetermine that the bearing is 250.0 degrees, and the inclination, orpitch, is 057.4 degrees. The fields for distance, or range, are empty

228 USING ARCPAD

indicating a possible problem with the measurement taken withthe rangefinder. In this case, the distance fields are emptybecause the target was within the minimum range.

Studying the rangefinder data displayed in the GPS/RangefinderDebug window can help to explain why information is notdisplayed in the Offset dialog box when using a rangefinder.

IN THIS CHAPTER

229

Using your digital camera 13• Supported digital cameras

• Setting camera options

• Taking a photo

• Creating a photo layer

This chapter begins with a discussion of supported cameras, and how thesecameras can be used with ArcPad. This chapter also discusses how to setvarious camera options in ArcPad, and how to take a photo with the digitalcamera connected to your mobile device. Finally, this chapter describes howyou can view georeferenced digital photos as a Photo Layer within ArcPad.

Ch13.pmd 11/16/2005, 11:04 AM229

230 USING ARCPAD

Supported digital cameras

ArcPad supports digital cameras at two levels:

1. Georeferenced photos can be displayed as a photo layer.

2. ArcPad provides a Camera tool which can be used to capturephotos with a camera which is connected to your mobiledevice.

Digital photos which have GPS coordinates embedded in theEXIF header of the image can be displayed on the ArcPad map asa photo layer. These georeferenced photos can be created withany camera which can interface with a GPS, such as the RicohCaplio Pro G3 camera. There are also software tools availablewhich can insert GPS coordinates into the EXIF header. This istypically done by matching the time and date of the photo withthe time and date of positions captured by a GPS. When creatinga photo layer, ArcPad reads the GPS coordinates in the EXIFheader, and automatically projects the latitude and longitudecoordinates into the projection of the current ArcPad map. Formore information on the EXIF header of digital photo image files,visit www.exif.org.

ArcPad includes “drivers” for cameras which are connecteddirectly to a mobile device. “Connected” cameras include camerasthat are integrated in mobile devices such as the HP iPAQWindows Mobile devices, and cameras that are connected via theUSB port on a mobile device.ArcPad 7.0 includes drivers for the following connected digitalcameras:

• Cameras integrated into some of the HP® iPAQ® WindowsMobile device models. These include the HP iPAQ rx3700®

and hx6300® series devices.

• On PCs, ArcPad includes a driver for cameras which interfacevia the standard Windows Multimedia API (MCI). Thesecameras usually connect to the PC via a USB cable, andtypically include PCcam and Webcam cameras which are

capable of taking still photos—although some standarddigital cameras can also operate as a Webcam. There are anumber of Webcam cameras available from various vendors.Creative Labs and Logitech® are two of the more well-knownvendors of Webcams.

• Cameras integrated into Windows Mobile 5 devices and usethe standard Windows Mobile 5 camera API.

Support for additional connected cameras can be provided viacustom camera modules.

The Camera tool in ArcPad is used to take a photo with aconnected camera. The camera tool is located in two places inArcPad: on the Tools dropdown menu, and on the Picture page ofthe Feature Properties dialog box. When taking a photo with theCamera tool, ArcPad verifies if you have a GPS active and a validGPS position. If there is a valid GPS position then ArcPad willinsert the GPS coordinates into the EXIF header of the resultantphoto image file. These “georeferenced” photos can then beviewed as a photo layer in ArcPad. Whether or not a photo isgeoreferenced, photos that are associated with a feature can beviewed via the Picture page of the Feature Properties dialog boxor by using the Hyperlink tool.

CONNECTING YOUR DIGITAL CAMERA 231

Setting cameraoptionsIn order to use a digital camerawith ArcPad, you must firstselect the appropriate driver forthe camera. The dropdown liston the Camera page in theArcPad Options dialog box onlydisplays supported cameras foryour mobile device.

You can also set the followingcamera options:

• Default path for standalonephotos captured with thecamera tool.

• Prefix, and date/time suffix,for the output image filewhen using the Camera toolto capture photos that arenot associated with afeature.

• Picture quality for theoutput JPEG photo files. Theslider ranges from a qualityof 50% to 100%. Higherpicture quality settings useless compression for theoutput JPEG photo file. u

1. On the Main toolbar, tap theTools button to open theArcPad Options dialog box.

2. Navigate through the tabsand tap the Camera tab.

3. Tap the Camera dropdownarrow to select the driver forthe camera connected toyour mobile device.

4. Optionally enter a prefix forArcPad to use for naming theimage files created with yourdigital camera.

5. Optionally set the picturequality for the output JPEGphoto files.

6. Optionally check the Date/time in filename checkbox forArcPad to use a date andtime suffix for naming theimage files created with yourdigital camera.

7. Tap OK.

See Also

Refer to Chapter 3 of the ArcPadReference Guide for moreinformation on the fields in theCamera dialog box.

2

3

7

4

5

6

Ch13.pmd 11/16/2005, 11:04 AM231

232 USING ARCPAD

• Hardware button to launchthe camera tool. This buttonis specific for each device.

The hardware button labels andassignments vary acrossdevices. On Windows Mobiledevices, you can view andchange the button labels andassignments by tappingSettings, Personal, and thenButtons.


Taking a photoIn ArcPad, there are twomethods to take a photo withthe digital camera connected toyour mobile device:

1. By using the Camera toollocated on the Toolsdropdown menu, on theMain toolbar. This Cameratool is used to take a standalone photo, that is a photowhich is not associated witha feature.

2. By using the Camera toollocated on the Picture pageof the Feature Propertiesdialog box. This Camera toolis used to take a photowhich is associated with afeature. The photo filenameis stored as an attribute inthe selected field of thefeature.

When activated, both of theCamera tools open the samedialog box for interacting withyour digital camera and fortaking the photos.The cameradialog box will vary accordingto the camera driver selected inthe ArcPad Options.

Taking a standalonephoto

1. On the Main toolbar, tap theTools dropdown menu.

2. Tap the Camera icon to openthe camera tool.

You can also use the hard-ware button, specified in theCamera page of the ArcPadOptions, to launch theCamera tool.

Proceed to ‘Taking a photowith the camera tool’.

1

2

Ch13.pmd 11/16/2005, 11:05 AM233

234 USING ARCPAD

Taking a photoassociated with a feature

1. Open the Feature Propertiesdialog box for the feature thatyou want to associate thephoto with.

The Feature Propertiesdialog box is automaticallydisplayed after a new featureis created. To display theFeature Properties dialogbox for an existing feature,use the Select tool to selectthe feature and tap theFeature Properties button onthe Edit toolbar.

2. Navigate through the tabsand tap the Picture tab.

3. Tap the Field dropdown list toselect the field to be used forstoring the filename of thephoto to be taken. Theselected field name will beused as the prefix for thephoto’s filename.You can use the folder buttonto select an existing photo onyour device to associate withthe feature. Once a photo hasbeen captured, you can usethe rotate left or rotate rightbuttons to change theorientation of the photo.

4. Tap the Camera icon to openthe camera tool.

Proceed to the following taskdescribing how to use thecamera tool.

See Also

Refer to Chapter 3 of the ArcPadReference Guide for moreinformation on the fields in theCamera dialog box.

Tip

The Picture page ismissingIf you are using a custom form,your Feature Properties dialog boxmay not show the Picture page.Custom input forms can optionallyhide the default pages of the TheFeature Properties dialog box,including the Picture page.

32

4

Tip

Creating field names forphoto filenamesArcPad automatically populates theField dropdown list with fieldnames which appear to be suitablefor storing photo filenames. To dothis, ArcPad looks for any textfield—in the shapefile’s dBase®

table—which has a name thatcontains the words “photo”,“image”, or “picture”. The textfield also needs to have a minimumlength of 20 characters.


Taking a photo with thecamera tool

1. Tap the available cameratools to set any options forthe camera and resultantphotos.

The green arrow in the photopreview window indicatesthe orientation of the outputphoto.

2. Tap the Camera icon to takethe photo.

On some Windows Mobiledevices, you can also pressassigned hardware buttonsto take the photo.

Tip

My camera tool looksdifferent to the camera toolshownThe tools available in the cameratool are dependent on the cameradriver selected, as well as thecapabilities of the camera con-nected to your mobile device.

For example, the camera toolshown for this task is for the HPcamera integrated in some modelsof HP iPAQ Windows Mobiledevices. The greyed out toolsindicate that this particular cameradoes not support these tools oroptions.

Tip

Specifying photo filenamesFor standalone photos, the photofilename will use the prefixspecified in the Camera page of theArcPad options. The photofilename will also include a uniquenumber, or if specified in theArcPad Options, the date and timeat which the photo was taken.

For photos associated with afeature, the photo filename will usethe selected field name in thePicture page of the FeatureProperties dialog box. The photofilename will also include a uniquenumber, or if specified in theArcPad Options, the date and timeat which the photo was taken.

1 2

Ch13.pmd 11/16/2005, 11:05 AM235

236 USING ARCPAD

Creating a photolayerArcPad supports photo layers.A photo layer is a file thatcontains photos with GPScoordinates in the EXIF headerof each photo file. The photolayer file, which has an .APHextension, specifies how thephoto layer should be dis-played in ArcPad.

To create a new photo layer youuse the Photo Layer tool in theNew sub-menu. Once a photolayer has been created it can beadded to the ArcPad map in thesame way that other layers areadded. u

1. On the Main toolbar, tap theOpen Map dropdown menu.

2. Tap New to open the Newsub-menu.

3. Tap Photo Layer.

The Save As dialog box willbe displayed.

4. Enter the name for your newphoto layer in the Nameinput field.

5. Tap the Folder dropdown listto select the folder on yourdevice which contains thephotos for your photo layer.

6. Tap OK when you haveentered all the necessaryinformation. u

See Also

Visit www.exif.org for moreinformation on EXIF, the Exchange-able Image File Format.

Tip

Changing the symbol andlabel settings for the photolayerA photo layer is an XML file, withan .APH extension, that can beedited with a text editor. You canspecify the symbol used to displaythe location of the photos by editingthe .APH file. You can also specifywhether or not the symbol islabeled with the photo filename.

1

2

3

4

5

6


The new photo layer will beadded and displayed on themap. By default, a camerasymbol is used for eachphoto position, and islabeled with the photo filename.

Optionally use the Identifytool to select a photo andview the photo’s attributes inthe Feature Informationdialog box.

The Identify and Hyperlinktools can be used with thephoto layer.

The Identify tool displays thephoto’s attributes, or EXIFinformation, in the FeatureInformation dialog box.

The Hyperlink tool displays thephoto, using the externalapplication associated withJPEG files.

Ch13.pmd 11/16/2005, 11:06 AM237

Section 5

Editing data

IN THIS CHAPTER

241

Editing basics 14• An overview of the editing process

• Editing with a GPS

• The Edit toolbar

• The Command bar

• Creating new shapefiles for editing

• Creating a QuickForm

• Displaying the Edit toolbar

• Selecting a layer for editing

• Selecting features for editing

• Setting snapping options

• Moving features

• Undoing and canceling edits

• Deleting features

In addition to displaying and querying spatial data, ArcPad allows you tocreate and edit spatial data using input from either the mouse pointer, pen,global positioning system (GPS), or rangefinder.

This chapter provides an introduction on how to edit in ArcPad and describesthe basic tasks you need to know before you can start to create and editspatial data. This chapter includes information on basic editing tasks, such asdisplaying the Edit toolbar and Command bar; creating new layers; andselecting, moving, and deleting features.

242 USING ARCPAD

An overview of the editing process

The following is a general overview of how to use ArcPad, theEdit toolbar, and the Command bar to edit your data. Each of thefollowing steps is outlined in detail in this chapter or otherchapters in this section:

1. Start ArcPad.

2. Create a new map, browse for data, or open an existing map.

3. Add data to your map.

4. Select the shapefile layers that you want to edit. You can onlyselect one layer of each shapefile type (point, line, orpolygon) for editing at a time. Alternatively, the Graphics layercan be selected for editing. The dropdown menu next to theStart/Stop Editing tool displays the layers that are availablefor editing.

Table of Contents

Layersselectedforediting

Start/StopEditing tool

Add LayersOpen Map

EDITING BASICS 243

5. Display the Edit toolbar and the Command bar.

If the Edit toolbar and Command bar are not already visible, theywill automatically be displayed when a layer is selected forediting. The buttons on the Edit toolbar and the Command barwill only be enabled if a layer has been selected for editing. TheGPS buttons will only be enabled if the GPS has been activated.

6. Select the feature that you want to edit or select a feature typeto create a new feature.

The GPS buttons will only be enabled if the GPS has beenactivated and the selected feature type is point, polyline, orpolygon. You can activate the GPS whenever you want to use theGPS coordinates for creating or modifying features.

7. Create or modify features and their attributes.

8. Commit geometry changes or undo changes made to a feature.

The Command bar is also displayed at the bottom of the screenwhen a layer is selected for editing. Once a change has beenmade, it enables you to commit geometry changes, captureattribute information for a new feature, and undo and cancel editsto a recently edited feature.

There is no need to save your edits; all edits are made directly onthe original or source shapefile. Once you have commited yourchanges, there is no undo function. Your edits have been made.Prior to committing your changes, you can still undo changesstep by step with the Undo tool or all at once with the CancelChanges tool.

Select

Selectedfeature

Edittoolbar

Commandbar

Commitchanges

Cancelchanges

244 USING ARCPAD

Editing using a GPS

Editing in ArcPad with a GPS is very similar to editing with themouse pointer, pen, or stylus; the main difference is that the GPSis the source of coordinates instead of the mouse pointer. Usingthe incoming GPS coordinates, you can capture point, polyline,and polygon features. You can also move existing points andvertices to the current GPS position.

There are, however, some differences when using the GPScoordinates to capture and edit with ArcPad:

• Your ArcPad map needs to have a projection defined beforeyou can activate the GPS.

The projection can be defined using two methods:

1. Associate a projection file (.prj) with each layer in yourArcPad map

2. Use the Select Projection button in the Table of Contentsto select a projection file on your computer that matchesthe projection of the data in your ArcPad map.

• The GPS needs to be activated before any of the GPS buttonson the Edit toolbar are enabled. Furthermore, the GPS Pointbutton is only enabled when a point layer is active for editing.The Add GPS Vertex and Add GPS Vertices Continuouslybuttons are only enabled when either the polyline or polygonfeature type has been selected.

SelectProjection

Edittoolbar

GPStools

Selectfeaturetype forediting

Commandbar

Toggle pen off if youonly want GPS input.

EDITING BASICS 245

• Optionally, you can specify various quality control parametersto filter out less accurate GPS coordinates. For example, youcan specify maximum PDOP or EPE values or limit ArcPad toonly use 3D or DGPS GPS coordinates.

• You can also specify alert messages and sounds, whichArcPad displays and plays, respectively, when the specifiedquality control parameters have been exceeded.

246 USING ARCPAD

• You can optionally use the average x,y, and z coordinates ofmultiple GPS positions to capture point features or vertices ofpolyline or polygon features.

You can also specify the position interval, or frequency anddistance interval, of GPS position coordinates for ArcPad touse when capturing polyline or polygon vertices in streamingmode.

The GPS Quality, Alerts, and Capture options are all specified inthe GPS Preferences dialog box. These options are discussed inmore detail in Chapter 15, ‘Creating new features’, and in theArcPad Reference Guide.

In most cases, the GPS coordinates received by ArcPad are inlatitude and longitude degrees, typically using the WGS84 datum.This may be different to the projection and datum of the data inyour map. In this case, ArcPad automatically does on-the-flyprojection and datum transformation of the incoming GPScoordinates to the projection and datum of your map data.

EDITING BASICS 247

The Edit toolbar

Select dropdown list:Tools to select featuresusing the pointeror GPS and navigationtools for the selectedfeature.

Feature dropdownlist: Sets thefeature type fordata capture.

Capture Point Using GPS:Captures a point feature inthe editable point layer usingthe current GPS position.

Add GPS vertex:Captures a single vertex inthe selected line or polygonfeature using the current GPSposition.

Add GPS vertices continuously:Continously captures vertices inthe selected line or polygonfeature using the currentGPS position.

Selected Feature dropdown list:Tools that let you view propertiesand perform severaltasks on theselected feature.

Offset Pointdropdown list: Toolsthat let you workwith offsets,traverses,segments, andrepeated attributes.

248 USING ARCPAD

The Command toolbar

Lock/Unlock tool:Lock ArcPad toprevent inadvertentedits to your data.

Proceed tool:Completes thegeometry capture of anew polyline/polygonand enables you tocapture attributeinformation for thefeature.

Commit GeometryChanges tool: Once achange has beenmade to your feature,use this tool to savethe change.

Cancel Feature Edits tool:If you do not want tocommit your changes,use this tool to cancel allrecent edits to theselected feature.

Undo tool: Use to undothe last step performed,prior to commiting yourchanges.

Pen toggle tool:Toggle pen activefor data capture.

EDITING BASICS 249

Creating newshapefiles foreditingOccasionally you might want tocapture data into a newshapefile rather than into anexisting shapefile. You can usethe New Shapefile tool to definethe attribute fields and create anew shapefile. You can alsocreate a QuickForm for yournew shapefile. The newshapefile and QuickForm, ifavailable, are automaticallyadded to the current ArcPadmap and checked for editing inthe Layers page of the Table ofContents.

Tip

Specifying the type ofshapefileYou need to select the type ofshapefile you want to create from alist of available types. Point,Polyline, and Polygon types are 2Dshapefiles that only storex,y coordinates. PointZ, PolylineZ,and PolygonZ types are 3Dshapefiles that store x,y, and zcoordinates, as well as m—measure—values. PointM,PolylineM, and PolygonM types are2D shapefiles that storex,y coordinates and m values.

1. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the Open Mapbutton to display thedropdown list.

2. Tap New.


3. Tap Shapefile.

The New Shapefile dialogbox is displayed.

4. Choose the type of shapefilethat you want to create fromthe Type dropdown list.

5. Tap the + button to open theField dialog box and definethe fields for your newshapefile’s dBASE table. u

3

1

2

4

5

250 USING ARCPAD

6. Type the name of the firstfield that you want to createin the new dBASE table.

7. Choose the field type: Text,Numeric, Date, or True/False.

8. Type the length of the newfield and optionally theprecision for Numeric fields.

9. Tap OK to create the newfield. u

See Also

See Chapter 4, ‘ArcPad basics’,and Chapter 5, ‘Creating maps’, tolearn how to add layers for editing.

7

6

8

9

EDITING BASICS 251

10. Repeat steps 4 through 8 ifyou want to define additionalfields.

The new fields and theirdefinitions are listed in theNew Shapefile dialog box.

11. Tap OK when you havedefined all of the requiredfields for the shapefile’sdBASE table. u

Tip

Importing field definitionsfrom an existing dBASEtableTo import the field definitions foryour new shapefile from an existingdBASE (DBF) table, which may ormay not be associated with ashapefile, tap the Import button toopen the Import Fields Fromdialog box, and select the sourcedBASE table.

Tip

Specifying the codepagefor the attribute dataA codepage maps character codesto individual characters. You canselect the available codepage fromthe dropdown list on the NewShapefile dialog box.

See Also

Refer to the Glossary for adefinition of codepage and to theArcPad Reference Guide for moreinformation on codepages.

W

Q

252 USING ARCPAD

12. Type the name of the newshapefile.

13. Choose the folder andlocation where you want tosave the new shapfile.

14. Tap OK to complete the taskand create the newshapefile.

The shapefile will be createdand you will be asked if youwould like to create aQuickForm for this shapefile.

The added shapefile willalso be checked for editing,and the Edit toolbar and theCommand bar will bedisplayed.

15. Tap Yes and proceed to thenext section to learn how tocreate a QuickForm for yournew shapefile. If you tap Noyou can always come backand create a QuickFormlater.

Y

E

T

R

EDITING BASICS 253

Creating aQuickFormIn order to facilitate datacapture in the field, you cancreate custom input forms forany shapefile in ArcPad.QuickForms contain basicfunctions and options forcreating forms in the field whenyou do not have access to yourdesktop PC.

When creating a QuickFormyou can select from thefollowing options:

• Layout: Determine the name,size, page types, text andbackground color of theform.

• Fields: Select the fields toappear on the form.

• Controls: Manage requiredfields including settings forminimum and maximumvalues, and create list valuesand tooltips.

Alternatively, you can useArcPad Application Builder tofurther edit your QuickForm orto create custom input formsthat include more complexcontrols, numerous designoptions, and advancedscripting tools.

If you selected to create aQuickForm directly aftercreating a new shapefile,skip to step 5.


2. Tap New.


3. Tap QuickForm.

A dialog box opens to allowyou to select the shapefileyou would like to add aQuickForm to.

4. Tap FireHydrants, theshapefile you created in theprevious exercise.

The QuickForm dialog boxopens. u

1

2

3

254 USING ARCPAD

5. On the Layout page, type aCaption for the form.

By default, ArcPad uses thename of the shapefile theform is associated with.

6. Using the dropdown list,select the screen size of thedevice you would like yourform to be optimized for.

ArcPad automatically entersa width and height for yourform based on the screensize you selected.

7. If needed, alter the defaultsettings for height and width.

8. Select the default pages youwould like to include on yourform in addition to the pagescreated for your QuickForm.

You can add Picture,Symbology, Attributes, andGeography pages.

If there are no default pageschecked, and the selectedfields fit on one page, and thePage Tabs is unchecked,then the QuickForm only hasone page and no tabs will bedisplayed.

9. Optionally, you can set thetext and background color ofthe form. By default, it usesblack text on a whitebackground

10. Tap the Fields tab. u

Tip

Selecting a smaller formsize than your devicescreen sizeYou may want to select a smallerheight dimension than your devicescreen size so that when the SoftInput Panel (SIP) is displayed, itwill not obscure any of the controls.When creating a QuickForm,ArcPad places a single control andlabel on each line. Therefore, forexample, on a 1/4 VGA screen, 6fields can be displayed withoutbeing obscured by the SIP.

7

8

5

6

9

Q

EDITING BASICS 255

11. On the Fields page, selectthe fields you would like toinclude on your form bychecking their checkbox.

12. Tap the Controls tab. u

E

W

See Also

See the Appendix to learn moreabout creating forms using ArcPadApplication Builder.

256 USING ARCPAD

13. On the Controls page, youcan set other properties foryour form controls:

Required: check if you wouldlike to make the fieldrequired.

Label: Caption that appearson the form.

Minimum/Maximum: Setminimum and maximumvalues to set the limits ofyour data capture values.

List Values: Enter values toinclude in a dropdown list.Items must be separated bya comma (e.g., red, yellow,brown).

Tooltip: Add a description foryour fields.

14. Tap OK.

ArcPad confirms the creationof your QuickForm.

15. Tap OK.

The shapefile and form areloaded into your ArcPad mapas an editable layer. The Edittoolbar and Command barare automically displayed ifthey are not already. u

R

T

Y

EDITING BASICS 257

16. Use your new QuickForm toadd features to yourshapefile.

17. Tap OK when you arefinished. U

I

258 USING ARCPAD

Displaying theEdit toolbarBefore editing geographicfeature data within ArcPad, youmust first display the Edittoolbar. You can display theEdit toolbar by selecting it inthe Toolbars list. The Edittoolbar is automaticallydisplayed when a layer isselected for editing in the Start/Stop Editing dropdown list orby opening the Table ofContents and checking one ormore layers for editing.

The Command bar at the bottomof the ArcPad window automati-cally displays when the Edittoolbar displays.

Tip

Enabling the buttons on theEdit toolbarThe buttons on the Edit toolbar willonly be enabled if one or morelayers have been selected forediting. In addition, the CaptureGPS Vertex buttons will only beenabled if the GPS has beenactivated and the selected featuretype is polyline or polygon. TheCapture GPS Point button will beenabled if the GPS has beenactivated and a point layer hasbeen selected for editing.

1. Start ArcPad.

2. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the ArcPadOptions button to display thedropdown list.

3. Tap Toolbars to display thelist of available toolbars.

4. Tap Edit.

The Edit toolbar and theCommand bar are displayed.

2

3

4

EDITING BASICS 259

Selecting a layerfor editingLayers are selected for editingby enabling the Start/StopEditing tool on the Browsetoolbar or by checking thelayer’s Edit check box on theLayers page in the Table ofContents.

In ArcPad, you can have up tothree shapefiles active forediting—one shapefile for eachfeature type: one point, oneline, and one polygon shapefile.

If you select the Graphics Layerfor editing, all previouslyselected layers are deselected.However, with the Graphicslayer selected, you can selectup to two shapefiles for editing.The shapefiles take precedencewhen editing, but you can stilladd sketches and notes to theGraphics layer.

1. Tap the arrow to the right ofthe Start/Stop Editing buttonon the Browse toolbar.

The dropdown list displaysall of the editable layers inthe current ArcPad map witha corresponding icon toindicate the type of layer.

2. Tap the layer that you want toedit.

The Edit toolbar and theCommnad bar will bedisplayed if they are notalready displayed.

In order to select more thanone layer you will need torepeat steps 1 and 2. You canselect one point, one line,and one polygon layer forediting, at one time, or thegraphics layer.

A red box around the layericon indicates that the layerhas been selected forediting.

Tip

Determining the layer typeArcPad allows you to edit point,line, and polygon shapefiles, andgraphics layers. The shapefile typeor graphics layer is indicated bythe following icons:


for line shapefiles


for graphics layers

1

2

260 USING ARCPAD

Selectingfeatures foreditingA feature needs to be selectedbefore certain operations can beperformed on it. For example,before you move, edit, or deletea feature, you must select it.

You can select a feature forediting by using the Select,Select & Vertex Editing, orSelect at GPS Position tools.The Select tools are located onthe Edit toolbar. In addition, theSelect tool is located on theAdvanced Select dialog boxand the Find tool dialog box.

The Select and Select at GPSPosition tools are used tochange a feature’s attributes;insert and append vertices; andmove, rotate, scale, resize, anddelete features. u

Tip

Selecting vertical orhorizontal linesThe Select tool uses the PenTolerance for the search radiuswhen selecting features. The defaultpen tolerance may be too smallwhen selecting vertical or horizon-tal lines, making it difficult to selectthese features. You can increase thepen tolerance on the Display pageof the ArcPad Options dialog box.

Selecting features forediting using the Selecttool

1. Select the layer for editing inthe dropdown list next to theStart/Stop Editing tool—asdescribed in the previoustask.

2. Tap the Select button.

3. Tap the feature that you wantto select for editing.

The selected feature ishighlighted using thespecified highlight color(cyan) and with a rectangleusing a dashed line, outliningthe geographic extent of thefeature.

4. Tap the Clear SelectedFeature button locatedon the dropdown list underthe Select tool to clear theselected feature.

2

3

1

EDITING BASICS 261

Selecting features forediting using the Selectat GPS Position tool

1. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the Select buttonto display the dropdown list.

2. Tap Select at GPS Position.

The selected feature ishighlighted with a rectangle,using a dashed line, outlin-ing the geographic extent ofthe feature.

3. Tap the Clear SelectedFeature button locatedon the dropdown list underthe Select tool to clear theselected feature.

The Select and Vertex Editingtool is used to move (by pen,GPS, or offsets) and delete afeature’s vertices.

A layer must be made editablebefore a feature in that layercan be selected using any ofthe Select tools.

3

1

2Tip

The Select at GPS Positiontool is grayed outThe Select at GPS Position tool willbe unavailable if the GPS is notactive. Activate the GPS to use theSelect at GPS Position tool.

Tip

How do I know if I haveselected a feature?Using the Select and Select at GPSPosition tools, the selected featureis highlighted using the specifiedhighlight color and with a rect-angle, using a dashed line,outlining the geographic extent ofthe feature. However, the boundingbox rectangle may not always bevisible if the feature’s extent isoutside of the current view’s extent.

Using the Select & Vertex Editingtool, the extent of the selectedfeature is highlighted and eachvertex of the feature is bound usinga blue square.

The highlight color can be selectedon the Display page of the ArcPadOptions dialog box.

262 USING ARCPAD

Selecting features forediting using the Findtool

1. Tap the Find button to openthe Find dialog box.

2. Tap the Layers button toselect the layer and optionalfield to search on.

3. Use the Soft Input Panel totype in the value that youwant to search for.

4. Tap the Results tab toexecute the search and viewthe results.

A table is displayed listing allof the found features.

5. Tap the feature that you wantto select for editing.

6. Tap Select.

The selected feature ishighlighted using the DisplayHighlight color and arectangle is displayed,outlining the geographicextent of the feature.

Tip

Changing the DisplayHighlight colorYou can change the Highlight colorof selected features in the Displaypage of the ArcPad Options dialogbox.

See Also

Refer to Chapter 8, ‘Querying yourdata’, for help on using the Findtool.

Tip

The Select tool is notrespondingThe Select tool in the Finddialog box will be unavailable if thelayer has not been set as editable.

6

4

5

EDITING BASICS 263

Selecting features forediting using theAdvanced Select tool



Notice that the AdvancedSelect tool has been acti-vated on the Browse toolbar.

3. Tap the map to select afeature or drag a selectionbox to select multiplefeatures from the activelayers.

A list is displayed showingthe coordinates where themap was tapped and theselected features. Tap the +icon to display the attributesof the selected feature.

4. Tap the feature you want toselect for editing.

5. Tap the Dropdown Arrowbutton to display theadditional tools.

6. Tap Select.

The selected feature ishighlighted using the DisplayHighlight color and arectangle is displayed,outlining the geographicextent of the feature.

See Also

Refer to Chapter 8, ‘Querying yourdata’, for more information aboutusing the Advanced Select tool.

Tip

Selecting the layers for theAdvanced Select tool tosearchThe Advanced Select tooloperates on all layers checked forIdentify in the Table of Contents.The Select tool in the AdvancedSelect dialog box is only enabledfor layers that have been checkedfor editing.

4

5

2

6

264 USING ARCPAD

Setting snappingpropertiesThe snapping environment canhelp you create points orvertices at more exact locationsrelative to other features. Whenyou use the snapping environ-ment in ArcPad, you mustchoose which part of theexisting features -vertex, edge,or endpoint - you want yourfeature to snap. These choicesare called layer snappingproperties.

In ArcPad, you can select tosnap to an existing point, thevertex of a line or polygon, edgeof a line or polygon, or theendpoint of a line.

Snapping properties areselected under the Snappingtab in the Table of Contents.

Using the snappingenvironment to createnew features


2. Tap the Snapping tab on theTable of Contents.

A list of editable layers isdisplayed.

3. Check the Edge check boxfor the Streets layer.

The Streets layer is the targetlayer that we want our newfeature to snap to.

4. Tap OK. u

Tip

Specifying the snaptoleranceThe snap tolerance is specified onthe Snapping page of the MapProperties dialog box.

1

2

3

4

EDITING BASICS 265

5. Make a layer editable usingthe methods described in thisand the other editing chap-ters.

6. Display the snap buffers bytapping the center button ona Windows Mobile device orthe Ctrl key on a desktop PC.

7. Create a new point feature orvertex using the methodsdescribed in this and theother editing chapters.

Points and vertices aresnapped to other points,vertices, edges, or ends ofexisting features as specifiedon the Snapping page of theTable of Contents.

Tip

Snapping shortcut keyTo display the snapping buffers, tapthe center button on a WindowsMobile device or the Ctrl key on adesktop PC. With this tool active,you are also forcing all pen actionsfor the following tools to also besnapped: Identify, Measure, andAdvanced Select.

5

6

7

266 USING ARCPAD

Dragging a feature

1. Select the feature using theSelect or Select at GPSPosition tool.

2. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the FeatureProperties button to displaythe dropdown list.

3. Tap Move Feature to enablefeature dragging.

The Move Feature button willbe promoted to the Edittoolbar and be depressedwhile it is active. To deacti-vate it, activate another toolin its place. u

Moving featuresTo move a feature, you mustfirst select it using one of theSelect tools. With the Selectand Select at GPS Position toolsyou can move the feature bydragging it. In order to move apoint feature or vertex to aspecific x, y coordinate or to thecurrent GPS position, you mustuse the Select & Vertex Editingtool. Once changes have beenmade, you must commit thechanges before they are saved.These steps eliminate thepossibility of accidentallymoving features in the field.

You can move features andvertices in three different ways:

1. Drag the feature.2. Type in new x,y

coordinates.3. Move to the current GPS

position coordinates. u

Tip

Changing the size of thevertex symbolsVertices are displayed using asquare symbol. You can change thesize of the square by changing thePen Tolerance in the Display pageof the ArcPad Options dialog box.

2

3

1

EDITING BASICS 267

4. Tap and drag the selectedfeature to the desiredlocation.

The feature’s bounding boxis displayed while the featureis being dragged.

The selected feature isdisplayed in its new location.

5. Tap the Commit GeometryChanges button on theCommand bar.

The selected feature is nowmoved to the new location.Once you commit yourchanges, they cannot beundone. To undo the change,prior to tapping the CommitGeometry Changes button,tap the Cancel Feature Editsbutton.

Dragging is the easiest way tomove a feature. Use this methodwhen you have a general ideaof where you want to move thefeature. You can drag point,line, or polygon features.

You can type in new x,ycoordinates or use the currentGPS position coordinates whenyou want to move a pointfeature or line and polygonvertices to a precise location.

Tip

Cancel feature moveUse the Cancel Feature Edits toolto undo any changes you havemade, such as dragging a feature.You can only use the CancelFeature Edits tool before you tapthe Commit Geometry Changesbutton.

See Also

Refer to Chapter 17, ‘Editingexisting features’, for moreinformation on moving a vertex ofline or polygon features.

5 CancelFeatureEditstool

4

268 USING ARCPAD

Moving a point feature toan x,y location usingMove To

1. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the Select buttonto display the dropdown list.

2. Tap Select & Vertex Editing.

If you already have a featureselected using one of themethods described earlier inthis chapter, tapping theSelect and Vertex Editingbutton will display the pointor vertices of your alreadyselected feature using a bluesquare. Skip to task step 4.

3. Tap the feature you wouldlike to select.

The point symbol or verticesof your line and polygonfeature will be displayedusing a blue square.

4. Tap and hold within the bluesquare to display the MoveTo menu.

5. Tap Move To.

If you have a GPS connectedand activated, tap Move toGPS, to move the pointfeature to the current GPSposition. u

Tip

Using the Move To GPS toolTap the Move To GPS tool in theMove To menu to move the selectedpoint to the current GPS position.

Tip

Using the Move To Menuwith line and polygonverticesThe Move To and Move To GPStools can be used to move line andpolygon vertices to a new position.Use the Select & Vertex Editing toolto select a feature. A blue square isdisplayed around each vertex of theselected feature. Tap and hold (on adesktop PC, use the right mousebutton click) within the blue squareto display the Move To menu. Usethe methods described to movepoint features to move yourvertices.

35

2

EDITING BASICS 269

6. Type the desiredcoordinates.

7. Tap OK.

The selected point feature ismoved to the specifiedcoordinates.

Tip

Moving a point to thecurrent GPS positionTapping the GPS button, , onthe Vertex dialog box or theGeography page of the FeatureProperties dialog box will move theselected point feature to the currentGPS position.

Tip

Using offsets to move apoint to a new locationYou can use one point and 2 pointoffsets to move point features to anew location.

See Also

Refer to Chapter 15, ‘Creatingnew features’, for more informa-tion about using offsets.

6GPSbutton

270 USING ARCPAD

Moving a point feature toan x,y location using theGeography page of theFeature Properties dialogbox

1. Select the feature using oneof the methods describedearlier in this chapter.

The Feature Propertiesbutton is enabled once afeaure is selected.

2. Tap the Feature Propertiesbutton—or double-tap thefeature—to open the FeatureProperties dialog box.

3. Tap the Geography tab todisplay the Geography page.

4. Type the desired coordinates.

5. Tap OK.

The selected point feature ismoved to the specifiedcoordinates.

Tip

Displaying the Geographypage tabThe Geography page is used todisplay and edit the coordinates ofpoint features or vertices of lineand polygon features. The layerthat you are editing may have anassociated custom input form. TheCustom Form dialog box will haveadditional tabs displayed to the leftof the Attributes tab, as well as Leftand Right arrow buttons fornavigating between the tabs. Tapthe Right arrow button until theGeography tab is displayed. TheGeography tab is always the lasttab displayed.

Tip

What if the Geography tabdoes not exist?The layer that you are editing mayhave an associated Custom InputForm that hides the Attributes orGeography pages of the FeatureProperties dialog box. If this is thecase, then you will need to use theMove To tool to move the point toan x,y location.

3

4

5

21

EDITING BASICS 271

Undoing andcanceling editsYou can undo edits made to thegeometry of a feature using theUndo and/or the Cancel FeatureEdits tools. The Undo andCancel Feature Edits tools canonly be used prior to savingyour changes using the CommitGeometry Changes tool. Allthese tools are located on theCommand bar.

The Undo tool goes back to theprevious change. If you makeseveral changes to a line vertex,the Undo tool enables you togo back one step. You can keepstepping back until all youredits are undone.

The Cancel Feature Edits toolsgoes back to the original shapeof the feature you modified.

1. Begin editing your featureusing the methods describedearlier in this chapter.

The Undo and CancelFeature Edits tools areactivated once you havemade your first change suchas insert vertex or movefeature.

2. Tap the Undo button to undothe last change.

3. Tap the Cancel Feature Editsbutton to revert back to theoriginal shape or location ofthe feature.

1

2 3

272 USING ARCPAD

Deleting featuresTo delete a feature from the mapand from your dataset, use theDelete Feature tool on theFeature Properties buttondropdown list. ArcPad edits theoriginal, or source, shapefile; itdoes not operate on a copy ofthe file. Once a change hasbeen committed, you cannotundo it.

When a feature is deleted,ArcPad converts the feature toa null shape and then subse-quently ignores the null shape.

1. Select the feature using oneof the methods describedearlier in this chapter.

2. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the FeatureProperties button to displaythe dropdown list.

3. Tap Delete Feature.

4. Tap Yes to confirm that youreally want to delete theselected feature.

The selected feature isdeleted.

Tip

Packing shapefilesIn order to pack a shapefile, orpermanently delete the features,use the Utilities>Pack Shapefileutility located under the Toolsdropdown menu on the Maintoolbar. In order to successfullypack your shapefile and remove thenull shapes, there must be sufficientfree memory on your mobile devicefor ArcPad.

Tip

Deleting features using theDelete keyYou can also press the Delete keyon your keyboard—or Soft InputPanel on a pen-based computer—to delete the selected feature.

4

2

3

1

IN THIS CHAPTER

273

Creating new features 15• Creating point features

• Creating line features

• Creating polygon features

• Working with a graphics layer

• Creating repeated features

• Creating segmented polylinefeatures

• Working with offsets

• Working with traverses

• Performing simple offsets

• Using a 1 point offset

• Using a 2 point offset

• Creating a linear traverse

• Creating a radial traverse

It’s easy to create new features using the editing tools in ArcPad. First,select the layers for which you want to create the new features. Then selectthe appropriate tool and use the mouse pointer, pen, or incoming GPScoordinates to digitize the feature.

You can use the editing tools to create new point, line, or polygon features.To create point features, tap once on the map or tap the GPS Point button.To create line or polygon features, use the mouse pointer, pen, or incomingGPS coordinates to digitize the vertices that make up that feature. The newfeature is saved in the selected layer of the same feature type.

274 USING ARCPAD

Creating pointfeaturesYou can create point featuresusing the mouse pointer, pen, orincoming GPS coordinates.Creating a point featureinvolves the following steps:

1. Select a point layer forediting using the Start/StopEditing dropdown list.

2. Tap the Point button, or theGPS Point button, on theEdit toolbar.

3. Tap the map to create a newfeature.

4. Type in attributes for thenew point feature. u

Creating point featureswith the pen

1. Tap the Point button on theEdit toolbar.

The Point button is nowactive, and ArcPad is in pointcapture mode. Any tap on thescreen will create a newpoint feature at the corre-sponding coordinates.

2. Tap the map at the locationwhere you want to create thenew point feature. u

Tip

Enabling the Point buttonThe Point button on the Edittoolbar is only enabled if a pointshapefile layer has been selectedfor editing. You can select a layerfor editing via the Start/StopEditing dropdown list or in theTable of Contents.

1

2

See Also

Refer to Chapter 16, ‘Creating newfeatures with a GPS andrangefinder’, for more informationon using incoming GPS coordi-nates to capture a point feature.

CREATING NEW FEATURES 275

The Feature Propertiesdialog box is automaticallydisplayed after the new pointfeature has been created.

3. On the Attributes page, tapthe Property field to open theassociated Value text box fortyping in attribute data.

For example, tapping theProperty field HOUSE_NUMwill open the associatedValue text box for typing inthe house number value of“923”.

The Soft Input Panel isdisplayed when a Value textbox is opened. If is notdisplayed, tap the SIP iconon the Title bar to activate it. u

The Feature Properties dialogbox lets you view and edit theattributes of the feature youhave selected. The FeatureProperties dialog box isautomatically displayed onceany new feature is created.

By default, the Feature Proper-ties dialog box includes pagesfor Attributes, Picture, Symbol-ogy, and Geography; a customedit form and Picture page willalso be displayed if they exist.The custom edit form maychange the title of the FeatureProperties dialog box. Forexample, “Redlands Trees”.

3

Soft Input Panel

276 USING ARCPAD

The Feature Propertiesdialog box will display thecustom edit form if it exists.

4. Tap OK to save the attributes,close the edit form, or theFeature Properties dialogbox, and complete thecapture of the new pointfeature.

You can also tap the X buttonif you want to cancel thecapture of the new pointfeature. The point feature,and any attributes that havebeen typed in, will bedeleted. u

4

Tip

Creating custom edit formsQuickForms and custom edit formscan be created using ArcPad orArcPad Application Builder,respectively. Both type of forms aresaved in an ArcPad Layer file(*.apl), which is associated with ashapefile.

QuickForms and custom edit formscan have multiple tabs, or pages,each with multiple controls. Thesecontrols can include text boxes,date controls, and list boxes.Scripts associated with the formperform initialization and valida-tion, enforcing correct data entrybefore continuing to another pageor closing the form. Scripts cannotbe added to forms using theQuickForm capability in ArcPad.

See Also

See Chapter 14, ‘Editing Basics’, tolearn how to create QuickForms inArcPad to edit your features.

Tip

Using a barcode scanner toinput your dataUse a barcode scanner connectedto your Windows Mobile device toeasily input data into your editforms or Attributes page.


5. The new point feature iscreated and displayed usingthe selected symbology. Thepoint feature is also selectedfor editing, as indicated bythe dashed selection boxand the activated FeatureProperties button.

The Point button is still activefor capturing additional pointfeatures when it is displayedin depressed mode.

Tip

Deactivating the PointbuttonThe Point button is active when it isdisplayed in a depressed mode.Tapping any other tool in its placewill deactivate the Point button.

See Also

Refer to Chapter 7, ‘Symbolizingyour data’, for more informationon symbology.

EnabledFeaturePropertiesbutton

5Tip

Working with scale-dependent layersIf you add a feature to a layer thathas a scale-dependency set, it maynot be visible if you are zoomed outbeyond the set extent.

In order to see the feature, whetheryou are adding a new or displayingan existing feature, you will need tozoom in beyond the set scale. Scaledependencies are set on the Scalepage of the Layer Properties dialogbox.

278 USING ARCPAD

Creating linefeaturesArcPad has the following toolsfor creating line features:

• LineThis tool creates a straightline joining the coordinatesfrom where the pen firsttouches the screen and endswhere the pen is lifted.

• PolylineThis tool captures a vertexeach time the pen taps thescreen or each time the AddGPS Vertex button is tapped.The Add GPS VerticesContinuously button canalso be used to capturevertices continuously fromthe GPS. Offsets can also beused to create vertices for apolyline. The line is com-pleted when the Proceedtool on the Command bar istapped . u

Selecting the line featuretool

1. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the feature buttonto display the dropdown listof feature types. By default,the Point feature button isdisplayed on the Edit toolbar.

2. Tap the required line featuretype—for example, Polyline.

The selected feature type willbe highlighted with a redsquare, and the feature’sbutton will be displayed anddepressed on the Edittoolbar.

2

See Also

Refer to Chapter 16, ‘Creating newfeatures with a GPS and rangefinder’, for more information onusing the Add GPS Vertex and AddGPS Vertices Continuously buttons.

See Also

Refer to Working with Offsets inthis chapter for more informationon using offets to create vertices.


Creating a line featureusing the Line tool andthe pen

1. Tap the arrow to the right ofthe feature tool to display thedropdown list. Tap the Linefeature tool.

2. Tap the map to specify thestart position for the line.

3. While still holding the pen onthe map—or screen—dragthe pen to where the lineshould end.

4. Lift the pen to create the newline feature.

The Feature Propertiesdialog box or custom editform is automatically dis-played after the new linefeature has been created.

5. On the form, type the re-quired information or on theAttributes tab, tap theProperty field to open theassociated Value text box fortyping in attribute data.

6. Tap the Symbology tab toselect the appropriatesymbol for your new line.

7. Tap ok when you arefinished.

Your new line is drawn usingthe symbology you defined.

• Freehand LineThis tool creates a sketchbased on the line drawn withthe pen. The line is com-pleted when the pen is lifted.

The Line, Polyline, andFreehand Line tools can beused with the mouse pointer orpen. The Polyline tool can alsobe used with the incoming GPScoordinates or with offsets.

All of the line features arecreated in a line shapefile or in agraphics layer. The new linefeature is stored as x,y, and,optionally, z coordinates.

1

2

3

Tip

Deactivating the featurebuttonThe selected feature button is activewhen it is displayed in a depressedmode. Tapping any other button ortool will deactivate the selectedfeature button.

Tip

Using the snapping optionsSet snapping options in the Table ofContents to snap new features orvertices to existing ones.

5

6

7

280 USING ARCPAD

Creating a line featureusing the Polyline tooland the pen

1. Tap the arrow to the right ofthe feature tool to display thedropdown list. Tap thePolyline feature tool.

2. Tap the map to specify theposition for the first vertex ofthe new line.

The vertices are drawn with ablue box.

3. Tap the map again to specifythe position for the secondvertex of the new line.

Continue to tap the map tocapture additional vertices.

Go to Step 7 to complete thecapture of the new linefeature, or continue to Step 4to use the capture menu toadd more vertices. u

1

2

3

Tip

Using the Undo toolUse the Undo tool on the Com-mand bar to delete the last vertexcaptured. You can continue to deleteall the vertices that have beencaptured for the line feature.

Undotool


4. At any time, you can tap andhold anywhere on the map todisplay the Capture menu.

5. Tap Absolute X,Y to displaythe Vertex dialog box fortyping in the x,y coordinatesand, optionally, the z coordi-nate and m value for the nextvertex.

6. Type the coordinates for thenext vertex or if the GPS isactive, tap the GPS buttonon the Vertex dialog box touse the current GPS position.

7. Tap the Proceed button onthe Command bar tocomplete the capture of thenew line feature. u

7

45

6

See Also

Refer to Chapter 16‘Creating newfeatures with a GPS andrangefinder’ for help using the GPSX,Y tool to capture vertices.

See Also

Refer to‘Working with traverses’ inthis chapter for help with using thePolyline tool with offsets.

GPSbutton

Undotool

282 USING ARCPAD

Tip

Determining the length of aline featureYou can determine the length of aselected line feature by opening theGeography page of the FeatureProperties dialog box. ArcPaddynamically calculates the length ofthe selected line and displays it inthe Geography tab using theDisplay Units. The length is notstored with the feature’s attributes.

The Feature Propertiesdialog box or custom editform is automaticallydisplayed after the new linefeature has been created.


For example, tap theProperty field NAME to openthe associated Value textbox and type the streetname value of “Bean Alley”.

9. Tap ok when you arefinished entering yourattribute and symbologyinformation.

8

9


Creating a line featureusing the Freehand Linetool

1. Tap the arrow to the right ofthe feature tool to display thedropdown list. Tap theFreehand Line feature tool.

2. Tap the map to specify thestart position for the line.

3. While still holding the pen onthe map—or screen—use thepen to draw the line.

4. Lift the pen to end the newline feature.

The Feature Propertiesdialog box or custom editform is automatically dis-played after the new linefeature has been created.

5. On the Attributes tab, tap theProperty field to open theassociated Value text box fortyping in attribute data.

6. On the Symbology tab, selectthe symbol for the new linefeature.

Symbology is based on theattribute value, therefore byselecting the symbology, youare also selecting theassociated attribute value forthis feature.

7. Tap OK when you are finishedentering the requiredinformation.

1

2 3

4

5

7

6

284 USING ARCPAD

Creating polygonfeaturesArcPad has the following toolsfor creating polygon features:

• RectangleThis tool creates a rectangleusing the coordinates fromwhere the pen first touchesthe screen to where the penis lifted. The rectangle isautomatically completedwhen the pen is lifted.

• PolygonThis tool captures a vertexeach time the pen taps thescreen or each time the AddGPS Vertex button is tapped.The Add GPS VerticesContinuously button canalso be used to capturevertices from the GPS.Offsets can also be used tocreate vertices for a poly-gon. The polygon iscompleted when the Proceedtool on the Command bar istapped. u

Selecting the polygonfeature tool

1. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the feature buttonto display the dropdown listof feature types—by default,the Point feature button isdisplayed on the Edit toolbar.

2. Tap the required polygonfeature type—for example,Polygon.

The selected feature type willbe highlighted with a redsquare, and the feature’sbutton will be displayed andactivated on the Edit toolbar.

Tip

Deactivating the featurebuttonThe selected feature button is activewhen it is displayed in a depressedmode. Tapping any other buttonwill deactivate the selected featurebutton.

2


• EllipseThis tool creates an ellipseusing the coordinates fromwhere the pen first touchesthe screen (the origin) towhere the pen is lifted (theradius). The polygon isautomatically completedwhen the pen is lifted.

• CircleThis tool creates a circleusing the coordinates fromwhere the pen first touchesthe screen (the origin) towhere the pen is lifted (theradius). The polygon isautomatically completedwhen the pen is lifted.

• Freehand PolygonThis tool creates a sketchpolygon based on the linedrawn with the pen. Thepolygon is automaticallycompleted when the pen islifted.

All of the polygon tools can beused with the mouse pointer orpen. The Polygon tool can alsobe used with the incoming GPScoordinates or with offsets.

All of the polygon features arecreated in a polygon shapefileor in a graphics layer. The newpolygon feature is stored as x,yand, optionally, z coordinates.

Creating a polygonfeature using theRectangle, Ellipse,Circle, or Freehand tool

1. Tap the arrow to the right ofthe feature tool to display thedropdown list. Tap one of thepolygon tools, such as theRectangle feature tool.

2. Tap the map to specify theposition for the origin of thepolygon —whether you arecreating a rectangle, ellipse,circle, or freehand polygon.

3. While still holding the pen onthe map—or screen—dragthe pen to select the positionof the opposite corner of therectangle, to increase theradius of the ellipse or circle,or to use the pen to draw thefreehand polygon.

4. Lift the pen to create the newpolygon feature. u

1

2

3

286 USING ARCPAD

The Feature Propertiesdialog box or custom editform is automatically dis-played after the new polygonfeature has been created.


For example, tap the Propertyfield NAME to open theassociated Value text boxand type the school namevalue of “Proposed”.

6. On the Symbology tab, selectthe symbol for the newfeature.

Symbology is based on theattribute value, therefore byselecting the symbology, youare also selecting theassociated attribute value forthis feature.

7. Tap ok when you are finishedcapturing the feature proper-ties for your new polygon.

Tapping the X button cancelsthe creation of your newfeature.

5

7


Creating a polygonfeature using thePolygon tool and the pen

1. Tap the arrow to the right ofthe feature tool to display thedropdown list. Tap thePolygon feature tool.

2. Tap the map to specify theposition for the first vertex ofthe new polygon.

The vertices are drawn with ablue box, and a line joins thevertices.

3. Tap the map again to specifythe position for the secondvertex of the new polygon.

Continue to tap the map tocapture additional vertices.

Go to Step 7 to complete thecapture of the new polygonfeature, or continue to Step 4to use the capture menu toadd more vertices. u

1

23

Tip

Using the snapping optionsSet snapping options in the Table ofContents to snap new vertices toexisting features.

Tip

Using the Undo toolUse the Undo tool on the Com-mand bar to delete the last vertexcaptured. You can continue to deleteall the vertices that have beencaptured for the polygon feature.

288 USING ARCPAD

4. At any time you can tap andhold anywhere on the map todisplay the Capture menu.

5. Tap Absolute X,Y to displaythe Vertex dialog box fortyping in the x,y coordinatesand, optionally, the z coordi-nate and m value for the nextvertex.

6. Type the coordinates for thenext vertex or tap the GPSbutton—if the GPS is active—on the Vertex dialog box touse the current GPS position.

7. Tap the Proceed button onthe Command bar tocomplete the capture of thenew line polygon.

ArcPad will automaticallyclose the polygon by addinga final vertex with the samecoordinates as the firstvertex. u

4

5

7

See Also

Refer to Chapter 16‘Creating newfeatures with a GPS andrangefinder’ for help using the GPSX,Y tool to capture vertices.

See Also

Refer to‘Working with traverses’ inthis chapter for help with using thePolygon tool with offsets.

6GPSbutton


Tip

Determining the perimeterand area of a polygonfeatureYou can determine the perimeter—or length—and area of a selectedpolygon feature by opening theGeography page of the FeatureProperties dialog box. ArcPaddynamically calculates theperimeter and area of the selectedpolygon and displays it in theGeography tab using the DisplayUnits. The perimeter and area arenot stored with the feature’sattributes.

The Feature Propertiesdialog box or custom editform is automaticallydisplayed after the newpolygon feature has beencreated.

8. On the custom edit form,type in the required ele-ments. If an edit form doesnot exist, on the Attributespage, tap the Property fieldto open the associated Valuetext box and type in attributedata. Use the Symbologypage to select a symbol foryour new feature.

9. Tap OK when you arefinished entering yourattribute and symbologyinformation.

Tapping the X buttoncancels the creation of yournew feature.

8

9

290 USING ARCPAD

Working with agraphics layerArcPad supports graphics layerfiles. The ArcPad GraphicsLayer (.apg) is an XML file thatcan store text, points, lines, andpolygons. It is used forredlining or to make freehandgeoreferenced edits in the field.Graphics layer files can beeasily imported into ArcGISDesktop. u

Creating a new graphicslayer


2. Tap New.

The New submenu appears.

3. Tap Graphics Layer.

4. Type the name of the newgraphics layer.

5. Choose the folder andlocation where you want tosave the new graphics layer.

6. Tap OK to complete the taskand create the new graphicslayer.

The graphics layer will becreated, added to your map,and checked for editing. TheEdit toolbar and Commandbar will be displayed, if theyare not already.

1

2

3

4

5

6


If you select the Graphics Layerfor editing, all previouslyselected layers are deselected.However, with the GraphicsLayer selected, you can thenselect up to two shapefiles forediting. In this case, theshapefiles take precedence overthe Graphics Layer whenediting, but you are still able toadd sketches and notes to yourArcPad map while adding orupdating features.

A graphics layer is differentthan a shapefile or vector layer.You can have many features ofdifferent types in one layersuch as a point feature, afreehand polygon feature, a linefeature, and text.

When editing a graphics layer,you can use any of the featuretypes—point, line, polyline,freehand line, rectangle,polygon, ellipse, circle,freehand polygon—to createfeatures for your layer. u

Creating a feature in yourgraphics layer

1. Use the Start/Stop Editingdropdown list to make thegraphics layer editable if it isnot already.

2. Select the feature type fromthe dropdown list, such asFreehand Polygon.

3. Draw the feature using themethods described in thischapter.

For Freehand Polygon, usethe pen to draw the polygon,while still holding the pen onthe map, or screen.

4. Lift the pen to create the newfeature in your graphics layer.

Your polygon feature iscreated as a graphic.

1

2

3

4See Also

Refer to the sections on creatingpoint, line, and polygon features inthis chapter for help creatingfeatures in your graphics layer.

Ch15.pmd 11/16/2005, 3:28 PM291

292 USING ARCPAD

In addition, you can associatetext to any feature you create inyour graphics layer including -text point, text line, textpolygon, text rectangle, and textellipse.

Using text on a feature inyour graphics layer

1. Use the Start/Stop Editingdropdown list to make thegraphics layer editable if it isnot already.

2. Select the text feature type(text point, text line, textpolygon, text rectangle, textellipse) from the dropdownlist, such as text ellipse.

3. Draw the feature using themethods described in thischapter.

4. Lift the pen to create the newfeature in your graphicslayer.u

Tip

Using the editing tools onfeatures in your graphicslayerUse any of the feature editing tools,such as move, rotate, resize, scale,and delete, on the features in yourgraphics layer. Use the vertextools, such as insert and appendvertices, on your polyline andpolygon features in your graphicslayers. Offsets and traverses canalso be used on your features. Inorder to use these feature editingtools on your graphics layer; thegraphics layer can be the onlyselected layer for editing.

1

2

3


A text dialog box is displayedfor the feature.

5. Type the text you would liketo include with your feature.

6. Uncheck the No FeatureSymbol checkbox to applysymbology to the graphic.

7. Tap the box for the featuresymbol. Use the SymbologyProperties dialog box toselect the symbol for yourgraphics feature.

8. Uncheck the No Text Symbolcheckbox.

9. Tap the box for the textsymbol. Use the LabellingProperties dialog box toselect the font type for thefeature.

10. Tap OK.

11.Your feature is created usingthe text and feature symbol-ogy you selected.

See Also

Refer to Chapter 7 ‘Symbolizingyour data’, for help using theSymbology and Labeling dialogboxes.

7

8

Q

W

9

5

6

Tip

Creating polyline andpolygon features in yourgraphics layerWhen you create a polyline orpolygon feature for your graphicslayer, you will need to use either theCommit Geometry Changes tocreate the feature without text orthe Proceed button to display theText dialog box. Both these buttonswill become enabled on theCommand bar once you havecaptured your first vertex.

Tip

Adding text to your polylineand polygon features inyour graphics layerArcPad gives you the option to addtext to your polyline and polygonfeatures created in your graphicslayer. Select text polyline or textpolygon tool from the feature typedropdown list before creating yourfeature. Alternatively, select anygraphic, open the feature proper-ties dialog box for the graphic, andadd text using the dialog displayed.

294 USING ARCPAD

Creatingrepeated featuresArcPad enables you to create anew feature, or a series offeatures, based on the attributeinformation of another feature.This capability is very usefulfor capturing a series of newfeatures that have attributeinformation in common.

Using the Repeat Attributesbutton, ArcPad will populatethe attribute information of anynew feature you create usingthe attribute information of apreviously selected feature. TheRepeat Attributes button can beused on any feature type.

It is not necessary to use theRepeated Attributes tool with aprevious feature of the samefeature type. For example, youcan capture points andpolygons, both with anInspection_date field. Allcommon fields for the new pointfeatures will be repeated for thepolygon features, and viceversa.

1. Create a new feature orselect a feature whoseattributes you would likerepeated when creating newfeatures.

2. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the Offset Pointbutton to display thedropdown list.

3. Tap Repeat Attributes.

A red box around the buttonindicates that the tool isactive.

4. With the feature type se-lected, such as the Pointfeature button, tap the screento create a new point feature.

5. The Feature Propertiesdialog box, or custom editform, is displayed and theattribute information ispopulated with the previouslyselected feature’sinformation.

6. Make any necessarychanges to the edit form orthe Attribute page.

7. Tap OK.

Your new feature is created.

1

2

3

4


Creatingsegmentedpolyline featuresArcPad enables you to createsegmented polyline features.With the Segment Polylinebutton activated, any newpolyline feature you createbegins at the end of yourpreviously selected line feature.This capability is very usefulfor capturing line features insuccession that may havedifferent attributes. Forexample, using the Segmentpolyline feature you can easilycapture a continuous road thathas been segmented based onits pavement conditions. Thistool is only available on thePolyline feature type.

1. Select the line feature whoseend you would like to be thestart of your new feature.

2. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the Point featuretype button to display thedropdown list and tapPolyline.

3. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the Offset Pointbutton to display thedropdown list.

4. Tap Segment Polyline

The Segment Polyline tool ispromoted to the Edit toolbar. u

See Also

Refer to Chapter 16 ‘Creating newfeatures with a GPS andrangefinder’, for help using theSegment Polyline tool with the AddGPS Vertex and Add GPS verticescontinuously buttons.

1

2 3

4

296 USING ARCPAD

5. The last vertex of the previ-ously selected feature ishighlighted using a blue box.This is the start vertex of yournew feature.

6. Tap the map at the location ofthe next vertex or vertices.

7. Tap Proceed to finish the linesegment.

8. Enter the information for thesegment using the FeatureProperties dialog box.

If a custom edit form exists, itwill be displayed. You canalso select the symbology forthe line feature or segment.

9. Tap OK.

The Segment Polyline toolwill be enabled on the Edittoolbar.

10. Tap the Segment Polylinetool.

11. Repeat Steps 5–10 tocontinue your segmentedpolyline.

Each time you capture asegmented feature, the nextfeature will begin at the endof the previously created, orselected, feature.

7

56

Tip

Undoing or cancelling youreditsUse the Undo tool to go back astep to the previously capturedvertex or use the Cancel Edits toolto erase all edits. These tools areonly enabled prior to tapping theProceed button. Once you tap theProceed button and tap ok on theFeature Properties dialog box,your edits cannot be undone.

Ch15.pmd 11/16/2005, 3:36 PM296


Working with OffsetsOffsets are used for GIS data collection in the followingsituations:

• When mapping the location of an inaccessible featurebecause it is either difficult to reach or it is in not safe toreach. For example, a tree on an island, or a manhole in themiddle of a busy road.

• When mapping the location of a feature where it is notpossible to get a GPS signal, or a GPS position of sufficientaccuracy. For example, under a large tree or in a narrow streetor ‘urban canyon’.

Offsets combine the use of use distance, bearing (or angle), and/or inclination (or slope) to determine the location of features. InArcPad, there are two types of offsets: simple and complex.

Simple offsets

A simple offset is performed on a polyline or polygon and onlyuses a distance measurement. Using a simple offset, you wouldmap a feature that is a constant distance away from a polylinecaptured via pen or GPS. You would also specify whether the newfeature is left or right of the captured polyline. For example, youcould map the distance of a new sidewalk to the left of and at adistance of 5 meters from the center of an existing road.

Diagramillustrating howdistance from aknown referencepoint to a featureand bearing to thefeature in relationto north arecalcualted.

Simple polyline and polygon offset dialog box.

Polyline (left) and polygon (right) using simple offsets in ArcPad.The blue line is the line captured. The red line is the offset linethat becomes the resultant feature when the feature iscompleted.

298 USING ARCPAD

Complex offsets

Complex offsets can be used for point features and vertices ofpolylines and polygons. Complex offsets use a combination ofdistance, bearing, and inclination measurements. ArcPadsupports 1 point offsets and 2 point offsets. A 1 point offset usesdistance and bearing measurements (distance-bearing) todetermine the offset. A 2 point offset uses either 2 distancemeasurements (distance-distance) or 2 bearing measurements(bearing-bearing) to calculate the offset. Inclination can be usedin combination with any of these offsets, if a height value isknown and you are storing your results in a shapefile thatsupports a z value.

1 point offset

A 1 point offset enables you to create a point or vertex offset froma single reference point. The reference point can be set using apen, GPS, or manually entered coordinates. A 1 point offset usesbearing and two other parameters such as slope distance,horizontal distance, vertical distance, or inclination to calculatethe offset. Refer to the diagrams below for an illustration of thedistance and bearing parameters.

Typically you would select a 1 point offset if you were using arangefinder that included a built-in compass. For example, youcould capture a tree (target) that was a distance of 15m and had abearing of 45 degrees from True North from your location, aknown reference point.

The Point/Vertex dialog box displaying the 1 pointoffset parameters.

Illustrations of how the three distance parameters (left) and bearing(right) measurements are calculated for a 1 point offset.


2 point offsets

A 2 point offset enables you to create a point based on tworeference points (A & B). The reference points can be set using apen, GPS, or manually entered coordinates. There are twovariations available in ArcPad for the 2 point offset: distance-distance and bearing -bearing. Typically you would use a 2 pointoffset to calculate point features rather than vertices for apolyline or polygon.

Distance-distance

A distance-distance offset is used when the bearings are notknown from the reference points but the distances are. Forexample, when you are using a rangefinder without a compass.The distance between the feature and the two reference points A& B are used to calculate the location of the feature. The feature’slocation is at the point where the two circles centered aroundreference points A and B intersect. Without a bearing, there aretwo possible solutions to this type of offset. You must, therefore,determine (and set) if the offset point is to the left or right of animaginary line between Reference points A & B. Vertical distanceor inclination are required if a correct 3- dimensional solution is tobe calculated.

M or Measure field

The Offset and 2 Point Offset pages in the Point/Vertex dialog boxinclude a box to enter a measure, or M, value for the target point.The x, y, and optionally z coordinates are calculated automaticallybut the M value needs to be entered manually. The M field is nota default field in a shapefile, and therefore must be created whenthe shapefile is created. Data can only be entered in this input boxif the editable shapefile contains an M field.


With a distance-distance offset, the feature is located at the point wheretwo circles centered on reference points A & B intersect.

300 USING ARCPAD

Bearing-bearing

A bearing-bearing offset is used when two bearings are knownfor the reference points but the distances are not. For example,when you are using a compass without a rangefinder. The bearingfrom north from each of the two reference points A & B is used tocalculate the location of the feature. The feature’s location is atthe point where the two bearing lines intersect. Vertical distanceor inclination are required if a correct 3- dimensional solution is tobe calculated.

By default, a 2 Point Offset in ArcPad is bearing-bearing. Toactivate the distance-distance solution, tap the bearing dropdownand set the location of the offset point. The distance-distancesolution requires that you nominate which side of the A-B line theoffset point lies. Once activated, the distance fields can becompleted. With a rangefinder active, the fields are automaticallypopulated.

With a bearing-bearing offset, the feature is located at the point where iftwo lines, extended from the bearing angles for reference points A & B,intersect.



Traverses in ArcPad enable you to create polylines and polygonsusing offsets. In ArcPad, there are two types of traverses: LinearTraverse and Radial Traverse.

Linear Traverse

A linear traverse enables you to capture the vertex of a polyline orpolygon from a known point as you walk along a traverse. Inother words, you begin at point A, capture point B, move to pointB, capture point C, move to point C, and so on. With a lineartraverse, you are always using a moving reference point, that is,the last point you captured.

You can capture points in a linear traverse using foresight orbacksight. With foresight, you are standing at a knowncoordinate, such as reference point A, and you are shooting thetarget, such as the vertex of your feature. With backsight, you arestanding at your target, such as the vertex of your feature, andyou are shooting back to a known coordinate, such as referencepoint A. Use the Options page in the Point/Vertex dialog box toset foresight or backsight.

Radial Traverse

A radial traverse uses 1 or 2 fixed reference points and creates atraverse relative to those fixed points. In other words, you beginat point A and capture the points around the perimeter of A. Youare always standing at the same fixed point while you arecapturing multiple vertices. The diagram below shows how avertex in a line is calculated using a linear traverses versus aradial traverse, using 1 or 2 reference points.

Illustration of linear traverse and radial traverse.

Illustration of foresight and backsight when performing a linear traverse.

Working with Traverses

302 USING ARCPAD

Other options for offsets

When working with offsets you can set other options orparameters on the Options page in the Point/Vertex dialog box orin the GPS Preferences. These parameters are typically consideredconstants versus the parameters that you would set to calculateindividual offset such as slope distance, vertical distance,horizontal distance, and inclination.

Constant parameters might be set at the beginning of a datacollection task and only changed as needed. The following areset on the Options page of the Point/Vertex dialog box:

• Foresight: Looking forward to and shooting at your targetfrom a known reference point.

• Backsight: Looking back at and shooting from your target to aknown reference point.

• North Reference: Set your bearing to be calculated from Truenorth or Magnetic declination read from a GPS (if available).

• Observer Height: Height of rangefinder in relation to areference point at ground level.

• Target Height: Height of target above ground. By default, thetarget height is 0 or unknown. If the target height is knownand specified, the resulting coordinate will be the XYZ valueof the feature at ground level; the target height is subtracted.If the target height is not known (value of 0), the resultingcoordinate will be the XYZ value of the actual target.

For example, if you are capturing insulators on power polesthat always have a fixed height, you have two options. If youdo not specify a target height, then the height stored with thefeature is the height of the insulators. If you specify the targetheight, the captured feature (insulators) would have thecoordinates of the power pole at ground level.

In another scenario where you are capturing treetop heights,the target height would be set to 0 since the height of thetrees is always changing. The captured heights of thetreetops would therefore be the height of the treetops aboveground.

• GPS Height: Height of GPS in relation to ground level. TheGPS Height is set in the GPS Preferences dialog box.

The Point/Vertex dialog box displaying theOptions page.


Performingsimple offsetsA simple offset is performed on apolyline or polygon and uses aspecified offset distance. Theoffset distance can be based onan existing feature or othercriteria such as distance from athe current GPS position.

Using a simple offset, you could,for example, map a line featurethat is a given distance awayfrom an existing line feature. Youwould then specify whether thenew feature is left or right of thecaptured line.

Using simple offsets tocreate new polyline andpolygon features

1. Make the target layereditable using the Start/StopEditing dropdown list.

2. Tap the dropdown arrow tothe right of the Offset Pointbutton.

3. Tap Offset Polyline/Polygon.

A red box around the OffsetPolyline/Polygon buttonindicates that it is active. u

1

2

3

304 USING ARCPAD

The Poly Offset dialog box isdisplayed.

4. Tap the left or right checkboxto determine the relativeposition of the offset.

5. Specify the Distance value.

6. Tap OK. u

4

5

6


7. Tap the polyline—orpolygon—button from theFeature Type dropdown list.

8. Tap the screen where youwant to begin your newfeature and continue addingthe required vertices.

As you add vertices to yournew line or polygon, a redline at the offset distance willbe displayed. This is whereyour new feature will becreated.

9. Tap Proceed when you arefinished capturing your newfeature.

The Feature Propertiesdialog box is displayed.

10. Enter the information for thenew feature.

11. Tap OK.

12. Your new feature is drawn atthe specified distance of20m from the existingpolygon feature.

Tip

Using the snappingenvironment with offsetsYou can set the snapping options sothat your reference line, or captureline, snaps to an existing feature. 7

8

9

E

Ch15.pmd 11/16/2005, 3:43 PM305

306 USING ARCPAD

Using a 1 pointoffsetA 1 point offset enables you tocreate a point or vertex offsetfrom a single reference point. Thereference point can be set usinga pen, GPS, or manually enteredcoordinates. A 1 point offsetuses bearing and two otherparameters such as slopedistance, horizontal distance,vertical distance, or inclination tocalculate the offset.

Creating a new pointfeature using a 1 pointoffset

1. Make the point layer editableusing the Start/Stop Editingdropdown list.

2. Tap the dropdown arrow nextto the Offset Point button todisplay the dropdown list. Bydefault, the Offset Pointbutton is displayed on theEdit toolbar.

3. Tap the Offset Point button.

4. Tap Set Reference Point A.

A red box around the OffsetPoint and Set ReferencePoint A buttons indicates thatthey are active. u

Tip

Using the snappingenvironment with referencepointsUse snapping to create yourreference point at the location of anexisting point feature or vertex of aline or polygon feature.

1

2

3

4


5. Tap the screen to set refer-ence point A.

6. Tap the Point feature button.

7. If you have a rangefinderactivated, shoot your targetor simply tap the screen atthe location of your feature.

The Point/Vertex dialog boxopens on the Offset page.

8. Verify that the information inthe fields is accurate.

9. Tap OK.

The Feature Propertiesdialog box is displayed withan edit form, if it exists. Enterthe information for the newfeature.

10. Tap OK.


5

8

9

OpensVertexdialog

box.

Tip

Using a GPS to set thereference pointsArcPad will automatically use thecurrent GPS position for thereference point if data is receivedfrom a rangefinder and there is nocurrent reference point defined, andeither Offset Point, LinearTraverse, or Radial Traverse areenabled.

See Also

Refer to Chapter 12, ‘Using yourrangefinder’, for information onhow to use your rangefinder withArcPad.

7

Ch15.pmd 11/16/2005, 3:46 PM307

308 USING ARCPAD

Using a 2 pointoffsetA 2 point offset enables you tocreate a point based on tworeference points (A & B). Thereference points can be set usinga pen, GPS, or manually enteredcoordinates. There are twovariations available in ArcPad forthe 2 point offset: distance-distance and bearing-bearing. u

Creating a new pointfeature using a 2 pointoffset



The Offset Point button isdepressed on the Edittoolbar and a red box isplaced around the OffsetPoint button in the dropdownlist to indicate that it is active.

3. Tap the dropdown arrow nextto the Offset Point button andtap Set Reference Point A.


5. Tap the dropdown arrow nextto the Offset Point button andtap Set Reference Point B.

6. Tap the screen to set refer-ence point B.

7. If you have a rangefinderactivated, shoot your targetfrom each reference point orsimply tap the screen at thelocation of your feature. u

See Also

Refer to Chapter 12, ‘Using yourrangefinder’, for information onhow to connect your rangefinderand use it with ArcPad.

7

1

2

46

Tip



The Point/Vertex dialog boxopens on the 2 Point Offsetpage.

8. Make any necessarychanges to the informationthat is displayed.

If you are using a rangefinderwithout a compass, you willneed to specify whether thepoint you are capturing is tothe left or to the right of animaginary line betweenreference points A & B. Youwill also need to shoot ameasurement twice, once foreach distance from eachreference point.

If you are only using acompass, you will be usingtwo bearing measurementsto calculate the offset.

9. Tap OK.


10.Tap OK.

11.Your new feature is created.

A distance-distance offset isused when the bearings are notknown from the reference pointsbut the distances are. Forexample, when you are using arangefinder without a compass.

A bearing-bearing offset is usedwhen two bearings are known forthe reference points but thedistances are not. For example,when you are using a compasswithout a rangefinder.

8

W

9

310 USING ARCPAD

Creating a lineartraverseA linear traverse enables you tocapture the vertex of a polyline orpolygon from a known point asyou walk along a line. In otherwords, you begin at point A,capture point B, move to point B,capture point C, move to point C,and so on.

You can capture points in a lineartraverse using foresight orbacksight:

• Foresight: Looking forward toand shooting at your targetfrom a known reference point.

• Backsight: Looking back atand shooting from yourtarget to a known referencepoint.

1. Make the polyline or polygonlayer editable using the Start/Stop Editing dropdown list.

2. Tap the dropdown arrow nextto the Offset Point button.

3. Tap Linear Traverse.

4. Tap the dropdown arrow nextto the Point button.

5. Tap the Polyline -or polygon-feature type. u

Tip

Enabling the traverse toolsThe Linear and Radial Traversetools will only be enabled if apolyline or polygon layer is set aseditable.

1

2

3

5


6. Tap the screen to capture thefirst vertex of the line -orpolygon.

7. The XYZ page of the Point/Vertex dialog box isdisplayed.

If you have a GPS activated,tap the GPS button to capturethe incoming coordinates.

8. Tap OK. u

7

8

6

Tip


312 USING ARCPAD

9. With a rangefinder, shoot thenext feature from the locationof the first feature (foresight).Alternatively, shoot back tothe first vertex (target) fromthe location of the secondvertex (backsight). Simply tapthe screen if you do not havea rangefinder connected.

The Point/Vertex dialog box isdisplayed on the Offset page.

10.Tap OK.

11. Continue adding verticesuntil your line or polygon isfinished. u

See Also

Refer to Chapter 12, ‘Using yourrangefinder’, for information onhow to connect your rangefinderand use it with ArcPad.

Q

W

9

Tip

Foresight versus backsightYou can use foresight or backsightto capture vertices in yourtraverse. Set foresight or backsighton the Options page of the Point/Vertex dialog box.

Tip

Using the measure toolwith offsetsYou can use the measure tool in‘traverse’ mode to perform anaccurate measure in the fieldwithout capturing a feature. To doso, simply activate the LinearTraverse tool before enabling theMeasure tool.


12.Tap Proceed when you arefinished creating your line orpolygon.


13.Tap OK.


E

Tip


314 USING ARCPAD

Creating a radialtraverseA radial traverse uses 1 fixedreference point to create atraverse relative to that fixedpoint. In other words, you beginat point A and capture the pointsaround the perimeter of A. Youare always standing at the samefixed point but you are capturingmultiple vertices.

1. Make the polyline or polygonlayer editable using the Start/Stop Editing dropdown list.


3. Tap Radial Traverse.



6. Tap the screen to set thereference point. u

Tip

Enabling the traverse toolsThe Linear and Radial Traversetools will only be enabled if apolyline or polygon layer is set aseditable.

1

2

3

5

Tip



8. Tap the dropdown arrow nextto the Point button and selectthe Polygon -or Polyline -feature type.

9. With a rangefinder, shoot thetarget (first vertex) fromReference Point A.

The Point/Vertex dialog boxis displayed on the Offsetpage.

10.Continue shooting yourvertices from Reference A.

11.Tap Proceed when you arefinished creating your line orpolygon.


12.Tap OK.


8

Q

W

9

Tip


IN THIS CHAPTER

317

Creating new features with a GPS and rangefinder 16• GPS Quality, Capture, and Alerts

options

• Creating point features with a GPS

• Creating line features with a GPS

• Creating polygon features with aGPS

• Creating a point feature using a1 point offset and a rangefinder

It’s easy to create new features using the editing tools in ArcPad. First,select the layers for which you want to create the new features. Then selectthe appropriate tool and use the mouse pointer, pen, or incoming GPScoordinates to digitize the feature.

You can use the editing tools to create new point, line, or polygon features.To create point features, tap once on the map or tap the GPS Point button.To create line or polygon features, use the mouse pointer, pen, or incomingGPS coordinates to digitize the vertices that make up that feature. The newfeature is saved in the selected layer of the same feature type.

You can specify various quality and capture options when using the incomingGPS coordinates. You can also set alert messages and sounds to be activatedwhen a specific GPS quality setting is not met. In addition, you can useoffsets and a rangefinder to determine the location of your point feature.

318 USING ARCPAD

GPS Quality, Capture, and Alerts options

ArcPad includes a number of user-specified options that can beused to control which of the incoming GPS coordinates are usedfor creating and editing features. You can use these options toensure that ArcPad only uses those GPS coordinates that meetyour accuracy requirements for data capture. ArcPad uses thespecified options to filter the incoming GPS coordinates andignores those coordinates that do not meet the requirements. Thespecified options have no influence on how the GPS receiveractually computes the position coordinates, nor do they affectthe way ArcPad displays the GPS position or coordinates, in theGPS Position Window, for example.

The GPS Quality, Capture, and Alerts options can be specified inthe respective pages in the GPS Preferences dialog box.

Quality options

The Quality options allow you to specify the followingparameters:

• Maximum Position Dilution of Precision (PDOP) and EstimatedPosition Error (EPE) values for the GPS position coordinates.

Suitable maximum values will depend on the environment inwhich you are using the GPS receiver. For example, a PDOP of5 could be appropriate when working in an open field but maybe too low when working in an urban environment. It is bestto refer to your GPS receiver’s manual for an appropriatemaximum PDOP or EPE value. In general, a maximum PDOPvalue of 6 is acceptable.

• DGPS Mode Only: only uses incoming GPS coordinates thathave been real-time differentially corrected.

• 3D Mode Only: at least four satellites are available and areused by the GPS receiver to calculate the x,y, and z positioncoordinates.

More than one quality parameter can be active at any time. Aquality parameter is active when the parameter’s check box ischecked and either Non-Compulsory or Compulsory Warningshave been selected.

The GPS Quality options are enabled, or disabled, by selectingone of three different warning levels:

• No Warnings (default) disables any selected Qualityparameters. ArcPad ignores the Quality parameters and usesany incoming GPS coordinate for creating and editingfeatures.

Quality options

CREATING NEW FEATURES WITH A GPS AND RANGEFINDER 319

• Non-Compulsory Warnings display a message box when anactive Quality parameter has not been met and give you theoption of whether or not to use the substandard GPScoordinate.

• Compulsory Warnings display a message box when an activeQuality parameter has not been met. No option is provided touse the substandard GPS coordinate, thereby enforcing thespecified GPS Quality setting.

The Non-Compulsory and Compulsory Warnings message boxesare only displayed when ArcPad is in the process of using theincoming GPS coordinates for creating or editing a point or vertex.However, the corresponding alerts for each of the four Qualityparameters can be activated at any time if the Non-Compulsory orCompulsory Warnings have been selected.

Capture options

The Capture options allow you to specify position averaging andstreaming interval parameters.

The averaging parameters specify the number of incoming GPSposition coordinates that ArcPad should use for calculating anaverage coordinate. The resultant average coordinate is thenused by ArcPad for creating the point or vertex. The number ofpositions to average can be specified for points and vertices.Averaging is enabled when the Enable Averaging check box ischecked.

It is best that you refer to your GPS receiver’s manual for anappropriate number of GPS positions to average; however, it isrecommended that you average at least 20 GPS positions andpreferably up to 180 positions.

The Streaming Vertices Interval parameters allow you to specifyhow frequently ArcPad should use the incoming GPS coordinateswhen creating vertices with the Add GPS Vertices Continuouslytool. For example, a Position Interval of 2 means that ArcPad willuse every second-incoming GPS coordinate when creatingvertices. The default Position Interval is 1. A Distance Interval of2 means that ArcPad will only use the incoming GPS coordinatewhen the distance from the last coordinate is 2 meters or more.

Capture options

320 USING ARCPAD

A dialog box is automatically displayed each time ArcPadaverages GPS coordinates. The dialog box shows a progress bar,which counts down from the specified number of GPS positionsto average to zero. For example, the following dialog box isdisplayed while averaging to create a vertex:

Alerts options

The Alerts options allow you to specify which message boxes aredisplayed and which sounds are played when an alert conditionis encountered by ArcPad.

You can enable the following alerts:

• No GPS data being receivedThis alert is activated when the GPS has been activated butArcPad is not receiving any messages from the GPS receiver.

Alerts optionsPoint/Vertex dialog box


• Maximum PDOP exceededThis alert is activated when the specified maximum PDOP hasbeen exceeded and the Non-Compulsory or CompulsoryWarnings have been selected. The maximum PDOP andwarnings are specified in the Quality options.

• Maximum EPE exceededThis alert is activated when the specified maximum EPE hasbeen exceeded and the Non-Compulsory or CompulsoryWarnings have been selected. The maximum EPE andwarnings are specified in the Quality options.

• No current position fixThis alert is activated when the GPS is not able to calculate aposition fix, and therefore ArcPad is not currently receivingposition coordinates from the GPS. The GPS may not be ableto calculate a position fix if, for example, the number of visiblesatellites is less than 3.

• No DGPS fixThis alert is activated when the incoming GPS positioncoordinates are not differentially corrected and the DGPSMode Only and the Non-Compulsory or CompulsoryWarnings have been selected. These warnings are specified inthe Quality options.

• Not a 3D fixThis alert is activated when the incoming GPS positioncoordinates are x,y coordinates—with no z coordinate—andthe 3D Mode Only and the Non-Compulsory or CompulsoryWarnings have been selected. These warnings are specified inthe Quality options.

• Approaching DestinationThis alert is activated when the distance from the current GPSposition to the selected navigation destination is less than thespecified DST Distance Alert. The DST Distance Alert isspecified in the Location options.

The alert message boxes are enabled by checking the alert’svisible check box. The sounds are enabled by checking the alert’ssound check box. You can enable the message box or sound orboth for any number of alerts. The Play button plays the soundfor the associated alert. You can change the sound for any alertby tapping on the alert’s Sound Name column and selecting aWave Sound (*.wav) file located on your computer.

The ArcPad Reference Guide provides more information on theGPS Quality, Capture, and Alerts options for ArcPad.

Sound

VisiblePlay

Options for alert message boxes

322 USING ARCPAD

Creating pointfeatures with aGPSCreating a point feature usingthe incoming GPS coordinatesinvolves the following steps:

1. Select a point layer forediting via the Start/StopEditing dropdown list or theTable of Contents.

2. Activate the GPS.

3. Tap the GPS Point button onthe Edit toolbar to create apoint feature.

4. Type in attributes for thenew point feature.

1. Tap the GPS Point button tocapture a new point featureat the current GPS position.

The Feature Propertiesdialog box or custom editform is automatically dis-played after the new pointfeature has been created. u

See Also


1


2. The Geography page showsa progress bar, which countsdown from the specifiednumber of GPS positions toaverage to zero.

3. Scroll and tap Attributes todisplay the Attributes page.Type the attributes for thenew point feature.

4. Tap OK to save the attributes,close the edit form—or theFeature Properties dialogbox—and complete the newpoint feature.

If you tap OK before theaveraging is complete, adialog box will display askingwhether you want toterminate the GPS positionaveraging.

You can also tap the X buttonif you want to cancel thecapture of the new pointfeature. The point feature andany attributes that have beentyped in will be deleted.

Tip

Enabling GPS positionaveraging for pointsGPS position averaging for pointsis enabled in the Capture page ofthe GPS Preferences dialog box.You can also specify the number ofGPS positions for ArcPad toaverage.

Tip

Typing in attributes duringposition averagingYou can type in attributes (in theAttributes page or a custom editform) without waiting for theposition averaging to be completed.This is particularly useful if youhave specified a large number ofGPS positions to average. ArcPadwill continue averaging even afterthe required number of GPSpositions has been received andaveraged. Averaging will stop onceyou have tapped the ok button.

3

4

2

324 USING ARCPAD

1. Tap the arrow to the right ofthe Feature tool to displaythe dropdown list. Tap thePolyline feature tool.

The Add GPS Vertex and AddGPS Vertices Continuouslybuttons are enabled if theGPS is activated.

2. Tap the Add GPS Vertexbutton each time you want touse the current GPS positioncoordinates to capture avertex.

The vertices are drawn witha blue box and joined with aline using the currentselection color.

At any time, tap and holdanywhere on the map todisplay the Capture menu.Refer to the Creating linefeatures task for moreinformation on the Capturemenu. Use the Capture menuto create vertices at specifiedx,y coordinates or relative tothe last vertex or the currentGPS position. You can alsodelete the last vertex.

3. The Point/Vertex dialog boxis automatically displayed ifGPS position averaging isenabled for vertices.

The Point/Vertex dialog boxshows a progress bar, whichcounts down from thespecified number of GPSpositions to average until itreaches zero. u

Tip

Enabling GPS positionaveraging for verticesGPS position averaging forvertices is enabled in the Capturepage of the GPS Preferences dialogbox. You can also specify thenumber of GPS positions forArcPad to average.

Creating linefeatures with aGPSCreating a line feature using theincoming GPS coordinatesinvolves the following steps:

1. Select a line layer for editingvia the Start/Stop Editingdropdown list or the Tableof Contents.


3. Tap the Polyline button tostart capturing a line feature.

4. Tap the Add GPS Vertexbutton to capture a singlevertex, or tap the Add GPSVertices Continuouslybutton to capture streamingvertices.

5. Tap the Proceed button onthe Command bar tocomplete the capture of theline feature.

6. Type in attributes for thenew line feature.

3

1 2


If you tap OK before theaveraging is complete, adialog box will display askingwhether you want toterminate the GPS positionaveraging.

Tap the X button to cancelthe capture of the vertex.

4. Tap the Add GPS VerticesContinuously button to usethe incoming GPS coordi-nates for capturing vertices ina streaming mode. A vertexwill be captured each timeArcPad receives a coordi-nate from the GPS. Verticesare captured according to thespecified streaming verticesposition and distanceintervals.

5. Tap the Proceed button tocomplete the new linefeature.

The Feature Propertiesdialog box, or custom editform, is automaticallydisplayed after the new linefeature has been created.


For example, tap on theProperty field STREET_NAMto open the associated Valuetext box and type the streetname value of “New”.

7. Tap OK.

Tip

Changing the streamingvertices position anddistance intervalsBy default, the Add GPS VerticesContinuously mode captures avertex each time ArcPad receives acoordinate from the GPS. This maybe too frequent and result in thecapture of unnecessary vertices.You can increase the streamingvertices position and distanceintervals in the Capture page of theGPS Preferences dialog box.

Tip

Creating GPS pointfeatures while capturing apolyline featureThe GPS Point button will beenabled—if a point layer is activefor editing—even while the Polylinebutton is active and a line feature isin the process of being captured.While capturing a polyline, you cantap the GPS Point button to capturea point feature without having tofirst end the capture of the linefeature. You will need to pausestreaming GPS data capture if it isactive.

Tip

Pausing streaming GPSdata captureArcPad continuously capturesvertices in a streaming mode whenthe Add GPS Vertices Continuouslytool is active. Tap the Add GPSVertices Continuously button topause or stop capturing vertices.Tap the button again to resumecapturing vertices.

4

5

326 USING ARCPAD

1. Tap the arrow to the right ofthe feature tool to display thedropdown list. Tap thePolygon feature tool.

The Add GPS Vertex and AddGPS Vertices Continuouslybuttons are enabled if theGPS is activated.

2. Tap the Add GPS Vertexbutton each time you want touse the current GPS positioncoordinates to capture avertex.

The vertices are drawn with ablue box and joined with aline.

At any time, you can tap andhold anywhere on the map todisplay the Capture menu.Refer to the Creating linefeatures task for moreinformation on the Capturemenu. Use the Capture menuto create vertices at specifiedx,y coordinates or relative tothe last vertex or the currentGPS position. You can alsodelete the last vertex.

3. The Vertex dialog box isautomatically displayed ifGPS position averaging isenabled for vertices.

The Vertex dialog box showsa progress bar, which countsdown from the specifiednumber of GPS positions toaverage until it reacheszero. u

Tip

Enabling GPS positionaveraging for verticesGPS position averaging forvertices is enabled in the Capturepage of the GPS Preferences dialogbox. You can also specify thenumber of GPS positions forArcPad to average.

Creating polygonfeatures with aGPSCreating a polygon featureusing the incoming GPScoordinates involves thefollowing steps:

1. Select a polygon layer forediting via the Start/StopEditing dropdown list or theTable of Contents.


3. Tap the Polygon button tostart capturing a polygonfeature.

4. Tap the Add GPS Vertexbutton to capture a singlevertex or tap the Add GPSVertices Continuouslybutton to capture streamingvertices.

5. Tap the Proceed button tocomplete the capture of thepolygon feature.

6. Type in attributes for thenew polygon feature.

3

1 2


Tapping OK before theaveraging is complete willdisplay a dialog box askingwhether you want to termi-nate the GPS positionaveraging. Tap the X buttonto cancel the capture of thevertex.

4. Tap the Add GPS VerticesContinuously button to usethe incoming GPS coordi-nates for capturing vertices ina streaming mode. A vertexwill be captured each timeArcPad receives a coordi-nate from the GPS, based onthe specified streamingvertices position and stream-ing intervals.

5. Tap the Proceed button tocomplete the capture of thenew polygon feature.

ArcPad will automaticallyclose the polygon by addinga final vertex with the samecoordinates as the firstvertex.

The Feature Propertiesdialog box, or custom editform, is automaticallydisplayed after the newpolygon feature has beencreated.


7. Tap OK.

Tip

Undoing or canceling youreditsUse the Undo tool to go back astep to the previously capturedvertex or use the Cancel Edits toolto erase all edits. These tools areonly enabled prior to tapping theProceed button. Once you tap theProceed button and tap ok on theFeature Properties dialog box,your edits cannot be undone.

4

5

328 USING ARCPAD

See Also

Refer to Chapter 15, ‘Creating newfeatures’, for help using offsets.

See Also

Refer to Chapter 12, ‘Using yourrangefinder’, for help on activatingthe rangefinder.

Creating a pointfeature using a 1point offset and arangefinderCreating a point feature usingoffsets and a rangefinderinvolves the following steps:

1. Select a point layer forediting via the Start/StopEditing dropdown list or theTable of Contents.

2. Activate the rangefinder.


4. Set Reference Point A.

5. Tap the Point feature button.

6. Shoot the target fromReference Point A using arangefinder.

7. Type in attributes for thenew point feature.


2. Tap the dropdown arrow nextto the Offset Point button todisplay the dropdown list. Bydefault, the Offset Pointbutton is displayed on theEdit toolbar.



A red box around the OffsetPoint and Set ReferencePoint A buttons indicates thatthey are active. u

1

3

4

2



To use a GPS to set thereference point, refer to theTip on this page.

6. With your rangefinderactivated, shoot your target.

The Point/Vertex dialog boxopens on the Offset pagewith the bearing and slopedistance information dis-played from the rangefinder.

7. Tap OK.


8. Tap OK.


Tip

Using a GPS to set thereference pointsIf you have a GPS activated, youcan set the reference point using theincoming GPS coordinates. Tap theSurvey button to display the Vertexdialog box. Tap the GPS button onthe Vertex dialog box to capture theincoming GPS coordinates as yourreference point.

Tip

Using the snapping optionsto set the reference pointat an existing featureYou can set the reference point to beat the location of an existing pointor vertex by selecting snap tovertex or point for that layer on theSnapping page in the Table ofContents.

5

7

6

OpenstheVertexdialogbox.

IN THIS CHAPTER

331

Editing existing features 17• Extending a line

• Inserting and deleting vertices

• Moving a vertex

• Moving a vertex using offsets

• Changing the size of a feature

• Editing attributes

This chapter shows you how to modify features that already exist in yourvector data or shapefiles. The editing tools, commands, and tasks provide avariety of ways to make changes to the geometry and attributes of existingfeatures. For example, you can extend a line by adding vertices to the startor end of the line. You can also reshape line and polygon features by adding,moving, or deleting vertices. Editing of existing features is done using themouse pointer, pen, incoming GPS coordinates, or offsets.

332 USING ARCPAD

Extending a lineYou can extend a line feature byadding, or appending, verticesto the tail (end) of the line. TheAppend Vertices tool isselected via the FeatureProperties dropdown list.

In order to extend a line featureat the head (start) of a line, youcan use the Insert Vertices tool.Refer to the next exercise tolearn how to use the InsertVertices tool.

Vertices can be added by usingthe pen, incoming GPS coordi-nates, offsets, or by typing incoordinates.

1. Select a line layer for editingusing the Start/Stop Editingdropdown list or via the Tableof Contents.


3. Select the the line featureyou wish to extend.

4. Tap the dropdown arrow nextto the Feature Propertiesbutton to display thedropdown list.

5. Tap Append Vertices.

The vertices will be displayedusing a gray square. Thehead, or start, vertex isdisplayed with a bold square.All other vertices are dis-played with normal squares.u

Tip

Changing the size of thevertex symbolsVertices are displayed using asquare symbol. You can change thesize of the square by changing thePen Tolerance in the Display pageof the ArcPad Options dialog box.

See Also

Selecting features for editing isdiscussed in Chapter 14, ‘Editingbasics’.

2

3

4

1

5

EDITING EXISTING FEATURES 333

6. Tap the map to add verticesand extend the line.

You can only append verticesto the end or tail of the line.

7. Tap the Commit GeometryChanges button on theCommand bar when you arefinished extending the line.

The new vertices are addedto your line feature.

8. To exit the append verticesmode, tap any other tool toactivate it and deactivate theAppend Vertices tool.

Tip

Adding vertices with a GPSYou can also use the Add GPSVertex and Add GPS VerticesContinuously buttons to addvertices. These buttons are onlyenabled if you have a GPS receiverconnected and activated.

6

7

8

334 USING ARCPAD

Inserting anddeleting verticesYou can easily add (insert)vertices to or delete verticesfrom a selected line or polygonfeature using the Insert Vertexand Delete Vertex commands.By adding or deleting vertices,you can reshape a feature whenchanges in your geographicdata are necessary.

Inserting a vertex

1. Select a line or polygon layerfor editing using the Start/Stop Editing dropdown list orvia the Table of Contents.


3. Select the line—or polygon—feature.


5. Tap Insert Vertices.

The vertices will be displayedusing a gray square. u

3

2 4

1

5


6. Tap on the map at the exactlocation where you want thevertex, or vertices, inserted.

Vertices are added to theline—or polygon—and thefeature is reshaped.

7. Tap the Commit GeometryChanges button on theCommand bar when you arefinished adding vertices.

The new vertices are addedto your line—or polygon—feature.

8. To exit the insert verticesmode, tap any other tool toactivate it and deactivate theInsert Vertices tool.

6

7

Tip

Inserting vertices using thesnapping environmentYou can turn snapping on in theTable of Contents so that newvertices are inserted at the edge,end, or vertex of an existingfeature.

8

Tip

Adding vertices with a GPSYou can also use the Add GPSVertex and Add GPS VerticesContinuously buttons to addvertices. These buttons are onlyenabled if you have a GPS receiverconnected and activated.

Featurewith

addedvertices

Tip


336 USING ARCPAD

Deleting a vertex

1. Tap the Select & VertexEditing button.


3. Tap and hold within the bluevertex square that you wantto delete to display the MoveTo menu.

4. Tap Delete Vertex.

Repeat Steps 3 and 4 foreach vertex you would like todelete.

5. Tap the Commit GeometryChanges button on theCommand bar when you arefinished.

The vertices are deleted fromthe line—or polygon—andthe feature is reshaped.

3

2

4

1

5

Tip



Moving a vertexMoving a vertex in a line orpolygon offers another way tomodify or reshape a feature.

ArcPad lets you move a vertexin several ways: by dragging it,by specifying new x,y coordi-nates, by moving it to thecurrent GPS position, or byusing offsets.

Dragging a vertex



3. Tap and drag the vertex tothe desired location.

4. Tap the Commit GeometryChanges button on theCommand bar when you arefinished.

The vertices are moved andthe feature is reshaped.

See Also

Moving points is discussed inChapter 14,’Editing basics’.

3

2

4

1

Tip

Snapping vertices toexisting featuresYou can turn snapping on in theTable of Contents so that whenyour vertex is dragged it snaps tothe edge, end, or vertex of anexisting feature.

338 USING ARCPAD

Using the Move Tocommand to move avertex to a specific x,ycoordinate or GPSposition



3. Tap and hold within the bluevertex square to display theMove To menu.

4. Tap Move To. u

32 4

1


5. Type the desired coordinatesin the XYZ page of the Point/Vertex dialog box.

6. Tap OK.

Alternatively, tap Move ToGPS in step 5 and the vertexwill be moved to the currentGPS position.

7. Tap the Commit GeometryChanges button on theCommand bar.

The vertex is moved to thespecified coordinates, andthe feature is reshaped.

5

6

Tip

Moving a vertex to thecurrent GPS positionYou can also tap the GPS button,on either the Move To dialog boxor the Vertex dialog box, to movethe vertex to the current GPSposition. (You can open the Vertexdialog box by tapping a coordinatein the Geography page of theFeature Properties dialog box.)These GPS buttons are onlyenabled if a GPS receiver isconnected and activated.

See Also

Refer to Chapter 9, ‘Connectingyour GPS receiver’, for moreinformation on connecting yourGPS receiver.

GPSbutton

340 USING ARCPAD

Using Offsets to move avertex


2. Select the polygon—or line—feature.

3. Tap and hold within the bluevertex square to display theMove To menu.

4. Tap Move To. u

Moving a vertexusing offsetsIf you are unable to reach thevertex, cannot receive a strongGPS signal, or are using arangefinder, you can use offsetsto move the vertex of a line orpolygon.

In order to move a vertex of anexisting line or polygon, youmust use the Move To menu toopen the Point/Vertex dialogbox. In the Point/Vertex dialogbox, select the Offset page tocapture your offset.

Alternatively, you can use theRadial Traverse tool. The RadialTraverse tool requires that youset a reference point, either bytapping the screen or by usinga GPS receiver.

1

2

34

See AlsoFor more information about usingoffsets, see Chapter 15, ‘Creatingnew features’.


The point/vertex dialog box isdisplayed.

5. Tap the Offset page.

6. Tap the Tripod button to setthe reference point from theincoming GPS coordinates.

7. Capture the bearing, dis-tance, and optionallyinclination values using yourangefinder.

8. Tap ok on the Point/Vertexdialog box.

Your vertex is moved to thenew position.

Tip

Using Radial Traverse tomove a vertexYou can move the selected vertexusing Radial Traverse and the 1 or2 Point Offset capabiltity in thePoint/Vertex dialog box. Set onereference point or two referencepoints before selecting your vertex.Setting two reference points is onlyrequired for 2 point offsets such asDistance-Distance or Bearing-Bearing.

7

8 5

6

342 USING ARCPAD

Using the Geographypage to move a vertex toa specific x,y coordinate


The Feature Propertiesbutton is enabled once afeature is selected.


3. Tap the Geography tab todisplay the Geography page.

The Geography pageincludes a table that listseach vertex and its x, y, and zcoordinates. Vertex number 0is the head. The last vertex inthe table is the tail.

4. Double-tap the vertexcoordinate that you want tochange. u

Tip

Displaying the GeographypageThe Geography page can be usedto move a vertex to a specificx,y coordinate. The layer that youare editing may have an associatedcustom edit form. If it does, theFeature Properties dialog box willhave additional tabs displayed tothe left of the Attributes tab and leftand right arrow buttons fornavigating between the tabs. Tapthe right arrow button until theGeography tab is displayed. TheGeography tab is always the lasttab displayed.

The custom edit form may hide theAttributes or Geography pages ofthe Feature Properties dialog box.If this is the case, then you willneed to use the Move To tool tomove the vertex.

Tip

Resizing the columns in theGeography pageYou can resize the columns in theGeography page by tapping anddragging the vertical columnseparator.

3

4


The Vertex dialog box isdisplayed.

5. Tap the GPS button to usethe incoming GPScoordinates.

6. Tap OK.

7. Tap OK.

The vertex is moved to thespecified coordinates, andthe feature is reshaped.

Tip

Moving a vertex to thecurrent GPS positionYou can tap the GPS button on theVertex dialog box to move theselected vertex to the current GPSposition.

5

6

344 USING ARCPAD

Changing thesize of a featureArcPad lets you change the sizeof a line or polygon feature inseveral ways: by dragging thesizing handles (resizing); byscaling the feature; by adding,moving, or deleting a vertex; orby appending vertices to thehead or tail of a line.

Dragging the sizinghandles



3. Tap the Resize Featurebutton. u

See Also

Adding, moving, and deletingvertices, as well as extending aline, are discussed earlier in thischapter.

2

3

Tip

Scaling your featureUse the Scale Feature tool on theFeature Properties dropdown listto scale your feature. Scalemaintains the proportion of thefeature; the size of the featurechanges but the shape of the featuredoes not. Select a feature, activatethe Scale Feature button, and tapthe screen or tap and slide with thepen to see the size of the featurechange. Lift the pen when thedesired size is achieved. Tap theCommit Geometry Changes buttonto accept the change.


Tip

Dragging a corner vertexversus dragging a cornersizing handleDragging a corner vertex will onlymove the selected vertex and willchange the general shape of thefeature. In contrast, dragging acorner sizing handle will stretch orshrink a feature’s geometryproportionately, similar to scalingthe feature, thereby maintaining thegeneral shape of the feature.

Tip

Changing the size of thesizing handlesSizing handles are displayed usinga solid black square symbol. Youcan change the size of the squareby changing the Pen Tolerance onthe Display page of the ArcPadOptions dialog box.

The bounding box for theselected feature is displayedusing a dashed line andsizing handles.

4. Tap and drag a sizinghandle.

The size of the bounding boxis changed, and the featureis reshaped.

Dragging a corner sizinghandle will stretch, or shrink,a feature’s geometry propor-tionately, thereby maintainingthe general shape of thefeature.

5. Tap the Commit GeometryChanges button to completethe change. You cannot undothe feature changes onceyou have commited thechanges.

4

5

Tip

Moving and rotatingfeaturesThe Move and Rotate Feature toolsare also available in the FeatureProperties dropdown list. Withyour feature selected, use thesetools to drag a feature to a newlocation or to rotate a featurearound a point.

346 USING ARCPAD

1. Select the point, line, orpolygon feature.

The Feature Propertiesbutton is enabled once afeature is selected.



For example, tapping theProperty field HOUSE_NUMwill open the associatedValue text box for typing inthe house number value of“923”.

The Soft Input Panel isdisplayed when a Value textbox is opened. If it does not,tap the SIP icon on the titlebar. u

Editing attributesThe Feature Properties dialogbox lets you view and edit theattributes of the feature youhave selected. The FeatureProperties dialog box isautomatically displayed onceany new feature is created.

By default, the Feature Proper-ties dialog box includes pagesfor Attributes, Picture, Symbol-ogy, and Geography; a customedit form will also be displayedif it exists. The custom edit formmay change the title of theFeature Properties dialog box.For example, “Redlands Trees”.

Tip

Typing data on deviceswithout keyboardsDevices without keyboards—forexample, Windows Mobiledevices—use a Soft Input Panel(SIP) for typing in data. OnWindows Mobile devices, you openthe the Soft Input Panel by tappingthe SIP icon on the title bar.

3

Soft Input Panel


Tip

Creating custom edit formsQuickForms and custom edit formscan be created using ArcPad orArcPad Application Builder,respectively. Both types of formsare saved in an ArcPad Layer file(*.apl), which is associated with ashapefile.

QuickForms and custom edit formscan have multiple tabs, or pages,each with multiple controls. Thesecontrols could include text boxes,date controls, and list boxes.Scripts associated with the editform perform initialization andvalidation, enforcing correct dataentry before continuing to anotherpage or closing the form. Scriptscannot be added to forms usingQuickForms.

The Feature Propertiesdialog box displays thecustom edit form if it exists.

4. Tap OK to save the attributesand close the edit form.

You can also tap the X buttonif you want to cancel anychanges made to theattributes.

4

See Also

See Chapter 14, ‘Editing basics’, tolearn how to create Quick Formsin ArcPad to edit your features.

Tip

Using a barcode scanner toinput your dataUse a barcode scanner connectedto your Windows Mobile device toeasily input data into your editforms.

Section 6

Preparing data

IN THIS CHAPTER

351

ArcPad Tools for ArcGIS 18• The ArcPad Tools for ArcGIS

• Preparing your data for ArcPad

• Getting data for ArcPad 7

• Exporting symbology forshapefiles

• Exporting and importing graphicslayers

• Exporting ArcGIS styles

ArcGIS Desktop (ArcView, ArcEditor, or ArcInfo) includes an ArcPadtoolbar which is available from within ArcMap. The ArcPad toolbar lets youmanage transactions between ArcPad and ArcGIS. The toolbar includestools to:

• Extract data for use with ArcPad and/or check data out of a geodatabasefor editing.

• Check in updates that you made in ArcPad.

• Remove unwanted checkouts from the transaction log.

ArcPad 7 includes additional tools for ArcMap which are automaticallyinstalled with ArcPad. These new tools allow you to:

• Extract data for use with ArcPad 7 and/or check data out of ageodatabase for editing.

• Export symbology for selected shapefiles into ArcPad Layer files.

• Export/import an ArcGIS Graphics Layer to/from an ArcPad Graphicslayer.

• Export ArcGIS styles to an ArcPad style.

The ArcPad tools included with ArcGIS Desktop and ArcPad 7 do notinclude all of the tools that may be needed for data preparation. Projectingyour data can be done using ArcToolbox, which is available within ArcMap.Custom data input forms can be created using ArcPad Studio, which isincluded with the ArcPad Application Builder.

352 USING ARCPAD

The ArcPad Tools for ArcGIS

Check In Edits From ArcPad:Lets you update your geodatabase withthe field edits that were made in ArcPad.(Included with ArcGIS Desktop)

Undo Check Out for Editing:Lets you remove unwanted checkouts from thetransaction log. (Included with ArcGIS Desktop)

Import Graphics Layer:Import an ArcPad Graphics LayerDocument into the Graphics Layer.

Get Data For ArcPad:Lets you extract data from your map document intoa checkout folder. (Included with ArcGIS Desktop)

Export Graphics Layer:Export the Graphics Layer to anArcPad Graphics Layer Document.

Get Data For ArcPad 7:Lets you extract data from your map documentinto a checkout folder, for using in ArcPad 7.

Export Shapefile Symbology:Export the symbology from theselected shapefile(s) into ArcPadLayer file(s).

ARCPAD TOOLS FOR ARCGIS 353

Export ArcGIS Styles:Export an ArcGIS Desktop style fileinto an ArcPad style file.

354 USING ARCPAD

Preparing your data for ArcPad

ArcPad is a mapping tool for working with your GIS data in thefield. Field GIS tasks are often quite different from the GIS tasksperformed in the office, and so too are the computers used inthese different environments. Desktop computers usually havefast CPUs, large amounts of RAM and disk space, and largedisplay monitors. In contrast, field computers have relatively slowCPUs and limited RAM and storage capacity. Furthermore, thefieldwork environment ranges from working in bright sunlight torain to subzero snow conditions, compared to the constanttemperature and lighting conditions of the office environment.Consequently, you need to consider all of these factors beforepreparing your GIS data for use in the field with ArcPad.

Answers to the following questions will determine how you needto prepare your data for optimum use in the field:

• What tasks will be performed in the field, and what data will beneeded for these tasks?

• What data will be updated, and what data will be needed forbackground reference?

• What is an appropriate amount of data, taking into accountthe field tasks as well as the field computer’s CPU, RAM, andstorage capacity?

• What symbology needs to be used for effectively displayingthe data on the field computer in the expected weatherconditions?

This is an important issue. The artificial light and largemonitors used in the office environment enable the use of awide range of colors and symbols, whereas only a limitednumber of colors and symbols provide sufficient contrastwhen used in the field with small computer screens and strongsunlight.

There are a number of different operations that you may need toperform to prepare your data for use in the field with ArcPad,including:

• Extracting an appropriate subset of the data

• Converting the data into a format supported by ArcPad

• Projecting the data into a projection supported by ArcPad

• Specifying symbology that has sufficient contrast for theexpected field lighting conditions

• Preparing data input forms and validation rules to ensure thatdata is captured accurately in the field

The ArcPad Tools for ArcGIS toolbar provides some of the toolsfor preparing data for use with ArcPad.

In summary, it is essential to always bear in mind that fieldcomputers, tasks, and conditions are very different to computers,tasks, and conditions in the office. Therefore, what works in theoffice environment may often not be effective in a fieldenvironment.


Getting data forArcPad 7The Get Data For ArcPad 7wizard lets you extract data fromyour map document into acheckout folder that can thenbe uploaded to a mobile deviceand used in ArcPad 7. Thewizard contains several panelsthat let you define properties ofthe extraction.

The first panel lets you pickwhich layers in the map youwould like to extract for use inArcPad. The list includes layersthat you cannot edit. All vectorfeatures will be written to newshapefiles, and all raster imageswill be compressed to MrSIDformat. The first panel in theGet Data For ArcPad wizard listsall of the layers in the currentmap and their respective folderor database location. The mapmay contain layers frommultiple databases, differentprojections, and so on. At thisstep in the wizard, you selectthose layers you want to extractfeatures from. If you plan toextract features within a givenextent or bookmark, you need tozoom to that location beforestarting the wizard. u

1. Click the Get Data ForArcPad 7 button on theArcPad toolbar.

2. Check the layers you want toextract features from.

3. Click Next. u

1

3

2

See Also

Refer to the ArcGIS Desktop Helpfor more information on showingand hiding toolbars.

356 USING ARCPAD

The second panel lets you pickthe database to check data outfrom. The wizard will only letyou check out data from onedatabase per transaction. If youneed to edit multiplegeodatabases, you will need tostart the wizard again tocomplete additional transac-tions.If you plan to collect new datain the field, you can extract justthe schema of the layers youplan to update by checking theschema option directly belowthe list of layers in the wizard.

The third panel lets you specifythe extraction criteria

• Spatial extent—select aspatial extent to get data for.By default, this is thecurrent display extent.

• Extract selection only—choose only the selectedfeatures from layers thathave features selected.

• Definition query only—youcan choose to extract onlythose features that meet thedefinition query and arewithin the chosen spatialextent. By default, thisoption is checked. u

See Also

Refer to the ArcGIS Desktop Helpfor more information on theArcPad toolbar included withArcMap.

4. Select a database from theDatabase dropdown list.

5. Select the layers to check outfor editing under the Layercolumn.

6. Select the size from the Sizeof editing form that will begenerated dropdown list.

7. Click Next.

8. Select the extraction criteria.

9. Type a unique folder namefor the checkout folder.

Optionally, select the locationfor the checkout folder. If youhave a file sharing partner-ship with your mobile device,it will be the default locationin the wizard. You can clickthe Folder icon to browse fora new folder location.

10. Click Finish to perform thetransaction. u

7

8

Q

9

4

5

6


A summary dialog boxappears that details a reportof the completed extraction.You can select all of the textin the list and paste it into atext file.

11. Click OK to complete theextraction.

12. If a Windows Mobile deviceis connected to your PC youwill be prompted to chooseto transfer all of the checkoutfiles directly to your device.

Click Yes to transfer the filesto your Windows Mobiledevice. You will be promptedto select the checkout folderon your Windows Mobiledevice.

E

W

The Get Data for ArcPad 7wizard then checks for aWindows Mobile deviceconnected to your PC. If aconnected Windows Mobiledevice is detected, you will beprompted to choose to transferthe checked out files directly toyour Windows Mobile Device.

Tip

Using the Summary FontsinformationMake sure that all of the fontslisted in the Summary are copied tothe \Windows\Fonts folder on yourmobile device. Symbology will notdisplay correctly if the requiredfonts are not installed on yourmobile device and therefore are notavailable to ArcPad.

Tip

Using the Summaryprojection informationMake sure that the projection of thenew ArcPad map and exportedshapefiles is supported by ArcPad.The “ArcPad Reference Guide”includes a list of supportedprojections.

358 USING ARCPAD

Exportingsymbology forshapefilesArcPad 7 supports most of thelayer properties and symbologysupported by ArcMap. Thelayer properties and symbologysupported by ArcPad are storedin ArcPad Layer files (*.apl)associated with shapefiles.

The Export Symbology forselected shapefile(s) tool readsthe layer properties andsymbology definition for eachselected shapefile, and writesthis information into the ArcPadLayer files.

1. Select the shapefile(s) forwhich you want to export thesymbology.

2. Click the Export Symbologyfor selected shapefile(s)button.

The symbology definitionswill be added to the corre-sponding ArcPad Layer file(*.apl) for each selectedshapefile layer. A newArcPad Layer file is created ifit does not already exist.

1 2


Exporting andimportinggraphics layersThe ArcPad Tools for ArcGISinclude tools to export/importgraphics layers to/from ArcPad.

The tools detect if a WindowsMobile device is connected toyour PC, and provide an optionto export/import the graphicslayer directly to/from yourWindows Mobile device.

Exporting a graphicslayer

1. Click the Export the GraphicsLayer button.

If a Windows Mobile device isconnected to your PC youwill be prompted to choose tosave the ArcPad graphicslayer directly to your device.Click Yes to transfer the filesdirectly to your WindowsMobile device.

2. Click No to save the ArcPadgraphics layer to a folder onyour PC. u

2

1

360 USING ARCPAD

3

5

The Save As dialog box isdisplayed.

3. Use the Save in dropdownlist to select the folder inwhich to save the ArcPadgraphics layer.

4. Type the name of the newArcPad graphics layer.

5. Click Save.

4

Importing a graphicslayer

1. Click the Import an ArcPadGraphics Layer button. u

1


If a Windows Mobile deviceis connected to your PC youwill be prompted to choosethe ArcPad graphics layerdirectly on your device.Click Yes to transfer the filesdirectly to your WindowsMobile device.

2. Click No to import the ArcPadGraphics layer from a folderon your PC.

The Select an ArcPadGraphics Layer file to importdiialog box is displayed.

3. Use the Look in drop-downlist to select the folder whichcontains the ArcPad graphicslayer.

4. Select the ArcPad graphicslayer, or type the name of theArcPad graphics layer.

5. Click Open.

6. Click Yes to Append theArcPad graphics layer to thecurrent ArcGIS graphicslayer.

Click no to replace thecurrent map elements withthe elements in the ArcPadgraphics layer.

2

3

4

5

6

362 USING ARCPAD

Exporting ArcGISstylesStyles are a collection ofpredefined colors, symbols,properties of symbols, and mapelements that allow you tofollow a mapping standard andhelp promote consistency inyour organization's mappingproducts.

Styles help to define not onlyhow data is drawn, but also theappearance and placement ofmap elements and othercartographic additions on yourmap. Styles provide storage foryour colors, map elements,symbols, and properties ofsymbols. Every time youchoose and apply a particularmap element or symbol, you areusing the contents of a style.

The ArcPad Tools for ArcGISinclude a tool for exportingArcGIS styles into ArcPad stylefiles. This enables ArcPad usersto have access to the samestyles as in ArcGIS Desktop.

The ESRI style is automaticallyinstalled with ArcPad. Conse-quently, you only need toexport ArcGIS styles if you usestyles other than the ESRI style.

2

1. Click Tools.

2. Click Styles.

3. Click Export ReferencedStyle(s) for ArcPad.

The Save As dialog box isdisplayed.

4. Use the Save in drop-downlist to select the folder inwhich to save the ArcPadstyle file.

The default folder on the PCfor ArcPad styles is \ProgramFiles\ArcPad 7.0\Styles.

5. Type the name of the newArcPad style file.

6. Click Save. u

3

1

4

5

6


7. Click Yes to export bothpersonal styles and selectedstyles.

Click No to only export theselected styles.

The ArcPad Tools Log file isdisplayed with information onthe exported styles. 7

IN THIS APPENDIX

365

Appendix: Customizing ArcPad

• Overview

• Default configuration files andapplets

• Customizing ArcPad toolbars

• Layer definitions

• Customizing forms

• Extensions

• Scripts, ArcPad XML, and ArcPadObject Model

• ArcPad customization files

This appendix provides an overview of how to customize ArcPad using theArcPad Application Builder. ArcPad Application Builder provides the toolsand documentation to allow you to customize ArcPad in many ways.

ArcPad Application Builder includes the following:

• ArcPad Studio, a desktop customization application

• A license of ArcPad for testing your custom applications

• Detailed documentation, an object model diagram, and developer samples

• First year’s maintenance: Maintenance includes telephone and emailtechnical support for an authorized user, and upgrades for both ArcPadStudio and ArcPad during the first twelve months. Maintenance can thenbe purchased as an annual subscription for subsequent years.

ArcPad Application Builder is a separate product and is not included withArcPad. For more information on ArcPad Application Builder, visitwww.esri.com/applicationbuilder.

366 USING ARCPAD

Overview

ArcPad Application Builder is the development framework forbuilding custom ArcPad applications for Mobile GIS projects.Creating a customized field solution for data collection and datamaintenance is essential to ensure the integrity and value of yourGIS data. The ability to accurately capture attribute and spatialdata directly in the field improves efficiency and reduces timespent correcting or reentering the data into the main databaseback in the office.

With ArcPad Application Builder, you can:

• Design custom forms to streamline data collection

• Ensure data integrity by validating data directly in the field

• Tailor applications to user skill levels and specific fields tasks

• Write scripts that interact with ArcPad’s internal objects

• Develop scripts to support data collection devices

The majority of ArcPad customizations are created using ArcPadStudio, the desktop application included with ArcPad ApplicationBuilder.

With ArcPad Studio, you can hide toolbars, create new toolbars,design custom forms, build applets, and access object propertiesand methods. Little or no programming is required to accomplishmany of these tasks. For more advanced users, ArcPad’sdevelopment environment exposes an extensive object model thatcan be accessed via scripts. ArcPad operates as a scripting hostfor Microsoft’s VBScript and JScript scripting languages,enabling you to create and edit VBScript or JScript source codefiles.

The table below summarizes the different types of customizationsthat are possible, along with the level of programming anddevelopment environment required for each type.

Customization Programming Development requirements environment

Hide toolbars None ArcPad Studio

Create new toolbars None ArcPad Studio

Build new tools VBScript/JScript ArcPad Studio

Design custom forms None ArcPad Studio

Validate data in form VBScript/JScript ArcPad Studiocontrols

Configure the status bar None ArcPad Studio

Prepare symbology None ArcGIS Desktop

Develop applets VBScript/JScript ArcPad Studio

Access object properties VBScript/JScript ArcPad Studioand methods

Support new input VBScript/JScript ArcPad Studio ordevices or C/C++ Visual Studio/

eMbedded C++

Support new data C/C++ Visual Studio/formats Embedded C++

Support new coordinate C/C++ Visual Studio/systems and datum Embedded C++transformations

APPENDIX: CUSTOMIZING ARCPAD 367

Default configuration files and applets

ArcPad customizations are primarily delivered via applets and/ordefault configuration files. These files are defined using ArcPadStudio and can contain custom toolbars, user-defined forms,scripts, and system object event handlers.

Default configuration files

The default configuration file affects how ArcPad looks andbehaves when it is first loaded. It contains parameters thatoverride ArcPad’s default, such as which toolbars are initiallyvisible when ArcPad starts. The default configuration file isautomatically loaded when ArcPad starts and is saved as“ArcPad.apx”, which is located in the ArcPad System folder. Thedefault location of the System folder is \Program Files\ArcPad7.0\System.

You can set the default configuration file to disable or hide thebuilt-in toolbars (Main, Browse, and Edit) and to automaticallyload custom toolbars when ArcPad starts. For example, the toolson the built-in toolbars may be more than your field personnelrequire so you can set the default configuration file to onlydisplay the tools they will use. In addition, the defaultconfiguration file can set status bar properties such as if thestatus bar is initially visible or not, and if the map scale, mapunits, and rocker mode are displayed in the status bar.

In general, one would change the default configuration file onlyoccasionally for common changes to the toolbars rather than forspecific field tasks that require unique tools. However, a customtoolbar that is shared by many applets would be loaded through aconfiguration file.

The default configuration files can contain scripts, forms, andtoolbars but these should be common for all your field goals. Forexample, you may want your field personnel to always have to login before they start ArcPad. This task is independent of the data

they are using and the field task they are performing. A scriptlaunching the login screen would therefore be stored in thedefault configuration file and would automatically launch everytime ArcPad starts.

Applets

Applets, in contrast, can be used to meet specific field taskrequirements. An ArcPad applet is a small module that runs insidea full application -ArcPad. Applets provide a way of deliveringmini-applications without having to alter ArcPad’s configuration.An applet is automatically loaded after the default configurationfile is loaded when ArcPad starts. It is saved with an .apa

A sample applet that includes a custom form and customtoolbar for a tree inventory application.

368 USING ARCPAD

extension in the Applets folder, which can be specified in thePaths page of the ArcPad Options dialog box. The defaultlocation of the Applets folder is \Program File\ArcPad7.0\Applets.

Applets are targeted for use with a specific field project or taskwhereas the default configuration file alters ArcPad for everyinstance. In general, applets are closely related to changes in theuser interface and the creation of custom tools and buttons. Forexample, an applet could contain custom tools, toolbars, andforms to perform a tree inventory that meets specific criteria,unique to the area and the data being used.

Applets are easily deployed to field personnel and it is notuncommon to have several applets for your workers to use. Incontrast, ArcPad only recognizes one default configuration file(ArcPad.apx) and therefore the default configuration file shouldbe set once for all field tasks. Applets are then created and usedto meet the specific requirements of the different field projects inany given day.

There are very few functional differences between applets anddefault configuration files; therefore it is up to yourorganizational preferences and specific Mobile GIS requirementsas to when you would use one over the other.

Mobile Fire Mapper applet was created to easilycapture the perimeter of a fire.


ArcPad supports the customization for three categories oftoolbars:

• Built-in toolbars

ArcPad’s built-in toolbars present a rich set of commands,organized by functionality into the Main, Browse, and Edit (orDraw) toolbars. You can set the default visibility of thesetoolbars via the default configuration file but you cannot alterthe contents of the toolbars themselves. In order to use thetools from the built-in toolbars, you would need to create anew toolbar with the selected tools. ArcPad also has aCommand bar used for editing tasks. It cannot be altered ormade invisible.

• Custom toolbars consisting of only built-in commands

If your Mobile GIS application only requires a subset of thecommands offered in the built-in toolbars, presented in adifferent arrangement, you may want to create one or morecustom toolbars and add the desired built-in commands in theorder you designate. The visibility of the three built-intoolbars could be turned off and the custom toolbarsdisplayed instead.

• Custom toolbars with user-defined commands

In some cases, ArcPad’s built-in commands may not providethe functionality you need, or you may want to automatetasks and group several actions into one command. Advancedtoolbar commands are created using VBScripts or JScripts andlinking them to the events of user-defined commands—forexample, the OnClick event. When the user interacts with auser-defined command, the associated scripts are executed.

Customizing ArcPad toolbars

All toolbar customization is done in ArcPad Studio. You cancreate custom toolbars that work only within a specific applet orvia the default configuration file so that they are always loadedwhen ArcPad starts. These new toolbars can contain acombination of built-in commands, that are found on ArcPad’sbuilt-in toolbars, and user-defined commands, that call customscripts. You can hide or display any of ArcPad’s built-intoolbars and specify that toolbars include large format buttons.

Toolbars are loaded into ArcPad as follows: on startup, ArcPadloads any custom toolbars from the default configuration file(ArcPad.apx) and sets the initial visibility state of the built-intoolbars. As each applet is loaded, its toolbars are then added tothe system.

Using the built-in tools to create a custom toolbar in ArcPad Studio.

370 USING ARCPAD

Layer definitions provide a way of delivering customizations thatare loaded with data. Typically, this would include data entryforms with associated scripts to handle data entry validation andother features offered on the forms. The layer definition file canalso contain symbology created in ArcPad or exported from theArcGIS Desktop products: ArcView, ArcEditor, and ArcInfo.

Layer definitions are stored in a file associated with a shapefile.This file has the same filename as the shapefile, but has an .aplextension. The layer definition file lives and travels with theshapefile.

Creating a layer definition file

The forms and scripts portion of layer definitions are created inArcPad Studio. The symbology portion is created in ArcPad, orArcGIS Desktop using the ArcPad tools for ArcGIS. These twoprocedures can be done in either order. The layer definition file isstored in ArcPad XML format.

Once the format of a layer definition has been defined in ArcPadStudio and/or using the ArcPad tools for ArcGIS, it is possible tomake changes or additions using your favorite text or XML editor,although it is more efficient to do so using ArcPad Studio.

Layer definitions are automatically loaded when the associatedshapefile is added to ArcPad.

Managing symbology

Data preparation for ArcPad, such as exporting a layer’ssymbology, is performed in ArcGIS Desktop (ArcView, ArcEditor,or ArcInfo) using the ArcPad tools for ArcGIS. You can also set orchange symbology directly in ArcPad. Symbology is stored in thelayer definition file in ArcPad XML.

Layer definitions

The Layer DefinitionProperties dialogbox (right) and aview of thoseproperties inArcPad Studio.


Customizing forms

Custom forms are a way of viewing, updating, synthesizing, andcollecting information in the field with ArcPad. Forms are createdin ArcPad Studio and stored as ArcPad XML. ArcPad supportscustomization of three kinds of forms:

• Edit forms

• Identify forms

• General forms

Edit forms

Edit forms are used for data collection such as updating thevalues of a feature’s attributes. Each edit form you create must beassociated with a specific shapefile and replaces the FeatureProperties dialog box for that shapefile. Each shapefile, therefore,can only have one associated edit form. The edit form can,however, contain multiple pages.

Layer definition files provide the way of delivering custom editforms with associated scripts to handle data entry validation andother features offered on the forms. Layer definitions are stored ina file associated with the shapefile. This file has the same filenameprefix as the shapefile, but has an .apl extension. The layerdefinition file lives and travels with the shapefile.

Identify forms

Identify forms replace the Feature Properties dialog box and areused to view, but not edit, a feature’s attributes. This allows youto view data in a different style when a feature is being identifiedas opposed to when it is being edited. Like edit forms, eachidentify form you create must be associated with a specificshapefile. If no identify form is supplied, but an edit form issupplied, the edit form is displayed in identify mode.Whether youare creating an edit or identify form, you can link your formcontrols, such as textboxes or comboboxes, to attributes in aspecified shapefile. In other words, the values that are viewedand/or edited via the form controls directly correspond to thevalues from the associated shapefile.

General forms

General forms are created without any association with ashapefile. That is, an applet can provide a custom toolbar with auser-defined command that displays a form. The form takes inputfrom the user, performs several calculations, displays a messageto the user, and closes.

You would use a general form, for example, if you wanted toperform and view statistics for a tree layer such as median treeheight, average DBH, or tallest tree. You would create a form thatprovided you with on-the-fly calculation of selected data, in thiscase the tree layer. Once you are finished, you simply close theform.Edit form created in

ArcPad Studio.

372 USING ARCPAD

Extensions allow you to expand the range of data formats,positioning services, projections, datum transformations, GPSreceivers, rangefinders, and cameras supported in ArcPad. Forexample, if your application requires data in an unsupported mapprojection, you can write an extension that supports theprojection. Developers can also create utility extensions thatexpose any desired low level of functionality, normally onlyaccessible via C or C++ code, to ArcPad scripts.

The following types of extensions are available to developers:

• Layer extensions can provide a range of support for each newdata format, including file identification, layer opening andclosing, layer rendering, editing, identifying, and hyperlinking.

• GPS extensions provide support for additional GPS devices.

• Rangefinder extensions provide support for additionalrangefinders.

• Camera extensions provide support for additional cameras.

• Projection extensions provide support for additionalprojections.

• Datum extensions provide support for additional datumtransformations.

• AUX extensions provide support for any serial port devicethat can communicate with ArcPad’s AUX port.

Implementing different sets of functions and properties enablesyou to select the level of support to add. Extensions are alwayscompiled as Dynamic Link Libraries (DLLs). Once an extension isinstalled, the new functionality appears to an ArcPad user as anyother built-in functionality.

Extensions

Creating extensions

Extensions are developed as Windows DLLs and are generallywritten in C or C++. External tools, such as a compiler anddebugger, are required to create extensions.

Loading extensions

Extensions are loaded automatically by ArcPad during startup.Extensions are usually placed in the Extensions folder, foundunder the ArcPad installation directory—for example, \ProgramFiles\ArcPad 7.0\Extensions. You can specify additional extensionfolder in the Paths page of the ArcPad Options dialog box. Todeploy an extension, simply place the .dll file in the appropriateExtensions folder and start ArcPad.


Depending on the type of customization you are doing in ArcPadStudio, you may need to become more familiar with scripts,ArcPad XML, and/or the ArcPad Object Model.

Working with scripts

Although a great deal of customization can be accomplishedwithout writing a single line of code, the fundamental feature ofArcPad’s customization environment is the ability to use scripts.ArcPad exposes an extensive object model that can be accessedvia Microsoft VBScript or JScript. These objects are available toyour scripts whenever the ArcPad application is running.

Active Script is a comprehensive scripting infrastructure for theMicrosoft Windows platform. Microsoft provides twoimplementations of the script engine interfaces,Visual BasicScripting Edition and Microsoft JScript, which can be embeddedinto applications such as ArcPad.

ArcPad operates as an active scripting host for Microsoft’sVBScript or JScript. VBScript and JScript are standard scriptinglanguages and relatively easy to learn.

Working with ArcPad XML

Whether you use scripts or not, all of ArcPad’s customizationfiles are stored in ArcPad XML format. Familiarization with thisformat will allow you to work with any of ArcPad’s customizationfiles in any text or XML editor. The ArcPad XML format isdesigned as a protocol for automation and customization ofArcPad. It is based on the XML 1.0 specification and uses thesame syntax as ArcXML wherever possible (especially forsymbology). ArcPad XML files can be ANSI, UTF-8, Unicode, orUnicode Big Endian encoded.

ArcPad XML files (.apa, .apx, and .apl) are displayed as a treediagram which is directly related to the underlying XML structure

Scripts, ArcPad XML, and ArcPad Object Model

of the files. ArcPad XML elements and attributes are displayed asbranches in the tree. You can edit the files very quickly by simplydouble-clicking elements and attributes. There are also variouseditors to speed up development and editing of ArcPad XML filesby providing a graphical environment. The Toolbar and Formeditors are examples of these.

Working with the ArcPad Object Model

ArcPad exposes an extensive object model that can be accessedvia VBScript or JScript. The ArcPad object model includesapproximately 50 objects that are exposed while ArcPad isrunning. As long as ArcPad is running, you can access andmanipulate these objects via VBScript or JScript. Once ArcPad isclosed, all of the objects cease to exist until ArcPad is startedagain.

Data Access Objects from the ArcPad Object Model

374 USING ARCPAD

ArcPad customization files

ArcPad XML files (*.apx)

Although all of the ArcPad customization files are stored as XMLtext files, the .apx file extension is only used for the followingfiles:

• Custom Default Configuration Files (ArcPad.apx)

This file is loaded by default each time ArcPad starts and mustbe located in the ArcPad installation (System) directory.ArcPad.apx can contain custom toolbars, forms, and systemobject event handlers. In addition, it can contain otherparameters that override the ArcPad default, such as whichtoolbars are initially visible when the application starts.

• Global Bookmark File (ArcPadBookMarks.apx)

This file contains spatial bookmarks that can be used inArcPad regardless of the current map. It is stored in the MyDocuments folder on desktop PCs as well as Windows Mobiledevices.

• ArcPad Preference Files (ArcPadPrefs.apx)

This file contains the ArcPad default parameters that are set inthe ArcPad Options dialog box, such as GPS settings, defaultsymbology, and default file paths. It is stored in the MyDocuments folder on desktop PCs as well as Windows Mobiledevices.

Other ArcPad XML files include ArcPad Graphics Layer (*.apg),ArcPad Photo Layer (*.aph), and ArcPad Stylesheets (*.aps). Formore information about these files, see Chapter 4. ‘ArcPadbasics’.

ArcPad applet files (*.apa)

Applets provide a way of delivering a mini-application in a singlefile without having to alter the ArcPad configuration. Applets maycontain toolbars, forms, and system object event handlers.Applets are loaded automatically by ArcPad after the defaultconfiguration has been loaded. Applet files are located in theApplets Files Path, which is specified in the Paths page of theArcPad Options dialog box.

ArcPad layer definition files (*.apl)

Layer definitions are stored in a file associated with a shapefile,with the same filename as the shapefile but with the extension.apl. Layer definition files provide a way of developingcustomizations that are delivered and loaded with data. Mostcustomizations delivered in this way are data entry forms withassociated scripts that handle data entry validation and otherfeatures offered from the forms. Layer definition files can alsocontain custom symbology exported from ArcGIS Desktop.

ArcPad map files (*.apm)

An ArcPad map file stores a list of the map layers of your ArcPadsession. A map lists all of your feature layers together with theirdisplay settings including the extent of your map, color, andprojection environment.

VBScript (*.vbs) and JScript (*.js) files

Much of the customization in ArcPad is accomplished by writingscripts. Currently, ArcPad supports Microsoft’s VBScript andJScript scripting languages. Although scripts may be embeddedwithin the various ArcPad customization files, it is often moreefficient to place related scripts in a separate text file with a .vbsor a .js extension.

375

122D ModeA two-dimensional global positioning system (GPS) position that includes only horizontalcoordinates. It requires a minimum of three visible satellites.

3D ModeA three-dimensional GPS position that includes horizontal coordinates plus elevation. It requires aminimum of four visible satellites.

.apm fileSee ArcPad Map file.

acquisition timeThe time it takes for a GPS receiver to acquire a lock onto sufficient satellites—three for 2D modeand four for 3D mode—to calculate a position fix.

aerial photographA photograph of the earth’s surface taken with a camera mounted in an airplane or balloon. Used incartography to provide geographical information for basemaps.

almanacFile transmitted from GPS satellites to GPS receivers that contains information about the satellites’orbits. The receivers use the almanac to decide which satellites to track.

altitude1. The elevation above a reference datum, usually sea level, of any point on the earth’s surface or inthe atmosphere.

2. The z-value in a three-dimensional coordinate system.

ArcPad Graphics Layer (.apg)The ArcPad Graphics Layer file is an XML file that can store text, points, lines, and polygons. It isused to make freehand geo-referenced edits in the field which can then be imported into ArcGISDesktop.

Glossary

376 USING ARCPAD

ArcPad Map (.apm) fileAn ArcPad Map file contains information about the ArcPad Mapincluding the layers in the map, map extent, and settings specificto the map.

ArcPad Photo Layer (.aph)A photo layer is a file that specifies how georeferenced photosare displayed in ArcPad. Georeferenced photos contain GPScoordinates in the EXIF header of the JPEG image file.

ArcPad Stylesheet (.aps)An ArcPad Stylesheet is a file that provides symbol definitionsfor the symbol styles used by ArcPad. ArcGIS Desktop stylesheetfiles can be exported to ArcPad Stylesheet files.

area1. Also polygon. A closed, two-dimensional shape defined by itsboundary.

2. The size of a geographic feature measured in square units.

attribute1. A piece of information describing a map feature. The attributesof a river, for example, might include its name, length, and averagedepth. See attribute table.

2. Cartographic information that specifies how features aredisplayed and labeled on a map; the cartographic attributes of theriver in (1) above might include line thickness, line length, color,and font.

attribute tableA table containing descriptive attributes for a set of geographicfeatures, usually arranged so that each row represents a featureand each column represents one attribute. Each cell in a columnstores the value of that column’s attribute for that row’s feature.

azimuthThe angle measured in degrees between a baseline drawn from acenter point and another line drawn from the same point.Normally, the baseline points north, and the angle is measuredclockwise from the baseline.

background imageA satellite image or aerial photograph over which vector data isdisplayed. Although the image can be used to align coordinates,it is not linked to attribute information and is not part of thespatial analysis in a geographic information system (GIS).

backsightIn ArcPad, using a rangefinder, backsight is when you are lookingback at and shooting from your target to a known reference point.

bar scaleAlso scalebar, graphic scale, linear scale. A line used to measuredistance on a map, marked like a ruler in units proportional to themap’s scale.

beaconA stationary, nondirectional transmitter that transmits signals inall directions. In a differential global positioning system, thebeacon transmitter broadcasts pseudorange correction data tonearby GPS receivers. The GPS receiver uses this correction toadjust the position fix calculated by the receiver. This process iscalled real-time differential correction.

bearing (BRG)Also bearing angle. The direction of a fixed point from a point ofobservation on the earth, expressed as an angle from a knowndirection, usually north, and usually measured from 0 degrees atthe reference direction clockwise through 360 degrees. The termsbearing and azimuth are sometimes interchanged, but in

GLOSSARY 377

navigation the former usually applies to objects on the earthwhile the latter applies to the direction of a point on the celestialsphere from a point on the earth.

In the ArcPad GPS Position Window, BRG is the compassdirection from your current GPS position to the selecteddestination.

Bezier curveA curved line whose shape is derived mathematically. In graphicsprograms a Bezier curve usually has two endpoints and twocontrol points that can be moved to change the direction and thesteepness of the curve.

BRGSee bearing.

buttonA command that runs a script or custom code when clicked.Buttons can be added to any menu or toolbar using ArcPadStudio. When they appear in a menu, buttons are referred to asmenu items.

CF CardSee CompactFlash.

codepageA codepage maps character codes to individual characters.Different codepages include different special characters, typicallycustomized for a language or a group of languages. The operatingsystem uses codepages to translate keyboard input into charactervalues for non-Unicode (i.e., multibyte) character set-basedapplications and to translate character values into characters fornon-Unicode-based output displays.

COGSee Course Over Ground.

columnAlso field, item. The vertical dimension of a table. Each columnstores the values of one type of attribute for all of the records, orrows, in the table. All of the values in a given column are of thesame data type (e.g., number, string, blob, date). See attributetable.

CompactFlash (CF)Available in Type I or Type II, this is a specific form factor ofaccessory cards that fit into a respective CF slot. Examples of CFaccessory cards include flash memory, mini hard drives, modems,network cards, and GPS receivers.

coordinatesA set of numbers that designate location in a given referencesystem such as x,y in a planar coordinate system or x,y,z in athree-dimensional coordinate system. Coordinates representlocations on the earth’s surface relative to other locations.

coordinate system1. A reference system used to measure horizontal and verticaldistances on a planimetric map. A coordinate system is usuallydefined by a map projection; a spheroid of reference; a datum;one or more standard parallels; a central meridian; and possibleshifts in the x- and y-directions to locate x,y positions of point,line, and polygon features.

2. In ArcPad, a system with units and characteristics defined by amap projection. A common coordinate system is used to spatiallyregister geographic data for the same area.

378 USING ARCPAD

Course Over Ground (COG)The direction the GPS receiver is moving. COG can be reported intrue or magnetic north values.

data frameIn ArcGIS Desktop, a frame on a map that displays layersoccupying the same geographic area. You may have one or moredata frames on your map depending on how you want to organizeyour data. For instance, one data frame might highlight a studyarea, and another might provide an overview of where the studyarea is.

data typeThe characteristics of columns and variables that define whattypes of data values they can store. Examples include character,floating point, and integer.

datumA set of parameters and control points used to accurately definethe three-dimensional shape for the earth—for example, as aspheroid. The datum defines a geographic coordinate system thatis the basis for a planar coordinate system. For example, the NorthAmerican Datum for 1983 (NAD83) is the datum for mapprojections and coordinates within the United States andthroughout North America.

DDSee decimal degrees.

decimal degrees (DD)Degrees of latitude and longitude expressed as a decimal ratherthan in degrees, minutes, and seconds.

degreeA unit of angular measure represented by the symbol ° . Thecircumference of a circle contains 360 degrees.

degrees/minutes/seconds (DMS)A measurement of degrees of latitude and longitude in whicheach degree is divided into 60 minutes, and each minute isdivided into 60 seconds.

desktop GISMapping software that runs on a personal computer and candisplay, query, update, and analyze geographic locations and theinformation linked to those locations.

DGPSDifferential global positioning system. See differential correction.

differential correctionA technique for increasing the accuracy of GPS measurements bycomparing the readings of two receivers—one roving and theother fixed at a known location.

Differential Global Positioning System (DGPS)See differential correction.

Dilution of Precision (DOP)Also Geometric Dilution of Precision (GDOP). An indicator ofsatellite geometry for a constellation of satellites used todetermine a position. Positions with a higher DOP value generallyconstitute poorer measurement results than those with lowerDOP. Factors determining the total GDOP for a set of satellitesinclude, to name a few, Positional DOP (PDOP), Horizontal DOP(HDOP), Vertical DOP (VDOP), and Time DOP (TDOP).

GLOSSARY 379

directoryAlso folder. An area of a computer disk that holds a set of datafiles and/or other directories. Directories are arranged in a treestructure in which each branch is a subdirectory of its parentbranch. The location of a directory is specified with a pathname—for example, C:\gisprojects\shrinkinglemurhabitat\grids.

display resolutionThe number of pixels displayed on a monitor, measuredhorizontally and vertically—for example, 1,024 by 768.

display scaleThe scale at which digital data is rendered on a computer screenor on a printed map.

display unitsThe units—for example, metric (meters, kilometers), statute (feet,miles), or nautical (knots)—ArcPad uses to report measurements,dimensions of shapes, and navigational speed and distance.

distanceThe amount of space between two things that may or may not beconnected, such as two points. Differentiated from length, whichalways implies a physical connection. See also DST.

DMSSee degrees/minutes/seconds.

donut polygonSee island polygon.

DOPSee Dilution of Precision.

DSTThe distance from your current GPS position to the selecteddestination. DST is displayed in the ArcPad GPS PositionWindow. See also distance.

elevationAlso altitude, height. The vertical distance of a point or objectabove or below a reference surface or datum (generally mean sealevel).

ellipsoid1. A closed surface, all planar sections of which are ellipses. Anellipsoid has three independent axes and is usually specified bythe lengths a,b,c of the three semi-axes. If an ellipsoid is made byrotating an ellipse about one of its axes, then two of the axes ofthe ellipsoid are the same, and it is called an ellipsoid ofrevolution or spheroid. If the lengths of all three of its axes arethe same, it is a sphere.

2. Also spheroid. When used to represent the earth, an oblateellipsoid of revolution, made by rotating an ellipse about its minoraxis. See also spheroid.

EPESee Estimated Position Error.

ephemerisA list of the predicted positions of a GPS satellite for each day ofthe year or for other regular intervals.

Estimated Position Error (EPE)A measurement of horizontal and vertical position error, in feet ormeters, based on a variety of factors including DOP and satellitesignal quality.

380 USING ARCPAD

feature1. An object in a landscape or on a map.

2. A shape in a spatial data layer, such as a point, line, or polygon,that represents a geographic object.

feature classIn a shapefile, coverage, or geodatabase, a collection of spatialdata with the same shape type (e.g., point, line, or polygon).

field1. Also item. A vertical column in a table that represents somecharacteristic for all of the records in the table, given in numbersor words.

2. The place in a database record, or in a graphical user interface,where data can be entered.

fileInformation stored on disk or tape. A file may be a collection ofdata, a document (text file), or a program (executable file). Itgenerally resides within a directory and always has a uniquename.

filenameThe name that distinguishes a file from all other files in aparticular directory. It can refer to the name of the file by itself(harold), the name plus the file extension (harold.shp), or thewhole path of a file up to and including the filename extension(C:\mygisdata\shapefiles\harold.shp).

filename extensionAlso file extension. The abbreviation following the final period ina filename that indicates the file’s format—for example, cities.shp,soils.zip, and pigeons.tif. It is usually one to three letters long.

folderSee directory.

fontIn traditional typesetting, the complete set of characters of onesize (14 point) of one typeface (Centaur bold italic) of a particulartype family (Centaur). In digital typesetting, font is commonlyused to mean typeface.

foresightIn ArcPad, using a rangefinder, foresight is when you are lookingforward to and shooting at your target from a known referencepoint.

GDOPGeometric Dilution of Precision. See Dilution of Precision.

geographic coordinatesLocations on the surface of the earth expressed in degrees oflatitude and longitude. See projected coordinates.

geographic northAlso true north. The direction from any point on the earth’ssurface to the north geographic pole. Compare magnetic north.

Geometric Dilution of Precision (GDOP)See Dilution of Precision.

georeferenceTo assign coordinates from a known reference system, such aslatitude–longitude, Universal Transverse Mercator, or StatePlane, to the page coordinates of an image or a planimetric map.

GLOSSARY 381

Global Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS)The Russian counterpart to the United States’ GPS. See globalpositioning system.

global positioning system (GPS)A constellation of 24 satellites, developed by the U.S. Departmentof Defense, that orbit the earth at an altitude of 20,200 kilometers.These satellites transmit signals that allow a GPS receiveranywhere on earth to calculate its own location. The globalpositioning system is used in navigation, mapping, surveying,and other applications where precise positioning is necessary.

GLONASSSee Global Navigation Satellite System.

GPSSee global positioning system.

graduated color mapA map that uses a range of colors to indicate a progression ofnumeric values. For example, differences in population densitycould be represented by increasing the saturation of a singlecolor, and temperature changes could be represented by colorsranging from blue to red.

graduated symbol mapA map whose symbols correspond in size to the amount of theattribute they represent. For example, larger rivers could berepresented by thicker lines, and denser populations could berepresented by larger dots.

graphic scaleSee bar scale.

graphics layerThe ArcPad Graphics Layer file is an SML file that can store text,points, lines, and polygons. It is used to make freehandgeoreferenced edits in the field which can then be imported intoArcGIS Desktop.

HDOPHorizontal Dilution of Precision. See Dilution of Precision.

head vertexThe first or start vertex of a line.

headingThe direction of a moving object from a point of observation,expressed as an angle from a known direction, usually north.Bearing and heading differ in that bearing refers to a fixedposition, whereas heading refers to the direction in which anobject is moving.

Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)See Dilution of Precision.

HTMLSee Hypertext Markup Language.

hyperlinkA link that connects a geographic feature to an external image,text, or executable file. When the feature is clicked, the file runs oris displayed onscreen.

Hypertext Markup Language (HTML)A hypertext document format used on the World Wide Web.

382 USING ARCPAD

identifyTo click a feature so that you can see its associated attributes.

imageRepresents geographic features by dividing the world intodiscrete squares called cells. Examples include satellite and aerialphotographs, scanned documents, and building photographs.See also raster.

initializationThe first time a GPS receiver orients itself to its current location.After initialization has occurred, the receiver remembers itslocation and acquires a position more quickly because it does notneed to receive a large amount of information from the GPSsatellites.

IP addressA server’s address on the network. The address consists of fournumbers, each separated by a period (.).

island polygonAlso donut polygon. A polygon enclosed by another, largerpolygon.

itemAlso field. A column in an attribute table that contains the valuesof one attribute for each record in the table. See also attributetable, record.

labelText placed next to a feature on a map to describe or identify it.

latitudeThe angular distance along a meridian north or south of theequator, usually measured in degrees. Lines of latitude are alsocalled parallels.

latitude–longitudeAlso lat/long, lat/lon. The most commonly used sphericalreference system for locating positions on the earth. Latitude andlongitude are angles measured from the equator and the primemeridian to locations on the earth’s surface. Latitude measuresangles in a north–south direction; longitude measures angles inan east–west direction.

layer1. A set of vector data organized by subject matter, such as roads,rivers, or political boundaries. Vector layers act as digitaltransparencies that can be laid atop one another for viewing orspatial analysis.

2. A set of raster data representing a particular geographic area,such as an aerial photograph or a remotely sensed image. In both(1) and (2), layers covering the same geographical space areregistered to one another by means of a common coordinatesystem.

3. A file that stores symbology and displays information for agiven vector or raster dataset. The layer does not actually containthe data but stores the path to its physical location.

lineAlso linear feature. A shape having length and direction but noarea, connecting at least two x,y coordinates. Lines representgeographic features too narrow to be displayed as an area at agiven scale, such as contours, street centerlines, or streams, orlinear features with no area, such as state and county boundarylines.

GLOSSARY 383

linear featureSee line.

linear scaleSee bar scale.

linear traverseA linear traverse enables you to capture the vertex of a polyline orpolygon from a known point as you walk along a traverse. Inother words, you begin at point A, capture point B, move to pointB, capture point C, move to point C, and so on. With a lineartraverse, you are always using a moving reference point, that is,the last point you captured.

localeA locale reflects the local conventions and language for aparticular geographical region. A given language may be spokenin more than one country; for example, Portuguese is spoken inBrazil as well as in Portugal. Conversely, a country may have morethan one official language. For example, Canada has two: Englishand French. Thus, Canada has two distinct locales: Canadian–English and Canadian–French. Some locale-dependent categoriesinclude the formatting of dates and the display format formonetary values.

The language determines the text and data formattingconventions, while the country determines the nationalconventions. Every language has a unique mapping, representedby codepages, which includes characters other than those in thealphabet, such as punctuation marks and numbers. A codepage isa character set and is related to the current locale and language.As such, a locale is a unique combination of language, country,and codepage.

locationAlso position. A point on the earth’s surface or in geographicalspace described by x,y,z coordinates or by other preciseinformation such as a street address.

longitudeThe angular distance, expressed in degrees, minutes, andseconds, of a point on the earth’s surface east or west of a primemeridian—usually, the Greenwich meridian. All lines of longitudeare great circles that intersect the equator and pass through thenorth and south poles.

m-valueMeasure value. See measure.

magnetic northAlso compass north. The direction from a point on the earth’ssurface following a great circle toward the magnetic north pole,indicated by the north-seeking end of a compass.

map1. A graphical presentation of geographic or spatial information.

2. The document used in ArcPad that lets you display and workwith geographic data. A map contains one or more layers ofgeographic data and various supporting elements such asscalebars. A map has properties, such as scale, projection, andextent.

map documentIn ArcGIS Desktop, the disk-based representation of a map. Mapdocuments can be printed or embedded into other documents.Map documents have an .mxd file extension.

384 USING ARCPAD

map projectionA mathematical model that transforms the locations of features onthe earth’s curved surface to locations on a two-dimensionalsurface. It can be visualized as a transparent globe with alightbulb at its center casting lines of latitude and longitude ontoa sheet of paper. Generally, the paper is either flat and placedtangent to the globe—a planar or azimuthal projection—orformed into a cone or cylinder and placed over the globe—cylindrical and conical projections. Every map projection distortsdistance, area, shape, direction, or some combination thereof.

map unitsThe units—for example, Metric (meters, kilometers), or Statute(feet, miles)—in which the coordinates of spatial data are stored.

marker symbolA symbol used to represent a point location on a map.

MBCSSee multibyte character set.

measureA value stored along a linear feature that represents a locationrelative to the beginning of the feature, or some point along it,rather than as an x,y coordinate. Measures are used to mapevents, such as distance, time, or addresses, along linear features.

menuA command that arranges other commands into a list.

MGRSSee Military Grid Reference System.

Military Grid Reference System (MGRS)MGRS is an alphanumeric version of a numerical UTM (UniversalTransverse Mercator) or UPS (Universal Polar Stereographic) gridcoordinate.

multibyte character set (MBCS)A multibyte character set is a set of characters in which eachcharacter is represented by one or more bytes. In two-bytecharacters, the first byte, or lead-byte, signals that both it and thefollowing byte are to be interpreted as one character. The firstbyte comes from a range of codes reserved for use as lead bytes.The ranges of bytes that can be lead bytes depends on the codepage in use. For example, Japanese codepage 932 uses the range0x81 through 0x9F as lead bytes, but Korean codepage 949 uses adifferent range. Windows 95/98/Me can only use MBCS.

multichannel receiverA GPS receiver that tracks several satellites at a time using onechannel for each satellite.

multipart featureA geographic feature composed of more than one physical partthat is stored as one object. In a layer of states, for example,Hawaii could be considered a multipart feature because it is madeof many polygons but only references one set of attributes in thedatabase.

multipathAlso multipath error. Errors caused when a GPS satellite signalreaches the GPS receiver from two or more paths, one directlyfrom the satellite and the others reflected from nearby buildingsor other surfaces. Signals from satellites low on the horizon will

GLOSSARY 385

produce more error; many receivers can mask satellite signalscoming from an angle that is too low.

multipoint featureA feature consisting of more than one point that only referencesone set of attributes in the database. For example, a system of oilwells might be considered a multipoint feature, as there is a singleset of attributes for the main well and multiple well holes. Seemultipart feature.

National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA)A U.S. standards committee that defines data message structure,contents, and protocols to allow electronic equipment, includingGPS receivers, to communicate with each other.

NMEA 0183A standard data communication protocol used by GPS receiversand other types of navigation and marine electronics. See alsoNational Marine Electronics Association.

North American Datum of 1927 (NAD 1927,NAD27)The primary local geodetic datum used to map the United Statesduring the middle part of the 20th century, referenced to theClarke spheroid of 1866 and an initial point at Meades Ranch,Kansas. Features on United States Geological Surveytopographic maps, including the corners of 7.5-minute quadranglemaps, are referenced to nad27. It is gradually being replaced bythe North American Datum of 1983.

North American Datum of 1983 (NAD 1983,NAD83)A geocentric datum based on the Geodetic Reference System1980 ellipsoid (grs80). Its measurements are obtained from bothterrestrial and satellite data.

null valueThe absence of a recorded value for a geographic feature. A nullvalue differs from a value of zero in that zero may represent themeasure of an attribute, while a null value indicates that nomeasurement has been taken.

observer heightIn ArcPad, the height of a rangefinder in relation to a referencepoint at ground level.

offsetAn offset combines the use of distance, bearing (or angle), and/orinclination (or slope) to determine the location of features. InArcPad, there are two types of offsets: simple and complex.

panTo move an onscreen display window up, down, or sidewaysover a map or image without changing the viewing scale.

pathAlso pathname. The location of a file or a directory on a disk,given as the drive, directories, subdirectories, and filename, inthat order. The path is always specific to the computer operatingsystem.

pathnameSee path.

PC CardA credit card-sized accessory—as with CompactFlash cards—that comes in Type I, Type II, and Type III formats to provideadditional functions. PC Cards were formally called PersonalComputer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA)cards. Examples of PC Card accessory cards include flash

386 USING ARCPAD

memory, mini hard drives, modems, network cards, and GPSreceivers.

PCMCIAPersonal Computer Memory Card International Association. SeePC Card.

PDOPPositional Dilution of Precision. See Dilution of Precision.

Personal Computer Memory Card InternationalAssociationSee PC Card.

photo layerA photo layer is a file that contains photos with GPS coordinatesin the EXIF header of each photo file. The photo layer file, whichhas an .APH extension, specifies how the photo layer should bedisplayed in ArcPad.

planimetric1. Two-dimensional; showing no relief.

2. A map that gives only the x,y locations of features andrepresents only horizontal distances correctly.

PLGRSee Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver.

Pocket PCWindows Powered devices running the Windows CE 3 operatingsystem, Pocket Outlook, and Pocket Office. The previousgeneration of devices running Windows CE 2.x was referred to asthe Palm-size PC.

pointAlso point feature. A single x,y coordinate that represents ageographic feature such as a telephone pole.

point mode digitizingOne of two methods of digitizing, or capturing, features using theArcPad edit tools. With point mode digitizing, you can create oredit features by digitizing, with the pen or GPS input, a series ofpoints, or vertices. Point mode digitizing is effective when precisedigitizing is required—for example, when digitizing a perfectlystraight line. See also stream mode digitizing.

polygonA two-dimensional closed feature representing an area such as astate or county.

polylineA sequence of points, each pair of which can be connected with astraight line, a circular arc, an elliptical arc, or a Bezier curve. Apolyline with a pair of points that is not connected is called amultipart polyline.

positionAlso location. The latitude, longitude, and altitude (x,y,z) of apoint, often accompanied by an estimate of error. It may also referto an object’s orientation—facing east, for example—withoutreferring to its location.

Positional Dilution of Precision (PDOP)See Dilution of Precision.

postprocessingThe process of correcting GPS field data for Selective Availabilityand other errors using a computer linked to a base station.

GLOSSARY 387

PPSSee Precise Positioning Service.

Precise Positioning Service (PPS)The highest level of military dynamic positioning accuracyprovided by a GPS receiver, using the dual frequency P-Y code.See Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver.

Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver (PLGR)A handheld GPS receiver used by the U.S. military thatincorporates Precise Positioning Service and is unaffected bySelective Availability.

PRJ fileSee projection file.

project1. To display a three-dimensional surface, such as the earth, intwo dimensions. See projection.

2. In ArcView GIS 3.x, a file that organizes the views, tables,charts, layouts, and scripts used for geographic analysis andmapmaking. A project is similar to a map document in ArcView 8.x.

projected coordinate systemA reference system that defines the locations of points on aplanar surface.

projected coordinatesA measurement of locations on the earth’s surface expressed in atwo-dimensional system that locates features based on theirdistance from an origin (0,0) along two axes—a horizontal x-axisrepresenting east–west and a vertical y-axis representing north–south. A map projection transforms latitude and longitude to x,ycoordinates in a projected coordinate system. See alsogeographic coordinates.

projectionSee map projection.

projection fileAlso PRJ file. A text file that stores the parameters for the mapprojection and coordinate system of a geographic dataset.

radial traverseA radial traverse uses 1 or 2 fixed reference points and creates atraverse relative to those fixed points. In other words, you beginat point A and capture the points around the perimeter of A. Youare always standing at the same fixed point when you arecapturing multiple vertices.

rangefinderA device for measuring the distance from a known location(device) to a target. Some rangefinders also measure the bearingand inclination to the target.

rasterA spatial data model made of rows and columns of cells. Each cellcontains an attribute value and location coordinates; thecoordinates are contained in the ordering of the matrix, unlike avector structure, which stores coordinates explicitly. Groups ofcells that share the same value represent geographic features. Seealso image; compare vector.

real-time differential GPSDifferential correction performed and transmitted from a basestation to a roving receiver while it is out collecting data.Differential correction performed at a later time is often referred toas postprocessing.

388 USING ARCPAD

recordA row in a database or in an attribute table that contains all of theattribute values for a single entity.

remote sensingCollecting and interpreting information about the environmentand the surface of the earth from a distance, primarily by sensingradiation that is naturally emitted or reflected by the earth’ssurface or from the atmosphere or by sensing signals transmittedfrom a satellite and reflected back to it. Examples of remotesensing methods include aerial photography, radar, and satelliteimaging.

remote sensing imageryImagery acquired from satellites and aircraft. Examples includepanchromatic, infrared black and white, and infrared colorphotographs and thermal infrared, radar, and microwave imagery.

roverAlso mobile receiver. A portable GPS receiver used to collect datain the field. The rover’s position can be computed relative to asecond, stationary GPS receiver.

S/ASee Selective Availability.

satellite constellation1. The arrangement in space of a set of GPS satellites.

2. All the satellites visible to a GPS receiver at one time.

3. The set of satellites that a GPS receiver uses to calculatepositions.

scaleThe relationship between the dimension of the features on a mapand the geographic objects they represent on the earth,

commonly expressed as a fraction or a ratio. A map scale of1/100,000 or 1:100,000 means that one unit of measure on the mapequals 100,000 of the same unit on the earth. See bar scale.

scale factorThe ratio of the actual scale at a particular place on a map to thestated scale of the map.

scalebarSee bar scale.

scriptA set of instructions for an application program, usually written inthe application’s syntax.

segmentA line that connects vertices.

selectTo choose from a number or group of features or records.

Selective Availability (S/A)The intentional degradation by the U.S. Department of Defense ofthe GPS signal for civilian receivers, which can cause errors inpositions of up to 100 meters. Selective Availability was removedfrom the civilian signal in May 2000.

shade symbolA color or pattern for filling polygons on a map.

shapeThe visible form of a geographic object. Most geographic objectscan be represented on a map using one of three basic shapes:points, lines, or polygons.

GLOSSARY 389

shapefileA vector file format for storing the location, shape, and attributesof geographic features. It is stored in a set of related files andcontains one feature class.

skinA skin is a bitmap that has a window for an application to runwithin. For example, an ArcPad skin could be a bitmap of aWindows CE device so that the PC version of ArcPad can runwithin the screen area of the image.

skyplotThe skyplot graphically shows which GPS satellites are visible tothe GPS receiver and whether or not they are being used by theGPS to calculate a position. See also satellite constellation.

snappingAn automatic editing operation in which points or features withina specified distance or tolerance of other points or features aremoved to match or coincide exactly with each other’s coordinates.

SOGSee Speed Over Ground.

spatial bookmarkIdentifies a particular geographic location that you want to saveand refer to later—for example, a study area.

SPCSee State Plane Coordinate System.

SPCSSee State Plane Coordinate System.

Speed Over Ground (SOG)The actual speed the GPS receiver is moving over the ground.

spheroid1. A three-dimensional shape obtained by rotating an ellipseabout its minor axis, resulting in an oblate spheroid, or about itsmajor axis, resulting in a prolate spheroid.

2. When used to represent the earth, a spheroid as defined in (1),but with dimensions that either approximate the earth as a wholeor with a part that approximates the corresponding portion of thegeoid.

SPSSee Standard Positioning Service.

Standard Positioning Service (SPS)GPS information broadcasted to everyone in the world andaffected by Selective Availability. The normal civilian positioningaccuracy obtained by using the single frequency C/A code.Under Selective Availability conditions, SPS accuracy isguaranteed to be no worse than 100 meters 95 percent of the time.

State Plane coordinate system (SPCS, SPC)A group of planar coordinate systems that divides the UnitedStates into more than 130 zones, so that distortion in each is lessthan one part in 10,000. Each zone has its own map projection andparameters and uses either the nad27 or nad83 horizontal datum.The Lambert conformal conic projection is used for states thatextend mostly east–west, while transverse Mercator is used forthose that extend mostly north–south. The oblique Mercatorprojection is used for the panhandle of Alaska.

stream mode digitizingOne of two methods of digitizing, or capturing, features using theArcPad edit tools. Also known as streaming, stream mode

390 USING ARCPAD

digitizing provides an easy way to capture features when youdon’t require much precision—for example, to digitize someroads. With stream mode, you draw the feature using the mouse,stylus, or the coordinates from the GPS receiver. See also pointmode digitizing.

symbolA graphic pattern used to represent a geographic feature on amap. Symbols can look like what they represent (trees, railroads,houses), or they can be abstract shapes (points, lines, polygons).Many characteristics define symbols, including color, size, angle,and pattern.

symbolizationDevising a set of marks of appropriate size, color, shape, andpattern and assigning them to map features to convey theircharacteristics or their relationships to each other at a given mapscale.

symbologyThe criteria used to determine symbols for features in a layer. Acharacteristic, or attribute, of a feature may influence the size,color, and shape of the symbol used.

tableData arranged horizontally in rows and vertically in columns in arelational database system. A table has a specified number ofcolumns but can have any number of rows. Rows stored in a tableare structurally equivalent to records from flat files in that theymust not contain repeating fields.

tail vertexThe last or end vertex of a line.

target heightThe height of the target above ground. By default, the targetheight is 0 or unknown. If the target height is known andspecified, the resulting coordinate will be the XYZ value of thefeature at ground level; the target height is subtracted. If thetarget height is not known (value of 0), the resulting coordinatewill be the XYZ value of the actual target.

TCP/IPSee Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.

TDOPTime Dilution of Precision. See Dilution of Precision.

text labelSee label.

text symbolA text style defined by font, size, character spacing, color, and soon, used to label maps and geographic features.

Time Dilution of Precision (TDOP)See Dilution of Precision.

toolbarA set of commands, or buttons, that let you carry out relatedtasks.

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet ProtocolTransmission Control Protocol (TCP) is a communication protocollayered above the Internet Protocol (IP). These are low-levelcommunication protocols that allow computers to send andreceive data.

GLOSSARY 391

traverseSee linear or radial traverse.

Trimble Standard Interface Protocol (TSIP)A Trimble proprietary protocol for communicating with TrimbleGPS receivers.

true northAlso geographic north. The direction from any point on theearth’s surface to the north geographic pole. Compare magneticnorth.

TSIPSee Trimble Standard Interface Protocol.

UnicodeA 16-bit character encoding, providing enough encodings for alllanguages. All ASCII characters are included in Unicode aswidened characters. Windows NT/2000/XP can use Unicode orMBCS but use Unicode natively. Windows CE can only useUnicode. See Unicode transformation format 8-bit encoding form.

Unicode transformation format 8-bit encodingformAn encoding system that uses a string of bytes to represent a16-bit Unicode string. Specifically, ASCII text (<=U+007F) remainsunchanged as a single byte, U+0080-07FF (including Latin, Greek,Cyrillic, Hebrew, and Arabic) is converted to a 2-byte sequence,and U+0800-FFFF (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, and others)becomes a 3-byte sequence.

Universal Polar Stereographic (UPS)A projected coordinate system that covers all regions notincluded in the Universal Transverse Mercator coordinatesystem—that is, regions above 84 degrees north and below

80 degrees south. Its central point is either the North or SouthPole. See also Universal Transverse Mercator.

Universal Time Coordinated (UTC)A universal time standard referencing the time in Greenwich,England. Also referred to as GMT or Zulu time.

Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM)A commonly used projected coordinate system that divides theglobe into 60 zones, starting at -180 degrees longitude. Each zoneextends north–south from 84 degrees north to 80 degrees south,spans 6 degrees of longitude, and has its own central meridian.See also Universal Polar Stereographic.

unprojected coordinatesSee geographic coordinates.

UPSSee Universal Polar Stereographic.

UTCSee Universal Time Coordinated.

UTF-8See Unicode transformation format 8-bit encoding form.

UTMSee Universal Transverse Mercator.

VDOPVertical Dilution of Precision. See Dilution of Precision.

392 USING ARCPAD

vector1. A data structure used to represent linear geographic features.Features are made of ordered lists of x,y coordinates andrepresented by points, lines, or polygons; points connect tobecome lines, and lines connect to become polygons. Attributesare associated with each feature—as opposed to a raster datastructure, which associates attributes with grid cells. Compareraster.

2. Any quantity that has both magnitude and direction.

vertexOne of a set of ordered x,y coordinates that constitutes a line orpolygon feature.

Vertical Dilution of Precision (VDOP)See Dilution of Precision.

WAASSee Wide Area Augmentation System.

waypointA GPS term for a permanently stored and named position in theGPS receiver’s memory.

In ArcPad, any selected feature is essentially a waypoint, whichcan be used for GPS navigation.

Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS)A U.S. Federal Aviation Authority system of equipment andsoftware that supplements GPS accuracy, availability, andintegrity.

Windows CEA 32-bit operating system from Microsoft, built to run onembedded devices such as Personal Digital Assistants, tabletPCs, and Auto PCs.

world fileA text file containing the coordinate and scaling information forconverting the coordinates in an image—which usually start at[0,0] and extend to the image’s size in pixels—to map coordinatessuch as latitude–longitude or State Plane. A world file allows animage to be overlaid with vector data of the same geographicarea.

World Geodetic System of 1972 (WGS72)A geocentric datum and coordinate system designed by theUnited States Department of Defense that is no longer in use. SeeWorld Geodetic System of 1984.

World Geodetic System of 1984 (WGS84)The most widely used geocentric datum and geographiccoordinate system today, designed by the U.S. Department ofDefense to replace wgs72. GPS measurements are based onwgs84.

XMLExtensible Markup Language. A markup language similar toHTML. With XML you define data using tags that add meaning.For example, <title>California geology</title> declares the text‘California geology’ to be a title, perhaps for a map. XML is wellformed if an opening tag, such as <title>, and a closing tag, suchas </title>, appear before and after each piece of data.

x,y coordinatesA pair of numbers expressing a point’s horizontal and verticaldistance along two orthogonal axes, from the origin (0,0) wherethe axes cross. Usually, the x-coordinate is measured along theeast–west axis, and the y-coordinate is measured along thenorth–south axis.

GLOSSARY 393

x,y,z coordinatesIn a planar coordinate system, three coordinates that locate apoint by its distance from an origin (0,0,0) where three orthogonalaxes cross. Usually, the x coordinate is measured along the east–west axis, the y coordinate is measured along the north–southaxis, and the z coordinate measures height or elevation.

z coordinateSee z-value.

z-valueAlso altitude, z coordinate. The value for a given surface locationthat represents an attribute other than position. In an elevation orterrain model, the z-value represents elevation; in other kinds ofsurface models, it represents the density or quantity of aparticular attribute.

zoomTo display a larger or smaller region of an onscreen map or image.See also pan.

395

12Index Symbols

2D Modedefined 375

3D Modedefined 375

A

Acquisition timedefined 375

ActiveSync 20Advanced Select tool 142

using 142using the Feature Properties tool 144using the Go To tool 145using the Identify tool 143

Aerial photographdefined 375

Alertsdistance to destination 204

Almanacdefined 375

Altitudedefined 375

Append Vertices tool 332Applets

described 367ArcIMS Internet Server

adding 89ArcIMS layers

adding 90refresh 90

ArcPad Application Builder 9described 366

ArcPad customization files 374ArcPad Graphics Layer file (.apg). See also Graphics

Layeradding 88defined 375described 78

ArcPad Layer Definition file (.apl)described 78

ArcPad Map file (.apm)defined 376described 48, 56, 78, 82

ArcPad map windowdescribed 55

ArcPad Object Model 373ArcPad Options

Alerts 245, 320approaching destination 204

ArcPad preferences file (ArcPadPrefs.apx) 74Camera 231Capture 246described 74Quality 245, 318restoring defaults 74setting 74

ArcPad Photo Layer file (.aph)creating 236defined 376described 78Hyperlink 237Identify 237

ArcPad Preference File (ArcPadPrefs.apx)described 78

ArcPad Studiodescribed 366

ArcPad Stylesheet file (.aps)defined 376described 78

ArcPad Templates 9ArcPad Tools for ArcGIS

data preparation 354, 355export ArcGIS style 353, 362exporting graphics layer 358exporting symbology for shapefiles 358get data for ArcPad 7 355importing graphics layer 360toolbar description 352using the Summary information 357

396 USING ARCPAD

ArcPad XML 373Area

defined 376Attribute table

defined 376Attributes

defined 376editing 346index 86

Azimuthdefined 376

B

Background imagedefined 376

Backsightdefined 376

Bar scaledefined 376

Barcode scanner 276Beacon

defined 376Bearing (BRG)

defined 376Bezier curve

defined 377Bluetooth

described 18Bookmarks. See Spatial bookmarksBRG. See Bearing (BRG)Browse toolbar. See Toolbars: BrowseButton

defined 377

C

CameraEXIF 230, 236GPS coordinates 230photo filenames 234, 235

Camera (continued)photo layer 236picture quality 231selecting 18setting options 231supported 230taking a photo 230, 233, 235

associated with a feature 234standalone 233

Cancel Feature Edits tool 267, 271CF Card. See CompactFlash (CF)Circle tool 285Codepages

defined 377specifying for new shapefiles 251

COG. See Course Over Ground (COG)Column

defined 377Command bar. See Toolbars: Command bar

described 248CompactFlash (CF)

defined 377Compass 207. See GPS Position WindowContacting ESRI 10Coordinate systems

defined 377described 91specifying 92

Coordinatesdefined 377

Course Over Ground (COG)defined 378

Custom Default Configuration File(ArcPad.apx)

described 78Customizing ArcPad 8

D

Data framedefined 378

Data typedefined 378

Datumdefined 378

DD. See Decimal degreesDecimal degrees (DD)

defined 378Default configuration files

described 367Degree

defined 378Degrees/Minutes/Seconds (DMS)

defined 378Deleting

features 271, 272Desktop GIS

defined 378DGPS. See Differential correctionDifferential correction

defined 378described 158postprocessing 158WAAS 159

Differential Global Positioning System(DGPS). See Differential correction

Dilution of Precision (DOP)defined 378described 159

Directorydefined 379

Displayquality 114thresholds 114

Display resolutiondefined 379

Display scaledefined 379

Display unitsdefined 379

Distancedefined 379

INDEX 397

DMS. See Degrees/Minutes/Seconds (DMS)Donut polygon

defined 379DOP. See Dilution of Precision (DOP)DST

defined 379

E

Edit toolbar. See Toolbars: EditEditing

attributes 346changing the size of a feature 344Command bar 61creating line

features 278, 290, 294, 295, 303using a GPS 324using the Freehand Line tool 283using the Line tool 279using the Polyline tool 280

creating new layers 249, 253creating point features 274

averaging GPS positions 319using a GPS 322using the pen 274

creating polygon features 284using a GPS 326, 328using the Polygon tool 287using the Rectangle tool 285

deleting features 271, 272deleting vertices 336Edit toolbar. See Toolbars: Editextending a line 332, 340inserting vertices 334layers 100, 259moving features 264, 266

dragging 264, 266to x,y location using Move To 268to x,y location using the Geography

page 270

Editing (continued)moving vertices 337overview 242overview of process 242selecting features 260, 261

changing the highlight color 262using the Advanced Select tool 263using the Find tool 262using the Select at GPS Position tool 261using the Select tool 260

using a GPS 244Quality, Capture, and Alerts options 318

Elevationdistance 379

Ellipse tool 285Ellipsoid

defined 379EPE. See Estimated Position ErrorEphemeris

defined 379Error messages

Error 55 opening COM1 173ESRI education solutions 10Estimated Position Error (EPE) 318

defined 379EXIF. See Camera: EXIFExiting 76, 77Extending a line 332Extending line features 332, 340Extensions

described 372

F

Featuredefined 380

Feature classdefined 380

Feature Properties dialog box 346Geography page

moving a point 270Picture page 233

Feature Properties toolusing on your query 137with the Advanced Select tool 144

Featureschanging the size

dragging the sizing handles 344creating using simple offsets 303deleting 272Graphics Layer

creating 291defined 381

linecreating 278creating using Freehand Line tool 283creating with a GPS 324creating with Line tool and pen 279creating with Polyline tool and pen 280extending 332

moving 266, 345to x,y location 268

pointcreating 274creating using 1 point offset 306creating using 2 point offset 308creating using rangefinder 328creating with a GPS 322creating with a pen 274

polygoncreating 284, 285creating using Polygon tool 287creating with a GPS 326

repeated. See Repeated featuresrotating 345select for editing 260segmented polyline. See Segmented polyline

featuresField

defined 380File

defined 380

Index.pmd 11/16/2005, 12:59 PM397

398 USING ARCPAD

Filenamedefined 380

Filename extensiondefined 380

Find tool 134, 140Finding a location 140, 141Finding features 134Folder

defined 380Fonts

defined 380Foresight

defined 380Forms

creating 276, 347customizing 371

Freehand Line tool 279, 283Freehand Measure tool 152

using 152Freehand Polygon tool 285

G

GDOP. See Geometric Dilution of Precision(GDOP)

Geographic coordinatesdefined 380

Geographic northdefined 380

Geography Network 89Geography page

displaying 342length of a line 282polygon

perimeter and area 289to move a vertex 342

Geometric Dilution of Precision (GDOP)defined 380

Georeferencedefined 380

Global Bookmark File (ArcPadBookMarks.apx)described 78

Global Navigation Satellite System(GLONASS)

defined 381Global Positioning System. See GPSGLONASS. See Global Navigation Satellite

System (GLONASS)Go To tool

using on your query 138with the Advanced Select tool 145

GPSaccuracy 158

Dilution of Precision 159activating 167connecting a receiver 162

null modem adapters 163setting the GPS port parameters 166setting the GPS protocol 165troubleshooting 169, 173

deactivating 168defined 381described 158Differential GPS 158

postprocessing 158WAAS 159

GPS Debug tool 169NMEA 0183 171TSIP 171

protocolsDeLorme Earthmate 160NMEA 0183 160, 171PLGR 160supported 160TSIP 160

selecting 18, 160GPS Height 302GPS Position Window

closing 186compass 182described 180elevation 183GPS mode 180

GPS Position Window (continued)moving 186navigation information 183opening 186position coordinates 182

selecting 187position measure of quality 184

selecting 188satellite skyplot 181signal chart 181

GPS PreferencesAlerts options 320Capture options 319GPS 165Protocol 165Quality options 318

GPS Tracklogclearing 212described 209Layer Properties 212projection 209settings 212shapefile 209

attributes 210starting 214stopping 214

Graduated color mapdefined 381

Graduated symbol mapdefined 381

Graphic scale. See Bar scaleGraphics Layer. See also ArcPad Graphics

Layer file (.apg)adding text 293creating 290, 293described 290using text 292

Greeking. See Display: quality

INDEX 399

H

HDOPdefined 381

Head vertexdefined 381

Headingdefined 381

Help 75tips on learning ArcPad 9

Highlight colorchanging for selected features 138

HTMLdefined 381

Hyperlinks 132activating 132defined 381displaying 133troubleshooting 133using 133

I

Identifydefined 382selecting a layer 99

Identify tool 130, 131selecting a layer 130using 131using with a query 136using with the Advanced Select tool 143

Identifying features 130Images

adding 87defined 382georeferencing 87supported formats 87

IndexAttribute 141Spatial 141

Initializationdefined 382

Insert Vertices tool 334IP address

defined 382Island polygon

defined 382Item

defined 382

L

Labeldefined 382

Labeling features with text 123using an expression 124

Latitudedefined 382

Latitude–Longitudedefined 382

Layer definitionsdescribed 370

Layer Properties 101changing 102described 65Labels 123Map Grid 105setting 65Tracklog 212transparency 104

Layersadding 85defined 382described 49drawing order 97editing 100, 259properties 101. See Layer Propertiesremoving 98selecting for editing 100selecting for Identify 99symbology 116transparency 104

setting 104

Layers (continued)type 85, 100visibility 96

Linedefined 382

Line tool 278, 279Linear feature. See LineLinear scale. See Bar scaleLinear traverse

defined 383Locales

defined 383Location

defined 383Lock tool

described 73locating 73using 73

Locking. See Lock toolLongitude

defined 383

M

M-valuedefined 383

Magnetic northdefined 383

Main toolbar. See Toolbars: MainMap document

defined 383Map Grid layer

activating 105described 105setting the style 106

Map orientationrotating 69

Map projections. See ProjectionsMap properties

described 62projections

described 64

400 USING ARCPAD

Map properties (continued)setting 62spatial bookmarks 72viewing 62

Map unitsdefined 384

Mapscreating 56, 82, 84

on desktop PCs 82on Windows Mobile 82

defined 383described 48opening 56rotating 69

using a GPS 69saving 76, 77

Marker symboldefined 384

MBCS. See Multibyte character set (MBCS)Measure

defined 384Measure tool 147

using 147Measuring

area 147bearings 147distance 147

Memorymanagement 14program memory 13random access memory (RAM) 13read-only memory (ROM) 13required 15storage memory 14, 18

built-in 13Menu

defined 384MGRS. See Military Grid Reference System

(MGRS)Microsoft ActiveSync 20Military Grid Reference System (MGRS)

defined 384

Move To GPS tool 268Move To Menu 268Move To menu 338, 340Moving features

by dragging 264, 266to x,y location using Move To 268to x,y location using the Geography

page 270Multibyte character set (MBCS)

defined 384Multichannel receiver

defined 384Multipart feature

defined 384Multipath

defined 384Multipoint feature

defined 385

N

National Marine Electronics Association(NMEA)

defined 385Navigation

clearing a destination 193compass 207distance and bearing 206GPS Position Window 206selecting a destination

using Advanced Select 197using Find 194using Go To 192using Go To Selected Feature 200

setting distance alert 204NMEA 0183

defined 385described 171, 175

North American Datum of 1927 (NAD 1927,NAD27)

defined 385

North American Datum of 1983 (NAD 1983,NAD83)

defined 385Null value

defined 385

O

Observer heightdefined 385

Offsetsdefined 3852 point offsets

bearing–bearing 300distance–distance 299

complex1 point offset 298, 3062 point offsets 299, 308described 298

described 297M or Measure field 299moving a vertex using 340simple

described 297performing 303

using the Measure tool with 312Opening

a new map 56an existing map 57

P

Panning 67frame 68

Pathdefined 385

Path optionssetting 57

Pathnamedefined 385

INDEX 401

PC Carddefined 387

PCMCIAdefined 386

PDOP. See Positional Dilution of Precision(PDOP). See Dilution of Precision(DOP)

Photo Layers. See ArcPad Photo Layer file(.aph)

Planimetricdefined 386

PLGR. See Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver(PLGR)

Pocket PC. See also Windows CEdefined 386described 12

Pointdefined 386

Point mode digitizingdefined 386

Point/Vertex dialog box 340Polygon

defined 386Polygon feature tool

selecting 284, 287Polyline

defined 386Polyline tool 278, 280Position

defined 386Positional Dilution of Precision (PDOP) 318

defined 386Postprocessing 158

defined 386PPS. See Precise Positioning Service (PPS)Precise Positioning Service (PPS)

defined 387Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver (PLGR)

defined 387PRJ file. See Projection file

Projectdefined 387

Projected coordinate systemdefined 387

Projected coordinatesdefined 387

Projection filedefined 387

Projectionsdefined 387described 64projection information file (.prj) 64viewing 64

Q

QuickFormcreating 253

R

Radial Measure tool 150using 150

Radial traverse 341defined 387

Rangefinderaccuracy 218activating 225connecting 222

setting communication parameters 224troubleshooting 227

deactivating 225defined 387described 218offsets 219protocols

supported 221Rangefinder Debug tool 226

Rangefinder Preferences 224Raster images. See Images

Real-time differential GPSdefined 387

Recorddefined 388

Rectangle tool 284Reference points

using a GPS to set 308, 329Remote sensing

defined 388Repeated features

creating 294Rotating the map. See Maps: rotatingRover

defined 388

S

Satellite constellationdefined 388

Satellite Skyplot. See GPS Position WindowScale

defined 388Scale bar

defined 388Scale dependent layers

working with 277Scale factor

defined 388Scale Feature tool 344Scripts 373

defined 388Segment

defined 388Segmented polyline features

creating 295Select

defined 388Selective availability (S/A)

defined 388Shade symbol

defined 388

402 USING ARCPAD

Shapedefined 388

Shapefilesadding 86area of feature 289creating new shapefiles 249, 253defined 389described 86length of feature 282packing 272perimeter of feature 289

Signal Chart. See GPS Position WindowSkin

creating 54defined 389described 52using 52

Skyplot. See GPS Position WindowSnapping

buffers 265defined 389described 264shortcut key 265tolerance 264using to create new features 264

Soft Input Panel (SIP) 346SOG. See Speed Over Ground (SOG)Spatial bookmarks

creating 70defined 389described 70global 71managing 72setting 70zooming to 72

Spatial index 86Speed Over Ground (SOG)

defined 389Spheroid

defined 389SPS. See Standard Positioning Service (SPS)

Standard Positioning Service (SPS)defined 389

Start/Stop Editing tool 100Starting ArcPad

on desktop PC 50on Windows Mobile 50

Startup dialog boxcreating a new map 83described 51open an existing map 51turning on 51, 83

State Plane coordinate system (SPCS, SPC)defined 389

Stream mode digitizingdefined 389, 390

Symboldefined 390

Symbolizationdefined 390

Symbologycategories 113, 114complex 111

defined 120displaying 120working with styles 111

default style 119defined 390described 110displaying 115exporting from ArcGIS Desktop 111scale-dependent 122simple 110

defined 110defining in ArcPad 117setting layer style 110

supported symbols 113

T

Tabledefined 390

Table of Contents (TOC)described 49

Tail vertexdefined 390

Target heightdefined 390

TCP/IPdefined 390

TDOPdefined 390

Text label. See LabelText symbol

defined 390Toolbars

Browsedescribed 59, 60

Command bardescribed 59, 61

customizing 369defined 390described 55, 59Edit

described 59, 61, 247displaying 258

Maindescribed 59, 60

Tracklog. See GPS TracklogTraverses

backsight 302, 310described 301foresight 302, 310linear 301

creating 310North reference 302observer height 302radial 301

creating 314target height 302

Trimble Standard Interface Protocol (TSIP)defined 391described 171, 177

INDEX 403

True northdefined 391

TSIP. See Trimble Standard Interface Protocol(TSIP)

U

Undo tool 271, 280Unicode

defined 391Unicode transformation format 8-bit encoding

formdefined 391

Universal polar stereographic (UPS)defined 391

Universal Time Coordinated (UTC)defined 391

Universal transverse mercator (UTM)defined 391

Unprojected coordinates. See Geographiccoordinates

UPS. See Universal Polar Stereographic (UPS)UTC. See Universal Time Coordinated (UTC)UTF-8. See Unicode transformation format 8-

bit encoding formUTM. See Universal Transverse Mercator

(UTM)

V

VDOPdefined 391

Vectordefined 392

Verticeschanging the symbol size 332, 335defined 392deleting 334, 336inserting 281, 287, 334

averaging GPS positions 319, 324pausing using a GPS 325

Vertices (continued)inserting (continued)

streaming vertices interval usingGPS 319, 325

using absolute coordinates 281, 288using snapping 335using the GPS coordinates 281

movingby dragging 337by specifying x,y coordinates 338, 342to the current GPS Position 339using offsets 340using radial traverse 341

snapping to existing features 337

W

WAAS. See Wide Area Augmentation System(WAAS)

Waypoint 191defined 392

Wide Area Augmentation System(WAAS) 159

defined 392Windows CE

defined 392described 12devices

selecting 16supported 15transferring data 20

resources 22supported versions 15

Windows Mobile. See also Windows CEdescribed 12start menu 50

WirelessBluetooth 18described 18

World filedefined 392

World Geodetic System of 1972 (WGS72)defined 392

World Geodetic System of 1984 (WGS84)defined 392

X

XMLdefined 394

X,Y coordinatesdefined 392

X,Y,Z coordinatesdefined 393

Z

Z coordinate. See Z-valueZ-value

defined 393Zooming 67

defined 393fixed 68techniques 68